Corporate History. Mission Statement

Transcription

1

2 Corporate History American Lifting Products, Inc. (the forerunner of ALP Industries, Inc.) in 1981 in Parkesburg, PA. As a result of growth and expansion, the corporate offices were to Coatesville, PA in 1993 and then to Lancaster, PA in ALP s initial expansion occurred with the acquisition of Pennsylvania Sling Company (Harrsiburg, PA and Pittsburgh, PA) and Cobb Wire Rope and Sling Company (Atlanta, GA) in Since then, ALP has grown to 16 locations and 120 employees throughout the United States. ALP s registered trademarks include Penco, Saf-T-Grip, Grip-Tite, Redi-Grip, Mulox, and Tufskin. PMS Blue is the trademarked color of ALP s ratchet and lever type load binders. Look for Redi-Grip Red Sleeve on our wire rope slings. In addition, the combination of Orange and White colored strands in wire rope is a registered trademark of ALP Industries, Inc. ALP focuses upon providing high quality products and unequaled customer service while LIFTING AMERICA - Yesterday, Today & Tomorrow Mission Statement ALP Industries, Inc. is dedicated to its growth, customers, employees, and the concept of linked prosperity. Our mission consists of three interrelated parts: Product Mission: To distribute and sell the finest quality industrial lifting products in the industry. To insure both safety and customer satisfaction. Growth Mission: To take a proactive growth strategy which includes an internal growth rate of sales and an external growth strategy to add additional locations in the Americas to better serve our customers and diversify our product line and customer base. Economic Mission: To operate the company on a sound financial basis of profitable growth and create career opportunities and financial rewards for our employees. Underlying the mission of ALP Industries, Inc. is the determination to seek new and creative ways of addressing all three parts, while holding a deep respect for individuals, inside and outside the company, and for the communities of which they are a part.

3 WIRE ROPE & WIRE ROPE SLINGS T mi y&p p ti s 2 Wi R p I sp cti 5 T ub sh ti Ch ck is 8 Six S R p s 10 R ti R sis R p s 12 G v iz &S i ss 14 B h h m 15 B i 18 Wi c 24 G Wi R p R c mm ti s 27 Wi R p S i s 28 R i-g ip R S v S i s-6x19&6x37c ss 29 S i C p citi s-sp ci S i s 31 C mm T mi ti s 32 P S ck A m s 32 T mi Effici ci s* 33 ELEVATOR PRODUCTS E v Wi R p 34 B h h m Fib C E v R p s 35 B h h miwrce v H is R p s 37 Ush M ti E v Wi R p 38 Zzipc E v Sh ck Ass mb y 40 R E v P uc s 42 CHAIN PRODUCTS A ych i S i s 52 A ych i S i W ki L Limi s 53 A ych i Att chm s 56 Sp ci Ch i Ass mb i s 65 S f Ch i S i Us 68 Ch i S i I sp cti 69 C b Ch i 70 Bi s&ch i s 73 S i ss S Ch i 74 SYNTHETIC SLINGS Sy h ticw bs i s 75 Mu x H vy Du yp y s S i * 78 Mu ti-l Sy h tics i s 79 Sp ci ysy h ticw bs i s 80 W bs i I sp cti 83 P y s R u s i s 84 P y s R u s i I sp cti 85 W bs i H w 86 FITTINGS & BLOCKS Wi R p C ips 92 Li ks&ri s 96 C sby Sh ck s 98 C sby H is H ks 104 Sp ci yf H ks 117 Wi R p Thimb s 120 C sby F Swiv s 123 Wi R p S ck s 126 C sby Tu buck s 132 H is Ri s 136 E c i Fitti s 142 T mi ti s-sm Di m Wi R p s 145 S i ss S Fitti s 149 McKissick S ch B cks 151 W s Wi R p B cks 153 W s M i R p B cks 154 McKissick E sy R v C B cks 155 McKissick Ov h u B s 156 T ck B ck R vi 158 TABLE OF CONTENTS HOISTS & WINCHES E c ic Ch i H is s 159 M u Ch i H is s 162 B mc mps 166 T ys & O h Acc ss i s 168 H Wi ch s 169 Sp ci Pu p s Wi ch s 170 P w Wi ch s 171 BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS Lifti B ms 172 Sp B s 176 P Lift s 177 C i Lift s 178 Sp ci ylift s 179 G bs 182 Sh Lift s 186 L P siti 188 P si-tu 189 C c Buck s 191 C m v S Buck s 191 Lift M s-p m 192 Lift M s-b tt yp w 193 Lift M s-e c ic 194 M ticlifti B ms 194 Lifti C mps&b mg bs 195 FALL RESTRAINT R c b Lif i s 200 H ss s&ki s 201 O h Acc ss i s 202 Susp P s P tf ms 203 CORDAGE Twis R p s 205 B i R p s 207 CARGO CONTROL PRODUCTS L istic&uti i ys p Ass mb i s 209 S f yc si ti s 211 P Numb I tific ti 212 Wi ch s&b s 213 Buck &R ch Sp cific ti s 214 E Fitti H w 216 Sp ci ys ps 218 Ch i s&l Bi s 219 O h C C P uc s 220 TOOLS & OTHER ITEMS C b Cutt s 222 C si P ctiv C ti 225 K i H T s 226 Wi R p G ips 228 M i P uc s 230 USEFUL INFORMATION Wi R p D fi iti s 237 G I us yt ms 239 M ic C v si T b s 240 WIRE ROPE &SLINGS ELEVATOR PRODUCTS CHAIN SYNTHETIC SLINGS FITTINGS & BLOCKS HOISTS & WINCHES BELOW THE HOOK FALL RESTRAINT Cordage Cargo Control TOOLS & OTHER ITEMS USEFUL INFORMATION

4 2 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS WIRE ROPE & WIRE ROPE SLINGS Terminology & Properties With precise, moving parts, designed and manufactured to bear definite relationship to one another, wire rope can be a complex mechanism. Wire rope is generally composed of wires, strands, and the core (See Fig.). The wires are helically laid together in a precise geometric pattern to form the strand. The strands are laid about the core to form the wire rope. The process of positioning the strands about the core is called closing. The process of positioning the wires within the strand is called stranding. Wire rope varies by: Diameter Grade of steel utilized Direction of stranding and closing Wirefinish (Bright, Galvanized, Stainless, etc.) Core material Construction (# of wires/strand and # of strands per wire rope) Each variation changes the performance characteristics of the wire rope. Manufacturers have begun producing limited constructions of Extra Extra Improved Plow Steel (EEIPS), which are 10%-15% higher than similar EIPS grade ropes. Some special constructions exceed EEIPS grade. The Lay of the wire rope (the direction of stranding and closing) directly affects the operating properties. In Regular Lay wire rope, the direction of the wires are twisted in an opposite direction than the direction of the strands. Regular Lay may be Right Regular Lay or Left Regular Lay depending upon the direction of the strands. (Fig. 1) Fig. 1 In Lang Lay wire ropes the direction of the wires are twisted in the same direction as the strands. Lang Lay may be Right Lang Lay or Left Lang Lay depending upon the direction of the strands. (Fig 2) CAUTION: At no time should the measured diameter be less than the nominal diameter of the wire rope. The RIGHT Way The WRONG Way Fig. 2 The first differentiation of wire rope is by diameter. Generally, a new wire rope is manufactured to its nominal diameter + 2 ½%. This allows for the normal reduction of diameter experienced when a new rope is placed under load. The wires of a Regular Lay wire rope travel parallel and along the length of the rope while those of a Lang Lay rope travel parallel to the axis of the strand. In addition, the rope lay length (distance required for one strand to travel 360 o around the core) can vary slightly among manufacturers. The grade of steel utilized in the construction of the wire rope has a major influence upon the ultimate break strength. Most steel wire rope today is Extra Improved Plow Steel Grade (EIPS).

5 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS 3 Most wire rope has a bright, self-colored finish and a coating of lubricant. However, wire ropes can be galvanized, stainless steel, or plastic/vinyl/urethane coated. WIRE ROPE &SLINGS Most wire ropes are supplied with either a fiber or steel core. The core s primary function is to support the outer strands of the rope, maintaining their correct relative position during the operating life. Fiber cores are composed of natural Vegetable Fiber Core (VFC - sisal, etc.) or Synthetic Fiber Core (PFC- polypropylene, etc.) which have been formed into yarns and twisted into strands. Steel cores may be Independent Wire Rope Core (IWRC) or Wire Strand Core (WSC). Steel cores provide greater support to the outer strands than fiber cores during the rope s operating life. Steel cores resist crushing, are more resistant to heat, reduce the amount of stretch, and increase the strength of the rope. Unreeling & Uncoiling The Right Way to Unreel - To unreel wire rope from a heavy reel, place a shaft through the center and jack up the reel far enough to clear the floor and rotate easily. One person holds the end of the rope and walks a straight line away from the reel, taking the wire rope off the top of the reel. A second person regulates the speed of the turning reel by holding a wood block against the flange as a brake, taking care to keep slack from developing on the reel, as this can easily cause a kink in the rope. Lightweight reels can be properly unreeled using a vertical shaft; the same care should be taken to keep the rope taut. The Wrong Way to Unreel - If a reel of wire rope is laid on its flange with its axis vertical to the floor and the rope unreeled by throwing off the turns, spirals will occur and kinks are likely to form in the rope. Wire rope always should be handled in a way that neither twists nor unlays it. If handled in a careless manner, reverse bends and kinks can easily occur. The Right Way to Uncoil - There is only one way to uncoil wire rope. One person must hold the end of the rope while a second person rolls the coil along the floor, backing away. The rope is allowed to uncoil naturally with the lay, without spiraling or twisting. Always uncoil wire rope as shown. The Wrong Way to Uncoil - If a coil of wire rope is laid flat on the floor and uncoiled by pulling it straight off, spirals will occur and kinking is likely. Torsions are put into the rope by every loop that is pulled off, and the rope becomes twisted and unmanageable. Also, wire rope cannot be uncoiled like hemp rope. Pulling one end through the middle of the coil will only result in kinking. Kinks - Care should be taken to avoid kinks in wire rope. Kinks are places where the rope has been unintentionally bent to a permanent set. This happens where loops are pulled through by tension on the rope until the diameter of the loop is only a few inches. They are also caused by bending a rope around a sheave having too severe a radius. Wires in the strands at the kink are permanently damaged and will not give normal service, even after apparent restraightening. Drum Winding - When wire rope is wound onto a sheave or drum, it should bend in the manner in which it was originally wound. This will avoid causing a reverse bend in the rope. Always wind wire rope from the top of the one reel onto the top of the other. Also acceptable, but less so, is re-reeling from the bottom of one reel to the bottom of another. Re-reeling may also be done with reels having their shafts vertical, but extreme care must be taken to ensure that the rope always remains taut. It should never be allowed to drop below the lower flange on the reel. A reel resting on the floor with its axis horizontal may also be rolled along the floor to unreel the rope. Attachment Location - Wire rope should be attached at the correct location, on a flat or smooth-faced drum, so that the rope will spool evenly, with the turns lying snugly against each other in even layers. If wire rope is wound on a smooth-faced drum in the wrong direction, the turns in the first layer of rope will tend to spread apart on the drum. This results in the second layer of rope wedging between the open coils, crushing and flatten the rope as successive layers are spooled.

6 4 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS The Seizing Wire - The seizing wire should be soft or annealed wire or strand. Seizing wire diameter and the length of the seize will depend on the diameter of the wire rope. The length of the seizing should never be less than the diameter of the rope being seized. Proper end-seizing while cutting and installing, particularly on rotation-resistant ropes, is critical. Failure to adhere to simple precautionary measures may cause core slippage and loose strands, resulting in serious rope damage. Refer to the table for established guidelines. If core protrusion occurs beyond the outer strands, or core retraction within the outer strands, cut the rope flush to allow for proper seizing of both the core and outer strands. A simple method of determining how a wire rope should be started on a drum is shown in the above diagram. The observer stands behind the drum, with the rope coming towards him. Using the right hand for Right Lay wire rope, and the left hand for Left Lay wire rope, the clenched fist denotes the drum, the extended index finger the oncoming rope. Seizing Wire Rope Proper seizing and cutting operations are not difficult to perform, and they ensure that the wire rope will meet the user s performance expectations. Proper seizings must be applied on both sides of the place where the cut is to be made. In a wire rope, carelessly or inadequately seized ends may become distorted and flattened and the strands may loosen. Subsequently, when the rope is operated, there may be an uneven distribution of loads to the strands; a condition that will significantly shorten the life of the rope. Either of the following seizing methods is acceptable. Method No. 1 is usually used on wire ropes over 1 in diameter. Method No. 2 applies to ropes 1 and under. Method No. 1 - Place one end of the seizing wire in the valley between two strands. Then turn its long end at right angles to the rope and closely and tightly wind the wire back over itself and the rope until the proper length of seizing has been applied. Twist the two ends of the wire together, and by alternately pulling and twisting, draw the seizing tight. Method No. 2 - Twist the two ends of the seizing wire together, alternately twisting and pulling until the proper tightness is achieved. In the absence of proper seizing wire or tools, the use of sufficiently-sized hose clamps is acceptable. Rope Design All standard preformed wire rope 6x26 Reverse Lay 6-Pac, 6-Pac RV, Flex-X, Endurance Dyform 6 & 8/8PI All standard non-preformed wire rope 19x7 & 8x19 Class Rotation Resistant Endurance Constructex Triple-PAC, Endurance 35x7, Endurance 34LR/PI/MAX SFP 35 SFP19, Endurance Dyform 18/18PI Installation End Preparation Single Seizing Double Seizing (Fused Ends Recommended) Double Seizing AND Fused Ends The majority of wire rope problems occurring during operation actually begin during installation, when the rope is at greatest risk of being damaged. Proper installation procedures are vital in the protection and performance of wire rope products. Provide Proper Storage - Avoid Damage and Moisture Check the Rope Diameter Prior to Installation Use Proper Unreeling/Uncoiling Procedures Keep the Wraps Tight Treat Rotation-Resistant Ropes with Extra Care Secure the Ends Before Cutting Use a Wire Mesh Grip or Chinese Finger (to prevent torque from the old rope, transferring to the new rope) Always Perform a Break-In Procedure to Maximize Service Life Avoid Slack in the Rope Slowly Lift or Release the Load Use the Wire Rope ONLY for the Job it was Intended. Maintain Equipment

7 Wire Rope Inspection The most widely used wire rope replacement, inspection and maintenance standard for mobile-type cranes is ASME B30.5, section The following is an excerpt from that standard. All running ropes in service should be visually inspected once each working day. A visual inspection shall consist of observation of all rope which can reasonably be expected to be in use during the day s operations. These visual observations should be concerned with discovering gross damage, such as listed below which may be an immediate hazard: [A] Distortion of the rope such as kinking, crushing, unstranding, bird-caging, main strand displacement, or core protrusion. Loss of rope diameter in a short rope length or unevenness of outer strands should provide evidence that the rope must be replaced. [B] General corrosion [C] Broken or cut strands [D], distribution, and type of visible broken wires [E] Core failure in rotation resistant ropes: when such damage is discovered, the rope shall be either removed from service or given an inspection (further detail per S-2.4.2). The frequency of detailed and thorough inspections should be determined by a qualified person, who takes into account the following factors: Expected rope life as determined by a) maintenance records, and b) experience on the particular installation or similar installations Severity of environment Percentage of capacity lifts Frequency rates of operation, and exposure to shock loads Inspect the entire length of the rope. Some areas of the wire rope such as around the core are more difficult to inspect. To inspect the core, examine the rope as it passes over the sheaves. The strands have a tendency to open up slightly which will afford the inspector a better view of the core. Also regularly inspect for any reduction in diameter and lengthening of rope lay as both conditions indicate core damage. Basic Guidelines Abrasion - Abrasion damage may occur when the rope contacts an abrasive medium or simply when it passes over the drum and sheaves. Therefore it is vital that all components be in proper working order and of the appropriate diameter of the rope. A badly corrugated or worn sheave or drum will seriously damage a new rope, resulting in premature rope replacement. SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Corrosion - Corrosion is very difficult to evaluate but is a more serious cause of degradation than abrasion. Usually signifying a lack of lubrication, corrosion will often occur internally before there is any visible external evidence on the rope s surface. A slight discoloration caused by rusting usually indicates a need for lubrication which should be tended to immediately. If this condition persists, it will lead to severe corrosion which promotes premature fatigue failures in the wires and strands, necessitating the rope s immediate removal from service. Wire Breaks - The table below shows the number of allowable wire breaks per crane type. The inspector must know the ASME standard for the equipment being inspected. The number of broken wires on the outside of the wire rope is an indication of its general condition and whether or not it must be considered for replacement. The inspector may use a type of spike to gently probe the strands for any wire breaks that do not protrude. Check as the rope runs at a slow speed over the sheaves, where crown (surface) wire breaks may be easier to see. Also examine the rope near the end connections. Keeping a detailed inspection record of the wire breaks and other types of damage will help the inspector determine the elapsed time between breaks. Note the area of the breaks and carefully inspect these areas in the future. Replace the rope when the wire breaks reach the total number allowable by ASME or other applicable specifications. ASME Equipment No. Broken Wires in Running Ropes in: One Rope Lay One Strand in One Rope Lay No. Broken Wires in Standing Ropes in: One Rope Lay Other than the applications listed above, valley breaks or breaks in between strands, must be taken very seriously at all times! When two or more valley breaks are found in one lay-length, immediately replace the rope. 5 One Strand in One Rope Lay B30.2 Overhead and Gantry Cranes 12* 4 N/A N/A B30.4 Portal, Tower and Pillar Cranes 6* 3 3* 2 B30.5 Crawler, Locomotive & Truck Cranes 6* 3 3* 2 B30.6 Derricks 6* 3 3* 2 B30.7 Base-Mounted drum Hoists 6* 3 3* 2 B30.8 Floating Cranes & Derricks 6* 3 3* 2 A10.4 Personnel Hoists 6* 3 2* 2 A10.5 Material Hoists 6* N/A N/A N/A * Also remove for ONE valley break. OSHA require monthly record keeping of wire rope conditions. NOTE: current industry recommendations and OSHA standards are based upon steel sheaves. The manufacturer of plastic and synthetic sheaves or liners should be consulted for its recommendation on the safe application of the product and inspection criteria. WIRE ROPE &SLINGS

8 6 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Valley breaks are difficult to see; however, if you see one you can be assured that there are a few more hidden in the same area. Crown breaks are signs of normal deterioration, but valley breaks indicate an abnormal condition such as fatigue or breakage of other wires such as those in the core. Once crown and valley breaks appear, their number will steadily and quickly increase as time goes on. The broken wires should be removed as soon as possible by bending the broken wire back and forth with a pair of pliers. In this way the wire is more likely to break inside the rope where the ends will be tucked away. If the broken wires are not removed they may cause further damage. The inspector must obey the broken wire standard; pushing the rope for more life will create a dangerous situation. Diameter Reduction - Diameter reduction is critical deterioration factor and can be caused by: Excessive abrasion of the outside wires Loss of core diameter/support Internal or external corrosion damage Inner wire failure A lengthening of rope lay It is important to check and record a new rope s actual diameter when under normal load conditions. During the life of the rope the inspector should periodically measure the actual diameter of the rope at the same location under equivalent loading conditions. This procedure, if followed carefully, reveals a common rope characteristic - after an initial reduction, the overall diameter will stabilize and slowly decrease in diameter during the course of the rope s life. This condition is normal. However, if diameter reduction is isolated to one area or happens quickly, the inspector must immediately determine (and correct, if necessary) the cause of the diameter loss and schedule the rope for replacement. Crushing - Crushing or flattening of the strands can be caused by a number of different factors. These problems usually occur on multi-layer spooling conditions but can occur by simply using the wrong wire rope construction. Most premature crushing and/or flattening conditions occur because of improper installation of the wire rope. In many cases, failure to obtain a very tight first layer (the foundation) will cause loose or gappy conditions in the wire rope which will cause rapid deterioration. Failure to properly break-in the new rope, or worse, to have no break-in procedure at all, will cause similar poor spooling conditions. Therefore, it is imperative that the inspector knows how to inspect the wire rope as well as how that rope was installed. Shock Loading - Shock loading (bird-caging) of the rope is another reason for replacement of the rope. Shock loading is caused by the sudden release of tension on the wire rope and its resultant rebound from being overloaded. The damage that occurs can never be corrected and the rope must be replaced. High Stranding - High stranding may occur for a number of reasons such as failure to properly seize the rope prior to installation or maintain seizing during wedge socket installation. Sometimes wavy rope occurs due to kinks or a very tight grooving problem. Another possibility is simply introducing torque or twist into a new rope during poor installation procedures. This condition requires the inspector to evaluate the continued use of the rope or increase the frequency of inspection. Inspection Guidelines - Specialty Ropes Plastic-Infused Rope - Plastic-infused rope was developed to provide better fatigue, abrasion, and crushing resistance derived from the cushioning and dampening effect of the plastic. However great the benefits; the plastic becomes, at the very least, an inconvenience when trying to inspect the wire rope. Because of the plastic coating, some operators choose to forego inspection and run the ropes to failure. Other operators may just visually inspect the plastic coating. Both practices are wrong and equally carry the potential for disaster. Abrasion and Crushing - When inspecting plastic-infused ropes, the basic inspection guidelines still apply and should be followed. Abrasion and crushing damage may still occur, so it is imperative to inspect flanges, sheaves, bearings, rollers, and fairleads. Look for unusual wear patterns in the plastic - a key indicator that damage to the wire rope is occurring. Wire Breaks - Wire breaks will still occur in a plasticinfused rope but are sometimes extremely difficult to detect, though occasionally a broken wire will protrude through the plastic. Every effort must be made to determine the overall condition of the rope. The plastic covering the crown (surface) wires is generally applied in a thin coat and tends to wear quickly in areas which pass over sheaves and drums. As the rope runs at a slow speed, inspect the rope in these areas. As the rope and plastic open up, the inspector will be afforded a look at not only the surface area but also the inter-strand contact points. If a valley break is detected, immediately pull the ropes from service. Also inspect areas where plastic has peeled, regardless of the location of the window. Remove as much plastic from these areas as possible to allow for efficient and effective inspection techniques. Remember, due to the nature of plastic-infused ropes, there is no way to clearly determine the number of valley breaks. Corrosion - Plastic-infused ropes provide only improved corrosion resistance. Regardless of manufacturers claims, a plastic-infused rope can corrode and rope failure due to corrosion is still possible. Moisture is sometimes trapped in the rope and, as with all machines, the lubricant may become ineffective over time. The inspector must visually check for any signs of corrosion damage as evidenced by rope bleeding or rouging. In addition, the diameter must be frequently measured. If there is any damage to the core, it will be detected by a reduction in diameter. Also inspect the lay of the rope. As the plastic is thinner over the crown

9 wires, a thorough inspection may be able to determine a lengthening of lay, also a sign of rope deterioration. Especially when trying to determine lengthening of lay, watch for and inspect areas where the plastic pulls away from the rope. While peeling, in and of itself, is not an indication of rope deterioration and is a factor of normal wear, peeling in areas where no abrasion exists may signify a problem. SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Overall, perhaps the most important inspection technique is recognizing the limits of wire rope. While it s true that compacted and plastic-infused ropes are more durable, neglect and abuse will still quickly end the rope s life. There is no substitute for proper installation, handling, and inspection techniques in combination with a preventative maintenance program. 7 WIRE ROPE &SLINGS Maintenance Records - Equally important in inspecting plastic-infused ropes is maintaining accurate service records. The service records of previous ropes will provide a guideline as to the expected life of the rope. However, they should not be used alone or only in conjunction with visual inspections due to the number of variables which exist, including installation, spooling and manufacturing practices. Maintenance records must be used in combination with both visual and physical inspection techniques to be truly of value in determining the remaining life of the rope. Compacted Rope - Die-drawn and swaged ropes fall into the compacted category. Compacting serves several purposes. By flattening the outer wires, metallic area increases allowing for a higher breaking strength as well as improved crushing and abrasion resistance. In addition, the compaction minimizes inter-strand nicking and thereby improves fatigue resistance. In the inspection of compacted rope designs, again it is imperative to follow the basic inspection guidelines and use both visual and actual measuring techniques to determine the remaining life of the rope. In fact, actual measuring techniques are very important when inspecting these ropes. While corrosion is relatively easy to visually determine, diameter reduction may not be due to the compacted rope s appearance. Therefore the inspector must regularly measure for diameter reduction and closely examine the rope for lay lengthening. Measurements must be recorded and the rope monitored for sudden variations. By and large, the most difficult retirement criterion for compacted ropes is determining wire breaks. These breaks may not protrude from the rope due to the compaction and can be easily overlooked. Because of this, the inspector must slowly and carefully examine the rope, especially in those areas passing over drums and sheaves or in areas where problems existed in previous ropes. A wire break may appear as nothing more than a crack in the wire and, again, can be easily overlooked. If the inspector notes a flaw in a wire, it should be carefully checked. The inspector should carry some type of magnifying device to determine if a flaw is actually a break. If a break has occurred, thoroughly check the area for additional breaks, both on the crown and in the valleys. Remember, valley breaks in round strand ropes are difficult to determine; compaction only increases the difficulty. The inspector must be slow and methodical in inspecting compacted ropes; a quick check will reveal nothing.

10 8 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Troubleshooting Checklist TENSION BREAK Wire break shows one end of broken wire coned, the other cupped. Necking down of the broken ends is typical of this type break. Where tension breaks are found, the rope has been subjected to overloading, either for its original strength (new rope) or for its remaining strength in the case of a used rope. Tension breaks are frequently caused by the sudden application of a load to a slack rope, thereby setting up incalculable impact stress. Tension (Cone) Tension (Cup) Tension & Wear ABRASION BREAK Wire break shows broken ends worn to a knife-edge thinness. Abrasive wear is obviously concentrated at points where the rope contacts an abrasive medium, such as the grooves of sheaves and drums or other objects with which the rope comes into contact. Unwarranted abrasive wear indicates improperly grooved sheaves and drums, incorrect fleet angle, or other localized abrasive conditions. Abrasion FATIGUE BREAK Wire breaks are usually transverse or square showing granular structure. Often these breaks will develop a shattered or jagged fracture, depending on the type of operation. Where fatigue breaks occur, the rope has repeatedly been bent around too small a radius. Whipping, vibration, slapping, and torsional stresses will also cause fatigue. Fatigue breaks are accelerated by abrasion and nicking. Fatigue Fatigue Fatigue & Wear Fatigue & Nicking (Jagged Type) CORROSION BREAK Easily noted by the wire s pitted surface, wire breaks usually show evidence of tension, abrasion, and/or fatigue. Corrosion usually indicates improper lubrication. The extent of the damage to the interior of the rope is extremely difficult to determine; consequently corrosion is one of the most dangerous causes of rope deterioration. Corrosion CUT OR SHEAR Wire will be pinched down and cut at broken ends or will show evidence of shear-like cut. This condition is evidence of mechanical abuse caused by agents outside the installation, or by something abnormal on the installation itself, such as a broken flange. Cut or Shear

11 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS 9 ABRASION Frozen Sheaves or Rollers Tight Grooves Excessive Fleet Angle Misaligned Sheaves Corrugated Sheave or Drum Sheave Overspin Rope Jumping the Sheave Poor Spooling Oversized or Undersized Rope Abrasion WIRE ROPE &SLINGS CORE PROTRUSION & SLIPPAGE Shock-loading Poor Installation Techniques Poor Seizing Techniques CORROSION Lack of Lubrication Fume Exposure CRUSHING Poor Installation Techniques Cross-winding Poor Spooling Environmental Damage (e.g., acidic) Incorrect WR Construction Poor Break-in Procedure Excessive Fleet Angle Core Protrusion (Shockloading) DIAMETER REDUCTION Lack of Lubrication (fiber core) Excessive Abrasion Corrosion (internal and/or external) FATIGUE Out of Round Sheaves Tight Grooves Misaligned Sheaves Undersized Sheaves HIGH STRANDING Poor Seizing Techniques Tight Grooves Undersized Sheaves JUMPING THE SHEAVE Poor Spooling Excessive Rope Length KINKING Poor Unreeling Procedures Poor Installation Techniques Undersized Sheaves Worn Bearings Vibration Slapping Whipping Corrosion Crushing LAY LENGTHENING & TIGHTENING Poor Installation Techniques Poor Unreeling Procedures Corrosion Fatigue (Reverse Bend) LOOPED WIRES Poor Installation Techniques UNBALANCED ROPE Oversized Sheaves Fatigue (Undersized Sheave)

12 10 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Six Strand Ropes 6x19 Class 6x36 Class Strands: 6 Wires per strand: 19 to 26 Core: IWRC or Fiber Core Standard Grade: EIPS Lay: Regular or Lang Finish: Bright or Galvanized The 6x19 classification of wire rope is the most widely used. With its good combination of flexibility and wear resistance, rope in this class can be suited to the specific needs of diverse kinds of machinery and equipment. The 6x19 Seale construction, with its large outer wires, provides great ruggedness and resistance to abrasion and crushing. However, its resistance to fatigue is somewhat less than that offered by a 6x25 construction. The 6x25 possesses the best combination of flexibility and wear resistance in the 6x19 class due to the filler wires providing support and imparting stability to the strand. The 6x26 Warrington Seale construction has high resistance to crushing. This construction is a good choice where the end user needs the wear resistance of a 6x19 class rope and the flexibility midway between a 6x19 class and 6x37 class rope. Strands: 6 Wires per strand: 27 to 49 Core: IWRC or Fiber Core Standard Grade: EIPS Lay: Regular or Lang Finish: Bright or Galvanized The 6x36 class of wire rope is characterized by the relatively large number of wires used in each strand. Ropes of this class are among the most flexible available due to the greater number of wires per strand, however their resistance to abrasion is less than ropes in the 6x19 class. The designation 6x36 is only nominal, as in the case with the 6x19 class. The ropes may not actually have 36 wires per strand. Improvements in wire rope design, as well as changing machine designs, have resulted in the use of strands with widely varying numbers of wires and a smaller number of available constructions. Typical 6x36 class constructions include 6x33 for diameters under 1/2, 6x36 Warrington Seale (the most common 6x36 class construction) offered in diameters 1/2 through 1-5/8, and 6x49 Filler Wire Seale over 1-3/4 diameter.

13 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS 11 6 x 19 Class 6x19 Seale 6x19 Warrington 6x21 Filler Wire 6x21 Seale 6x25 Filler Wire Rope Diameter Technical Data Approximate (lb/ft) Nominal Strength - tons* (Bright or Drawn Galvanized**) EIPS EEIPS (mm) Fiber Core IWRC Fiber Core IWRC IWRC 1/ / / / WIRE ROPE &SLINGS 6x25 Seale 1/ / x26 Warrington Seale 5/ / / / / / / / / Figure depicts a Right Lang Lay wire rope. 1-7/ / / / / / x 36 Class * Tons of 2,000 lb. ** Reduced values for coated galvanizing. 6x31 Warrington Seale 6x33 Warrington Seale 6x36 Warrington Seale 6x41 Warrington Seale 6x43 Filler Wire Seale Technical data for the above listed constructions are the same and detailed in the table. For further information on additional constructions and diameters, contact your ALP Sales Representative. 6x49 Filler Wire Seale Figure depicts a Right Regular Lay wire rope.

14 12 Rotation Resistant Ropes SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS In certain instances the use of rotation-resistant wire rope is necessary to provide rotational stability to the lifted load. In general, the use of these wire ropes is limited to those situations where it is impractical to: Use a tag line Relocate rope dead end Increase sheave sizes Eliminate odd-part reeving Significantly reduce rope loading and rope fall length Rotation-resistant wire ropes have less of a tendency to unlay when loaded than do conventional wire ropes. This results in improved rotational stability to the lifted load. Rotation-resistant wire ropes are designed in such a way that the rotational force of the outer strands is partially counteracted by the rotational force of the inner strands or core when the rope is subjected to a load. The chart compares the rotational properties of rotation-resistant ropes with a standard 6x25 wire rope. The rotation-resistant ropes far surpass the rotational stability of a conventional 6x25 IWRC wire rope on both short and long falls. SAFETY DESIGN FACTORS ASME B30.5 specifies that rotation-resistant ropes have a safety design factor of five or greater. The required strength design factor of rotation-resistant rope becomes very important from the standpoint of maintaining the inherent low rotation of the rope and eliminating any tendency to overload the inner core, thereby causing a reduction in rope strength. HANDLING & INSTALLATION Precautions should be followed when using rotation-resistant wire rope. The rope ends must be properly seized and secured (refer to Handling and Installation: Seizing Wire Rope ) and cut with a saw or impact hammer to prevent unlaying of the strands. Attachment of end fittings must be done with care to prevent kinking or unlaying of rope, which harms the balance of the rope. Operation of rotation-resistant wire ropes (excluding SFP 35 ) with a swivel is generally not recommended. The use of a swivel allows the inner core to twist tighter, resulting in a significant reduction in rope strength, possibly leading to premature rope failure. A swivel may be used as a temporary device only during the initial installation period to help eliminate any installation-induced twisting or cabling. The swivel must be removed from the reeving after the rope installation is completed and before the crane begins operation. Due to the opposite lay direction of the inner core and outer strand layers in rotation-resistant ropes, care should be taken to avoid shock loading. Shock loading will result in distortion of the rope structure, causing bird-caging, core protrusion, etc. Due to the potential for complete rope failure, shock-loaded wire ropes must be immediately removed from service.

15 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS 13 The rated strengths of the 19x7 and 8x19 class wire ropes are less than wire ropes in the 6x19 and 6x36 classes. Larger sheaves are required in order to achieve comparable fatigue life. For further information on proper sheave sizes, contact your ALP Sales Representative. WIRE ROPE &SLINGS 19 x 7 Rotation-Resistant 8 x 19 Rotation-Resistant Strands: 19 Wires Per Strand: 7 Core: WSC Standard Grade(s): EIPS Lay: Regular Finish: Bright 19x7 is recommended for hoisting unguided loads with a single-part line. The rotation-resistant properties of this rope are secured by two layers of strands. The inner strands are left lay, while the 12 outer strands are right lay, which enables one layer to counteract the other layer s rotation. The rotation-resistant characteristics of the 19x7 wire ropes are superior to those of the 8x19 Class wire ropes. Rope Diameter Approx. Nominal Strength (tons*) (mm) (lbs/ft) EIPS 3/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / * Tons of 2,000 lbs. Wires Per Strand: 19 Core: IWRC Standard Grade(s): EIPS Lay: Regular Finish: Bright 8x19 is recommended for hoisting unguided loads with a single-part or multi-part line. The eight outer strands are manufactured in right lay, with the inner strands being left lay. These ropes are slightly stronger and significantly more rugged than the 19x7 construction. However, the rotationresistant properties of the 8x19 rotation-resistant ropes are much less than those of the 19x7 construction. These ropes are manufactured in right regular lay in the 8x19 Seale and 8x25 Filler Wire constructions. Rope Diameter Approx. Nominal Strength (tons*) (mm) (lbs/ft) EIPS 1/ / / / / / / / / * Tons of 2,000 lbs.

16 14 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Galvanized & Stainless Galvanized Small diameter galvanized wire rope, sometimes called Galvanized Aircord, has many applications. These include small winches and hoists, overhead doors, yacht rigging, and clothes line. This rope may also be coated with vinyl, plastic, or urethane. When used as an operating rope they should be lubricated. ALP has both domestic and imported sources for these products. In some applications, these ropes are required to conform to MIL-DTL x7 Galvanized 7x19 Galvanized Diameter Nominal Strength Approx. lb/100 ft Nominal Strength Approx. lb/100 ft 3/ / / , /8 1, , /32 2, , /16 3, , /32 4, , /4 6, , /16 9, , /8 13, , * Made to commercial standard. Available in other diameters. Stainless (Corrosion Resistant) Stainless ropes are used in environments which would quickly degrade bright or galvanized ropes. The term Corrosion Resistant is technically preferable to Stainless because these products are not stainless in all atmospheres. Types 302/304 are offered in all common sizes. Types 305/316 are available on special order. All operating ropes should be lubricated. In some applications, these ropes are required to conform to MIL-DTL Diameter Nominal Strength 7x7 Stainless Approx. lb/100 ft Nominal Strength 7x19 Stainless Approx. lb/100 ft 3/ * / / /8 1, , /32 2, , /16 3, , /32 4, , /4 6, , /32 7, , /16 9, , /8 12, , * Made to commercial standard. Available in other diameters. These items will require special order. ALP stocks many common diameters of small strand products. Strand products generally have constructions like 1x7, 1x19, etc. Both galvanized and stainless strand products are available. Various grades of strand are available including aircraft quality, common grade, utility grade and EHS. In addition, larger diameter products are available for pendants and support lines. Strand Products Diameter Nominal B/S Approx. lbs./ 100 ft Diameter Nominal B/S Approx. lbs/100 ft 1/4 5, /4 49, /16 8, /8 66, /8 11, , /16 16, /8 106, /2 22, /4 129, /16 28, /8 153, /8 35, /2 180, Manufactured to RRW-410F where applicable.

17 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS 15 Bethlehem WIRE ROPE &SLINGS Super Flex Pac 19 Rotation- Resistant Strands: 19 Wires Per Strand: 19 Core: WSC Standard Grade(s): EEIPS Lay: Right Regular Finish: Bright SFP 19 is recommended for both multipart load and singlepart fast line applications where rotational stability of the lifted load is needed, such as for use as long fall on offshore pedestal cranes, rough and all terrain cranes, and crawler cranes. SFP 19 PROVIDES: Fatigue Resistance Improved fatigue properties are derived through the combination of the flexible 19x19 construction and die drawn strands. The drawn strand surfaces minimize the interstrand and interlayer nicking that take place in round rotation-resistant ropes. Abrasion Resistance. Die drawn ropes provide improved abrasion resistance as compared with round wire ropes because of the greater wire and strand bearing surfaces contacting sheaves and drum. Resistance to Drum Crushing SFP 19 wire ropes are resistant to the effects of drum crushing due to the compacted strands and smoothness of the rope surface. Flexibility. With 19 strands of 19 wires in all diameters, SFP 19 remains extremely flexible and easy to handle during both the installation process and under the extremely harsh conditions from fast line speeds during spooling. Rope Diameter Approximate Nominal Strength (tons*) (mm) lb/ft Royal Purple (EEIPS) 7/ / / / / / / / / / * Tons of 2,000 lbs. Strands: 6 Wires Per Strand: 19 to 36 Core: IWRC Standard Grade(s): EEIPS Lay: Right Regular Finish: Bright 6-PAC is recommended for use where the rope is subject to heavy use or where conditions are extremely abusive, such as offshore pedestal, crawler and lattice-boom-equipped truck crane boom hoist applications. Also recommended for winch lines; overhead cranes; multipart hoist lines where rotationresistant ropes are not required; and other applications where flexibility, high strength and resistance to crushing are important, and a cost-effective, 6-strand rope is desired. 6-PAC PROVIDES: Fatigue Resistance Improved fatigue properties are derived from the combination of 6-PAC s flexible constructions and the compacted strand surface minimizes the interstrand and interlayer nicking that take place in standard 6-strand ropes. Abrasion Resistance 6-PAC s compacted strand design provides improved abrasion resistance as compared to standard 6-strand ropes because of the increased wire and strand surfaces contacting sheaves and drums. Flexibility 6-PAC s design provides increased flexibility, making it easy to install, and 6-PAC also offers better spooling at high line speeds. Resistance To Multilayer Drum Crushing 6-PAC dramatically increases the amount of wire contact with the drums and sheaves, reducing the wire rope, sheave and drum wear normally associated with standard wire rope. Damage at the crossover points is also reduced. Rope Diameter 6-PAC Standard Constructions Approx. lb/ft Nominal Strength (tons*) (mm) Royal Purple (EEIPS) 3/ x19 Seale / x19 Seale / x / x / x / x / x x / x / x / x / x / x / x

18 16 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Strands: 35 Wires per Strand: 7 Core: WSC Standard Grade: 2160 N/mm 2 Lay: Right Lang Finish: Bright SFP 35 is a rotation-resistant rope of high strength that can resist block twist in long falls. SFP 35 PROVIDES: Super Flex PAC 35 Superior Rotation Resistance The SFP 35 rope is the most rotation-resistant rope manufactured by WW. Due to its rotation-resistant properties, SFP 35 may be used with a swivel in both single part and multiple part reeving. High Strength WW s compaction process provides a high strength rope which exceeds EEIP nominal break strength. Application SFP 35 excels in crawler and truck-type crane load lines, and tower crane ropes. Flexibility SFP 35 s multiple-strand construction provides increased flexibility which improves service life and highspeed spooling. The compacted multiple strand construction also reduces sheave and drum abrasion and provides excellent resistance to drum crushing. Super Flex Pac 35 (SPF 35) Rope Diameter Approx. Wt. Nominal Strength (mm) kg/m lb/ft kn tons* / / / * Tons of 2,000 lbs. Strands: 8 Wires per Strand: 19 to 36 Core: Plastic Filled (BXL) Standard Grade: Royal Purple Lay: Right Finish: Bright 8-PAC is recommended for hoist ropes for steel mill ladle cranes and hoist and trolley ropes for container cranes, or other hoisting applications with heavy duty cycles or wherever severe bending occurs. 8-PAC PROVIDES: 8-PAC Superior Performance 8-PAC has higher breaking strength and gives superior performance in difficult hoisting applications compared to 6-strand and 6-strand compacted ropes. Abrasion Resistance 8-Pac s compacted strand design provides improved abrasion resistance as compared to standard 6-strand and 8-strand ropes because of the increased wire and strand surfaces contacting the sheaves and drums. Superior Flexibility 8-Pac is significantly more flexible than standard 6-strand and compacted 6-strand ropes with better spooling and longer service life. Resistance to Multilayer Drum Crushing 8-PAC s plastic filled (BXL) core offers increased resistance to crushing through better support of the outer strands. Rope Diameter Standard Construction 8-PAC Approx. Wt. (lb/ft) Minimum Breaking Strength (net tons) 5/8 8x26 WS /4 8x26 WS /8 8x26 WS x26 WS /8 8x26 WS /4 8x31 WS * Tons of 2,000 lbs. Other Sizes are Available.

19 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS 17 Triple - PAC Strands: 6 Wires per strand: 26 to 36 Core: IWRC Standard Grade(s): Royal Purple Lay: Right Regular Finish: Bright BXL Strands: 6 Wires per Strand: 19 to 36 Core: IWRC Std. Grade(s): Purple + (EIPS) Lay: Regular or Lang Finish: Plastic-Infused WIRE ROPE &SLINGS Triple-PAC was developed for the most demanding hoist applications. Triple-PAC offers the extra high-strength and crushing resistance needed for applications such as boom hoist ropes, boom pendants, and multipart load lines. Triple-PAC PROVIDES: Superior Abrasion and Fatigue Resistance Compared with most compacted ropes due to Wire Rope Work s unique design of compacting the IWRC, individual strands, and the rope itself. Other Benefits Include: High Strength Triple-PAC is designed to provide a nominal strength of 35% above EIP. WW achieves this strength through selected grades of steel and Triple-PAC s unique design and manufacturing processes. Superior Resistance to Multilayer Drum Crushing Triple-PAC provides superior resistance to crushing through its design. Triple compaction provides a more dense cross section, enabling the rope to withstand the rigors of multilayer spooling. Damage at the cross over points is also significantly reduced. In addition, Triple-PAC s design increases the amount of wire contact with sheaves and drums, reducing wire rope, drum, and sheave wear. Triple-PAC Rope Diameter Approx. (lbs./ft) Nominal Strength (tons)* (mm) Royal Purple Plus (EEIPS) 7/ / / / / / / / / / * Tons of 2,000 lbs. BXL is infused with a special polymer, creating a wellbalanced matrix. BXL is recommended for numerous hoist, marine, and logging rope applications. BXL PROVIDES: Fatigue Resistance Improved fatigue resistance is derived from the cushioning and dampening effect of the polymer on the wires and strands. BXL evenly distributes stresses which may lead to fatigue breaks. Abrasion Resistance The polymer acts as a barrier between the individual strands, preventing penetration of any adverse material. BXL distributes and reduces contact stresses between the rope and sheave, reducing wire rope wear. Resistance to Multilayer Drum Crushing BXL s smooth profile evenly distributes crushing pressures from the overlying layers of rope in multilayer drum winding applications. Extended Sheave and Drum Service Life BXL minimizes corrugation and wear normally associated with standard rope usage by restricting water and dirt penetration and eliminating pickup of abrasive materials. Rope Diameter BXL Approx. Wt. (lb/ft) Nominal Strength* Tons (2,000 lbs) (mm) 3/ / / / / / / / / / / The strengths listed in the table reflect only the 6 x 19 and 6 x 36 classes. BXL, or plastic-infused, may be added to many products, excluding rope design in which the rope itself is compacted.

20 18 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Bridon Dyform 6 Dyform 6PI Benefits Exceptional service life Robust crush resistant Dyform construction Accurate diameter recommended for multi-layer spooling Long life, reduced lifetime costs Applications Telescopic mobile cranes Mobile lattice boom cranes Tower cranes Offshore pedestal cranes Dockside cranes Mobile harbour cranes Floating Cranes Ship cranes Ship to shore container cranes Bulk unloader cranes Overhead hoists/gantry cranes Steel works ladle cranes Piling ropes Container handling cranes Benefits Engineered flutes define exact location of outer strands extending bending fatigue life Exceptional service life Robust, crush resistant Dyform construction Accurate diameter Long life, reduced lifetime costs Plastic encapsulated core Reduced stretch Applications Ship to shore container cranes Ship lift ropes Dyform 6 & Dyform 6PI Diameter Minimum Breaking Force EIP/1960 EEIP/2160 (mm) kg/m lb/ft kn Tons (2,000 lb) kn Tons (2,000 lb) 3/ / / / / / / / / / / Other sizes available.

21 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS 19 Dyform 18 Dyform 18 PI WIRE ROPE &SLINGS Benefits High breaking force Rotation resistant Reduced sheave wear Long service life Reduced downtime Applications Telescopic mobile cranes Mobile lattice boom cranes Tower cranes Offshore pedestal cranes Dockside cranes Mobile harbour cranes Ship cranes Overhead hoists/gantry cranes Benefits Plastic impregnated - Extends fatigue life - Improves structural stability - Resists Corrosion High breaking force Rotation Resistant Reduced sheave wear Long service life Reduced downtime Applications Telescopic mobile cranes Mobile lattice boom cranes Tower cranes Offshore pedestal cranes Dockside cranes Mobile harbour cranes Ship cranes Overhead hoists/gantry cranes Dyform 18 & Dyform 18 PI Diameter Minimum Breaking Force Dyform (mm) kg/m lb/ft kn Tons (2,000 lb) 3/ / / / / / / / / Other sizes available.

22 20 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Dyform 8 Dyform 8PI Benefits Excellent service life Lower downtime Flexible eight strand construction High temperature lubricant available Robust crush resistant Dyform construction Recommended for multi-layer spooling Reduced lifetime costs Applications Mobile lattice boom cranes Ship cranes Ship to shore container cranes Overhead hoists/gantry cranes Steel works ladle cranes Container handling cranes Benefits High breaking force Excellent service life Reduced downtime Flexible eight strand construction High temperature lubricant available Consistent performance Reduced lifetime costs Plastic encapsulated core Reduced stretch Recommended for multi-layer spooling Applications Telescopic mobile cranes Mobile lattice boom cranes Tower cranes Offshore pedestal cranes Dockside cranes Mobile harbour cranes Floating cranes Ship cranes Ship to shore container cranes Overhead hoists/gantry cranes Steel works ladle cranes Piling ropes Container handling cranes Ship lift ropes Dyform 8 & Dyform 8PI Diameter Minimum Breaking Force EIP/1960 EEIP/2160 (mm) kg/m lb/ft kn Tons (2,000 lb) kn Tons (2,000 lb) 3/ / / / / / / / / Other sizes available.

23 Dyform 8Max SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Constructex 21 WIRE ROPE &SLINGS Benefits Higher MBF than CTX Superior crush resistance Better fatigue life Excellent service life Lower downtime Recommended multi-layer spooling Applications Telescopic mobile cranes Mobile lattice boom cranes Tower cranes Offshore pedestal cranes Dockside cranes Mobile harbour cranes Floating cranes Ship cranes Ship to shore container cranes Overhead hoists/gantry cranes Steel works ladle cranes Container handling cranes Diameter Dyform 8MAX (mm) kg/m lb/ft kn Minimum Breaking Force Dyform Tons (2,000 lb) / / Other sizes available. Benefits Rotary hammer swaged effect for maximum resistance to damage Exceptional service life in the most demanding applications Robust construction High breaking force Excellent crush resistance Applications Mobile lattice boom cranes Tower cranes Offshore pedestal cranes Dockside cranes Bulk unloader cranes Piling Diameter Constructex (mm) kg/m lb/ft kn Minimum Breaking Force CTX Tons (2,000 lb) 5/ / / / / / / Other sizes available.

24 22 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Dyform 34 LR Dyform 34 LR PI Benefits Low rotation Recommended for high lifting operations High breaking force Reduced rope sheave wear Accurate diameter, recommended for multi-layer spooling Suitable for single part and multi-part reeving Long service life Crush resistant Reduced down time Resistance to bending fatigue Reduced elongation Applications Telescopic mobile cranes Mobile lattice boom cranes Tower cranes Offshore pedestal cranes Dockside cranes Mobile harbour cranes Floating cranes Ship cranes Overhead hoists/gantry cranes Piling ropes Benefits Plastic impregnated - Extends fatigue life - Improves structural stability - Resists corrosion Low rotation Recommended for high lifting operations High strength Accurate diameter, recommended for multi-layer spooling Suitable for single part and multi-part reeving Long service life Resistance to bending fatigue Reduced elongation Applications Telescopic mobile cranes Mobile lattice boom cranes Tower cranes Offshore pedestal cranes Dockside cranes Mobile harbour cranes Floating cranes Ship cranes Dyform 34LR & Dyform 34LR PI Diameter Minimum Breaking Force EIP/1960 EEIP/2160 (mm) kg/m lb/ft kn Tons (2,000 lb) kn Tons (2,000 lb) 9/ / / / / / Other sizes available.

25 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS 23 Dyform 34 LR MAX Dyform 34 XL WIRE ROPE &SLINGS Benefits Low rotation Recommended for high lifting operations High breaking force Reduced rope sheave wear Accurate diameter, recommended for multi-layer spooling Suitable for single part and multi-part reeving Long service life Resistance to bending fatigue Reduced elongation Applications Telescopic mobile cranes Mobile lattice boom cranes Tower cranes Offshore pedestal cranes Dockside cranes Mobile harbour cranes Floating cranes Ship cranes Overhead hoists/gantry cranes Piling ropes Benefits Low rotation Recommended for high lifting operations High breaking force Reduced rope sheave wear Accurate diameter, recommended for multi-layer spooling Suitable for single part and multi-part reeving Long service life Crush resistant Reduced down time Resistance to bending fatigue Reduced elongation Applications Mobile lattice boom cranes Offshore pedestal cranes Dockside cranes Bulk unloader cranes Piling Tower cranes Diameter Dyform 34LR MAX (mm) kg/m lb/ft kn Minimum Breaking Force Tons (2,000 lb) 9/ / / / / / Other sizes available. Diameter Dyform 34 XL Minimum Breaking Force (mm) kg/m lb/ft kn kn / / / /

26 24 Wireco SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Flex-X 6 Flex-X 19 Increased rope stability Superior performance 6-strand rope Increased service life Less sheave and drum wear Most applications for wire rope are extremely demanding. Wire rope must resist crushing, bending fatigue, and abrasion. For example, clamshell closing lines must resist bending fatigue and boom hoists are subject to pressures that cause crushing. Overhead hoists test the stability and strength of a wire rope. All drum-related applications demand a rope that will spool and operate smoothly and dependably. For crane applications where rotation-resistance is not required, Flex-X 6 provides users with superior performance and increased service life in many applications compared to the ropes they had previously employed. When compared to conventional 6 strand ropes, Flex-X 6 ropes provide greater surface area and more steel per given diameter, which increases rope stability and strength, too. This results in longer service life and less sheave and drum wear. Designed for single or multi-part hoist systems on cranes. Longer service life Lower operating costs Less wear to sheaves and drums Exclusive Flex-X 19 is designed for use anywhere the rotation-resistant characteristics of a category 2 rotationresistant rope are required. Six strands are laid around a core strand in one direction and then 12 strands are laid around this first operation in the opposite direction. Because of its tightly compacted smooth design, Flex-X 19 offers more crushing resistance than standard 19 x 7 rope, higher strength-to-diameter, resistance to bending fatigue, exceptional stability, reduced wear to sheaves and drums, and improved handling, operating, and spooling characteristics. Flex-X 6 Approximate Minimum Breaking Per Foot Force Tons (2,000 lbs) Diameter / / / / / / / / / /2 Should not be used with a swivel. Flex-X 19 Approximate Per Foot Minimum Breaking Force Tons (2,000 lbs) Diameter.43/ / / / / / / /8 Should not be used with a swivel.

27 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS 25 7-FLEX 7-FLEX PFV WIRE ROPE &SLINGS We offer 7-Flex ropes for many applications that currently use 6x19 or 6x36 classification ropes. Their operating characteristics are similar in many ways to 6x36 classification ropes. Typical applications such as container cranes, logging portal cranes and sawmill carriages have reported increased service life with the 7-Flex rope. The 7-Flex construction offers improved resistance to bending fatigue compared to a 6x26 due to a combination of the outer wire size and the seventh strand. Reduce wire-contact stress Keep lubrication inside Provide greater wear area Reduce internal abrasion Combining the advantages of PFV, a high-grade thermoplastic material, extruded into a 7-Flex lubricated wire rope, provides additional advantages over non-pfv ropes. On the inside, you ll find our 7-Flex wire rope that withstands the tough pressures of your demanding jobs while the PFV cushions the strands, distributes internal stresses, keeps in wire rope lubricant and keeps out dirt and debris. PFV also helps shed water and dirt, giving you a clean, smooth surface to make it easy to pass over sheaves and onto drums. This smooth surface works to clean and polish as it extends the service life of your sheaves and drums, while also reducing your cleanup requirements and your maintenance costs. Diameter Minimum Breaking Force and s for 7-Flex Ropes 7-FLEX Approx. (lb/ft) 7-FLEX PFV Approx. (lb/ft) Minimum Breaking Force Tons (2,000 lbs) XIP IWRC 3/ / / / / / / / / Should not be used with a swivel.

28 26 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Casar Turboplast High breaking load. Good resistance against crushing. Hoisting rope in multiple part reeving for smaller lifts. Twin hoist systems with left and right hand lay ropes for greater lifting heights. Should not be used with a swivel. Diameter Approx. Wt/Ft Minimum Breaking Force Tons (2,000 lbs) (mm) lb/ft 1770 N/mm 1960 N/mm 5/ / / Note: Should not be used with a swivel. Note: Other sizes available. Casar Eurolift Specially designed core reduces internal rope degradation. Hoist rope for mobile cranes and electric hoists. For use in other applications where rotation resistant ropes are required. Diameter Approx. Wt/Ft Minimum Breaking Force Tons (2,000 lbs) (mm) lb/ft 1960 N/mm 2160 N/mm / / / / Note: Other sizes available. Casar Starlift Plus Very flexible rope. Specially designed core reduces internal rope degradation. Hoist rope for mobile cranes and electric hoists. For use in other applications where rotation resistant ropes are required. Diameter Approx. Wt/Ft Minimum Breaking Force Tons (2,000 lbs) (mm) lb/ft 1960 N/mm 2160 N/mm 7/ / / / Note: Other sizes available.

29 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS 27 Application General Conditions Severe Conditions CRANES Overhead Traveling Cranes Hoist Lines (Main & Aux.) 6x25, 6x36 6-PAC, 8-PAC, Triple-PAC, SFP-19, SFP-35, Flex-X6 Tower Cranes Load Lines SFP-35, Starlift Xtra, NR MaxiPack SFP-35, Starlift Xtra, NR MaxiPact Trolley Lines 6x25, 6x36, Stratoplast, 7-Flex 6-PAC, 8-PAC, HD 8K PPI, TurboPlast Flex-X 7CC, Truck & Crawler Cranes Hoist Lines 6x25, 6x26, 6x36, 19x7, 35x7 6-PAC, Triple-PAC, 8-PAC, SFP 35x7, Starlift Plus, Starlift Xtra, NR Maxipact Auxillary Lines 6x26, 6x36, 8x19, 19x7, 35x7 SFP-19, SFP-35, Starlift Plus, Starlift Xtra, NR Maxipact Boom Hoist Lines 6x26, 6x26 Alternate Lay 6-PAC, 8-PAC, Super-PAC;, Flattened Strand, Flex-X 6, Flex-X9, HD 8K PPI, Turbo Plast Boom Pendant Lines 6x25, 6x26 6-PAC, Structural Strand ASTM A 586 Container Cranes Hoist Lines 6x25, 6x36 6-PAC, 8 PAC, Flex-X7CC, HD 8K PPI, TurboPlast Trolley Lines Main Hoist Lines Auxillary Lines General Wire Rope Recommendations 6x25, 6x36 Gantry Cranes (P&H, Demag, Kone) 6x25, 6x26, 6x36, 7-Flex, Stratoplast (Hot Ladle Crane use No Melt Lube) 6x25, 6x26, 6x36, 7-Flex, Stratoplast 6-PAC, 8-PAC, Flex-X7CC, HD 8K PPI, TurboPlast 6-PAC, 8-PAC, Triple-PAC, SFP-19, SFP-35, Flex- X7CC, HD 8K PPI, TurboPlast 6-PAC, 8-PAC, Triple-PAC, SFP-19, SFP-35, Flex- X7CC, HD 8K PPI, TurboPlast WIRE ROPE &SLINGS Travel Lift Cranes (Mi-Jack, slab haulers) Hoist Lines 6x25, 6x26, 6x36, 7-Flex, Stratoplast 6-PAC, 8-PAC, Triple-PAC, Flex-X7CC, HD 8K PPI, TurboPlast Drop Ball Load Lines 6x25, 6x26, 19x7 6-PAC, 8-PAC, 6x25 BXL, XLT-4 DREDGING Clamshell Dredges Holding & Closing Lines 6x25, 6x26, 6x36 6-PAC, Triple-PAC, Flex-X6 Swing Lines 6x25, 6x26, 6x36, 6x49 6-PAC, Super-PAC, Flex-X6 Boom Hoist Lines 6x26, 6x26 Alternate Lay 6-PAC, Super-PAC, Flattened Strand, Flex-X6, Flex-X9, HD 8K PPI, TurboPlast Stern / Anchor Lines 6x25, 6x26 6-PAC, Flex-X6 Spud Lines 6x25, 6x36, 6x49 6-PAC, Super-PAC, 6x49 PFV EXCAVATING Draglines Hoist Lines (Lang Lay) 6x36, 6x49, PowerMax, 6x57, 8x36 (Lang Lay) 6x36, 6x49, 6x57, 8x36, PowerMax MD Drag Lines 6x26, 6x31, 6x49 PowerMax, 6x57, 8x36 (Land Lay) 6x26, 6x49, 6x57, 8x36, PowerMax MD Boom Lines 6x25, Structural Strand ASTM A PAC, Structural Strand ASTM A 586 Shovels Hoist Lines (Lang Lay) 6x36, TufMax (Lang Lay) 8-PAC BXL, TufMax Crowd & Retract Lines (Lang Lay) 6x36, TufMax C/R (Lang Lay) 8-PAC BXL, TufMax C/R Boom Lines 6x25, Structural Strand ASTM A PAC, Structural Strand ASTM A 586 Clamshells Hoist Lines 6x25, 6x26, 6x36 6-PAC, Triple-PAC, Flex-X6 Holding & Closing Lines 6x25, 6x26, 6x36 6-PAC, Triple-PAC, Flex-X6 Boom Lines 6x26, 6x26 Alternate Lay 6-PAC, Super-PAC, Flattened Strand, Flex-X6, Flex-X9, HD 8K PPI, TurboPlast

30 28 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Wire Rope Slings Penco slings are constructed to meet nearly every need. Of course, there are many special situations which require the use of a specialty sling. These are also available. When ordering a specialty sling, be sure to consider: Maximum load Type of material to be handled Condition of material Lifting attachments Dimensions of load Height of lift Headroom and working space available Distribution of load weight Load center of gravity of sling legs required Ordering Wire Rope Slings When ordering slings shown in this catalog, the sling number, diameter, and length are required. Unless otherwise specified, the dimensions and fittings indicated will be supplied. When variations are necessary, full dimensions must be specified. For example, alloy oblong links are standard for most bridle slings, and these will be supplied unless otherwise specified. If oblong or pear-shaped carbon links are desired, full link dimensions should be included. In applications where corrosion is a factor, your nearest ALP branch office should be consulted before wire rope is ordered. Rated Capacities Rated capacities suggested for ALP slings are based on sound engineering practices and ample design factors, and are in accordance with Occupation Safety and Health Administration standards. Rated capacities are only applicable for new slings under normal conditions. As a standard practice to avoid confusion, all angles in this catalog are measured from the horizontal. Wire Rope Construction Wire ropes which are regularly used in lifting slings are either 6x19 Class or 6x37 Class. Generally, ropes with diameters up to 1-1/8 inclusive are 6x19 Class and ropes with larger diameters are 6x37 Class. The choice between the two classes may also depend upon the application of the sling, and the characteristics that are most desirable in the sling. For example, if resistance to abrasion is of prime importance, the 6x19 Class is chosen because wires of large diameter provide a high degree of wear resistance. On the other hand, if flexibility is desired, the 6x37 Class is more satisfactory because of the large number of smaller wires in the rope. Other constructions may be available, but they are rarely used and will not be supplied unless specified. Effects on Sling Angle Sling Angle Degrees (A) Load Angle Factor The rated capacity of a multiple leg sling is directly affected by the angle of the sling leg with the horizontal. As this angle decreases, the stress on each leg increases for the same load. If the sling angle is known, the capacity can be readily determined by multiplying the vertical capacity of the sling leg by the appropriate load angle factor from the table above. Then multiply the resulting capacity by the number of legs to the find the assembly s rated capacity. When more than one angle is involved use the smallest angle for calculating rated capacity. Wire Rope Sling Inspection Conditions such as the following should be sufficient reasons for consideration of sling replacement: 1. For strand laid and single part slings, ten (10) randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay,or five (5) broken wires in one strand in one rope lay. 2. For cable laid and braided slings of less than 8 parts, twenty (20) randomly distributed broken wires in one lay or braid, or one (1) broken strand per sling. 3. For braided slings of 8 parts or more, forty (40) randomly distributed broken wires in one braid, or two (2) broken strands per sling. 4. Severe localized abrasion or scraping. 5. Kinking, crushing, bird-caging or any other damage resulting in distortion of the wire rope structure. 6. Evidence of heat damage or if a wire rope sling having a fiber core is exposed to temperatures in excess to 200 degrees F, or if a wire rope sling having a steel core is used at temperatures above F or below F. 7. End attachments that are cracked, deformed, or worn. 8. Hooks that have been opened more than 15% of the normal throat openings measured at the narrows point or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook. 9. Corrosion of the rope or end attachments. 10. Unlaying or opening up of a tucked splice. All wire rope slings must be tagged and identified by name of manufacturer, diameter or size-rated capacity.

31 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Redi-Grip Red Sleeve Slings -6x19&6x37Class GENERAL NOTES Rated loads based on minimum D/d ratio of 25/1. Rated loads based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less the nominal sling diameter. For choker hitch, the angle of choke shall be 120 degrees or greater. Single Leg Sling w/ Flemish Eyes (Look for the Red Sleeves ) 29 WIRE ROPE &SLINGS Single Leg Redi-Grip Sling Diam of Rope Min. Length (SL) of sling ft-in Loop Dimensions W L Single Leg Vertical Rated Capacities in Tons (2000 lbs.) - 6x19 & 6x37 Class EIPS-IWRC EEIPS-IWRC Choker Hitch Vertical Basket Hitch Single Leg Vertical Choker Hitch Vertical Basket Hitch 1/ / / / / / / / / / / For other sizes & capacities, contact the nearest ALP branch location 2 Leg Sling w/ Flemish Eyes (Look for the Red Sleeves ) Rated Capacities in Tons (2,000 lb.) IWRC (6x19 & 6x37) 2LegRedi-Grip Sling Diameter of Rope Min. Length (SL) of Sling ft/in EIP IWRC - Rated Capacities Horizontal Angle EEIP IWRC - Rated Capacities Horizontal Angle / / / / / / / / / / / For other sizes & capacities, contact the nearest ALP branch location Sling angles are measured from the horizontal

32 30 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS 3 Leg Flemish Eye Sling (Look for the Red Sleeves ) Rated Capacities in Tons (2,000 lbs) IWRC (6x19 & 6x37) Diam of Rope Min. Length (SL) of Sling ft/in EIP IWRC - Rated Capacities Horizontal Angle EEIP IWRC - Rated Capacities Horizontal Angle / / / / / / / LegRedi-Grip Sling 1-1/ / / / For other sizes & capacities, contact the nearest ALP branch location GENERAL NOTES Rated loads based on minimum D/d ratio of 25/1. Rated loads based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less the nominal sling diameter. For choker hitch, the angle of choke shall be 120 degrees or greater. 4 Leg Flemish Eye Sling (Look for the Red Sleeves ) Rated Capacities in Tons (2,000 lbs) IWRC (6x19 & 6x37) Diam of Rope Min. Length (SL) of Sling ft/in EIP IWRC - Rated Capacities Horizontal Angle EEIP IWRC - Rated Capacities Horizontal Angle / / / / / / / / / / / For other sizes & capacities, contact the nearest ALP branch location 4LegRedi-Grip Sling ALP s policy is to provide safety latches on all assemblies utilizing sling hooks.

33 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS 31 Sling Capacities - Special Slings Galvanized Cablelaid Galvanized Cablelaid Flemish Eye Sling WIRE ROPE &SLINGS Diam of Rope Min. Length (SL) of Sling ft/in Inside Loop Dimensions Width Length Rated Capacities in Tons (2,000 lbs) Single Part Vertical Choker Hitch Vertical Basket Hitch 3/ / / / / / / / Constructions: 3/8-5/8 7x7x7 3/4-1 1/4 7x7x19 1-1/2 7x6x19 or 7x6x37 IWRC GENERAL NOTES Rated loads based on minimum D/d ratio of 25/1. Rated loads based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less the nominal sling diameter. For choker hitch, the angle of choke shall be 120 degrees or greater. Sling angles are measured from the horizontal. 6-Part & 8-Part Braided Slings 6 - Part Braided Sling Single Leg - 6x19 or 6x36 (IWRC) EIPS Rope Diameter Sling Width Vertical Choker Vertical Basket Appx. Eye Size 1/4 1-1/ x 10 3/8 1-11/ x 14 1/2 2-1/ x 18 5/8 2-13/ x 22 3/4 3-3/ x 24 7/ x / x Part Braided Sling 1/4 1-1/ x 10 3/8 1-11/ x 14 1/2 2-1/ x 18 5/8 2-13/ x 22 3/4 3-3/ x 24 7/ x / x 32

34 32 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS Common Terminations Pendant Socket Arrangements * Reference - The Wire Rope Users Manual A proper relationship between the socket ends of a pendant is critical to avoid a half-twist in the assembly during installation. Various items are used to describe this relationship. Top Row: Pins Parallel or Pins in the Plane Bottom Row: Pins Opposed or Pins in Opposite Planes or Pins at Right Angles

35 SECTION 1-WIRE ROPE &WIRE ROPE SLINGS 33 Terminal Efficiencies* Terminal Efficiencies (Approximate)* Efficiency Type of Termination Rope with IWRC* Rope with FC** WIRE ROPE &SLINGS Wire Rope Socket (Spelter or Resin) 100% 100% Swaged Socket (Regular Lay Ropes only) 100% (Not recommended) Mechanical Spliced Sleeve (Flemish Eye) 1 diameter and smaller 95% 92-1/2% Greater than 1 diameter through /2% 90% Greater than 2 diameter through 3-1/2 90% (Not established) Hand Spliced (Loop or Thimble) (Tucked w/ Carbon Steel Rope) 1/4 90% 90% 5/16 89% 89% 3/8 88% 88% 7/16 87% 87% 1/2 86% 86% 5/8 84% 84% 3/4 82% 82% 7/8 thru 2-1/2 80% 80% Hand Spliced (Loop or Thimble) (Tucked w/ Stainless Steel Rope) 1/4 80% 5/16 79% 3/8 78% 7/16 77% 1/2 76% 5/8 74% 3/4 72% 7/8 70% Wedge Sockets*** (Depending on Design) 75% to 80% 75% to 80% Clips*** ( of clips varies with size of rope) 80% 80% * IWRC = Independent Wire Rope Core ** FC = Fiber Core *** Typical values when applied properly. Refer to the fitting manufacturer for exact values and method. * Reprinted from the Wire Rope Technical Board Wire Rope User s Manual, 4th Edition Efficiencies are applicable to nominal wire rope strengths.

36 34 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS ELEVATOR PRODUCTS Elevator Wire Rope Wire Rope Specification Elevator Wire Rope is specified by its diameter, construction, finish, grade, lay, preforming, and core. Diameter is expressed in inches or millimeters and is the diameter of the smallest circle which can be circumscribed about the rope. The rope construction is generally stated as the number of outside strands and the number of wires per strand. A Bright finish, Right Regular Lay, andfiber Core are understood to be specified unless otherwise stated. Prestretching, galvanized finish, left lay, lang lay, special fiber core, non-preformed wire rope, and independent wire rope core are all available for special ordering. Technical Bulletins Wirerope Works, Inc. (manufacturer of Bethlehem Elevator Wire Rope ) publishes service and technical bulletins on topics which affect the operation and service life of elevator wire rope. These include: 1. Elevator Rope Nomenclature 2. Elevator Rope Lubrication 3. Elevator Rope Rouging 4. Elevator Rope Slippage 5. Elevator Rope Stretch 6. Lubricant Build-Up 7. Traction Sheave Hardness 8. Tensioning 9. Fatigue 10. Sheaves and Grooves 11. Vibration 12. Moisture 13. Twist and Torque SB1. Elevator Rope Investigation #1 SB2. Elevator Investigation #2 The RIGHT Way Wire Rope Diameter The first differentiation of wire rope is by diameter. Generally, a new wire rope is manufactured to its nominal diameter + 2 ½%. This allows for the normal reduction of diameter experienced when a new rope is placed under load. The WRONG Way

37 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS 35 Bethlehem Fiber Core Elevator Ropes Wirerope Works, Inc. manufactures Bethlehem Elevator Rope in a variety of diameters, constructions, lays and grades. 8 x 19 Standard Elevator Rope Technical Data Diameter 8 x 19 Class (8x19 Warrington, 8x19 Seale, 8x19 Filler Wire, 8x25 Filler Wire) Nominal Strength Approx. Wt. (lb/ft) (mm) Iron Traction EHS Traction 1/ ,800 3,600 4,500 ELEVATOR PRODUCTS 5/ ,900 5,600 6,900 3/ ,200 8,200 9,900 7/ ,600 11,000 13,500 1/ ,200 14,500 17,500 9/ ,200 18,500 22,100 5/ ,200 23,000 27,200 11/ ,400 27,000 32,800 3/ ,000 32,000 38,900 13/ ,600 37,000 46,000 7/ ,400 42,000 52,600 15/ ,600 48,000 60, ,000 54,000 68, / ,000 77,000 For the availability of larger diameters, contact your ALP Sales Representative. 8 x 19 Warrington through 7/16 diameter 8 x 21 Filler Wire 1/2 diameter and larger 8 x 19 Seale 3/8 diameter and larger 8 x 25 Filler Wire 1/2 diameter and larger 6 x 19 Standard Elevator Rope Technical Data 6 x 19 Class Diameter (6x19 Warrington, 6x25 Filler Wire) 6 x 19 Warrington through 5/16 diameter 6 x 25 Filler Wire 3/8 diameter and larger Nominal Strength (mm) Approx. Wt. (lb/ft) Iron Traction EHS Traction 1/ ,200 3,600 5,200 5/ ,200 5,600 8,100 3/ ,000 8,200 11,600 7/ ,400 11,000 15,700 1/ ,400 14,500 20,400 9/ ,600 18,500 25,700 5/ ,800 23,000 31,600 11/ ,500 27,000 38,200 3/ ,200 32,000 45,200 13/ ,500 37,000 52,900 7/ ,800 42,000 61,200 15/ ,500 48,000 70, ,000 54,000 79, / ,000 89,400 For the availability of larger diameters, contact youralpsales Representative.

38 36 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS Bethlehem Liftpac Elevator Rope Liftpac is recommended for those applications where: Adverse operating conditions exist, such as where loads and groove pressures are high. Reverse bends exist. Fatigue breakage with minimal surface wear is the primary factor for retirement. Liftpac is not designed to remedy poor rope performance due to worn sheaves and/or differential groove depths. Under these conditions, unsatisfactory rope performance is a result of the condition of installation. Liftpac Elevator Rope Technical Data Liftpac Diameter Approx. Wt. Nominal Strength (mm) (lb/ft) Traction EHS Traction 3/ ,000 11,000 1/ ,000 19,400 5/ ,400 30,800 FEATURES Fatigue Resistance - The compacted strand surface minimizes the interstrand and interlayer nicking that takes place in elevator ropes, dramatically decreasing the amount of internal breaks. This reduction of internal wire breakage can also be expressed as an increase in reserve strength. By decreasing internal breakage at the interstrand contact points, Liftpac maintains its strength longer than standard elevator rope in severe bending applications. Abrasion Resistance - Liftpac s compacted strand design provides improved abrasion resistance when compared with 8-strand ropes because of the increased wire and strand surfaces contacting the sheaves and drums. Resistance To Diameter Reduction - Liftpac s compacted design resists diameter reduction due to the higher metallic content and less core deterioration at the strand contact area. INSPECTION Due to Liftpac s compacted strands, its slightly flattened crown appearance should not be misconstrued as wear. Two methods may be used during inspection to make a distinction between Liftpac and a standard worn rope. 1) Check the outer wires in the strand valleys. The crown wires of a worn standard rope will obviously be abraded or worn. As these wires travel into the valleys, however, they resume their normal rounded shape. The wires in a Liftpac rope retain their die drawn state throughout the crown and valleys. 2) Check the ropes at the shackles. If Liftpac is being used, the rope wires at the shackles will have the same flattened crown appearance. If the standard rope is worn, the rope wires at the shackles will be rounded. ASME and CAN/CSA inspection and removal criteria apply. Noise Reduction - Liftpac s compacted surface passes smoothly over drums and sheaves, allowing for an extremely quiet running rope.

39 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS 37 Bethlehem IWRC Elevator Hoist Ropes Steel Core Elevator Hoist Ropes are used where additional strength is required without increasing the diameter of the wire rope. An additional benefit of the steel core is that these ropes will exhibit somewhat reduced stretch when compared with that of fiber core ropes. Equipment utilizing steel core elevator hoist ropes are specifically designed with the steel core in mind. Steel core ropes should not be used on equipment designed for fiber core ropes. Likewise fiber core ropes should not be used on equipment designed for steel core ropes. ELEVATOR PRODUCTS 10 mm 8x19 Warr BRT EHS RR FS IWRC 1/2 9x21F BRT EHS RR FS IWRC 16 mm 9x25F BRT EHS RR FS IWRC Elevator Hoist Ropes with Steel Core (IWRC) Diameter Nominal Diameter Tolerance Approx. Wt. Load on Construction Strength (lb/ft) Rope (mm) Min. Max. Out-of-Round Tolerance 5/16 8 8x19 Warr BRT EHS RR FS IWRC ,740 0% 10% 0% -1% 3% 2% 2.5% 1.5% 10 8x19 Warr BRT EHS RR FS IWRC ,220 0% 10% 0% -1% 3% 2% 2.5% 1.5% 1/ x21F BRT EHS RR FS IWRC ,820 0% 10% 0% -1% 3% 2% 2.5% 1.5% 13 9x21F BRT EHS RR FS IWRC ,200 0% 10% 0% -1% 3% 2% 2.5% 1.5% 5/8 16 9x25F BRT EHS RR FS IWRC ,120 0% 10% 0% -1% 3% 2% 2.5% 1.5% 3/4 19 9x25F BRT EHS RR FS IWRC ,200 0% 10% 0% -1% 3% 2% 2.5% 1.5%

40 38 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS Usha Martin Elevator Wire Rope Metric & Imperial diameters Manufactured to International Standards ISO 4344 or EN Dual Tensile design to reduce concerns of excessive sheave wear Post Production Prestretch to minimize constructional stretch Also available in 6-Strand, Galvanized, and Lang Lay upon request 8x19 Class Right Regular Lay Fiber Core Item Nominal Rope Diameter Construction Rope Lay Approx. Min. Break Force (mm) lbs/100ft. kg/100m lbs kn 8 Strand Traction Preformed Fiber Core (1370/1770) / X19 S Rt Reg ,920 5/16 8 8X19 S Rt Reg / X19 S Rt Reg , X19 S Rt Reg / X19 S Rt Reg , / X19 S Rt Reg , /8 16 8X19 S Rt Reg , / X25 F Rt Reg , /8 16 8X25 F Rt Reg , Strand Traction Preformed Fiber Core (1370/1770) - Prestretched 5/16 8 8X19 S Rt Reg , / X19 S Rt Reg , / X19 S Rt Reg , / X19 S Rt Lang , MM X19 S Rt Reg /8 16 8X19 S Rt Reg , /8 16 8X19 S Rt Lang , / X19 S Rt Reg , /8 16 8X25 F Rt Reg , Strand Extra High Strength (EHS) Preformed Fiber Core (1570/1770) - Prestretched / X19 S Rt Reg , / X19 S Rt Lang , /8 16 8X19 S Rt Reg , /8 16 8X19 S Rt Lang , / X19 S Rt Reg , Strand Iron Preformed Fiber Core (1170) / X19 S Rt Reg , / X19 S Rt Reg , / X19 S Rt Reg , /8 16 8X25 F Rt Reg , /4 19 8X25 F Rt Reg ,

41 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS 39 8 Strand Fiber Core Galvanized Elevator Wire Rope Item Nominal Rope Construction Rope Lay Approx. Min. Break Force (mm) lbs/100ft kg/100m lbs kn 8 Strand Galvanized Traction Preformed Fiber Core (1370/1770) - Prestretched / X19 S Rt Reg , /8 16 8X19 S Rt Reg , /4 19 8X19 S Rt Reg , Strand Galvanized Extra High Strength (EHS) Preformed Fiber Core (1570/1770) - Prestretched /4 19 8X19 S Rt Reg , ELEVATOR PRODUCTS 6 Strand Fiber Core Bright Elevator Wire Rope 6 Strand Traction Preformed Fiber Core (1370/1770) Item Nominal Rope Construction Rope Lay Approx. Min. Break Force (mm) lbs/100ft kg/100m lbs kn 10 6X19 S Rt Reg / X19 S Rt Reg , / X25 F Rt Reg , /8 16 6X25 F Rt Reg , /4 19 6X25 F Rt Reg , and 9 Strand EHS IWRC Elevator Wire Rope Item Nominal Rope Construction Rope Lay Approx. Min. Break Force (mm) lbs/100ft kg/100m lbs kn 8 Strand Extra High Strength Preformed IWRC (1570/1770) 6 8X19 S Rt Reg / X19 S Rt Reg MM /16 8 8X19 S Rt Reg , / X19 S Rt Reg , MM X19 S Rt Reg / x19 S Rt Reg , X19 S Rt Reg , Strand Extra High Strength Preformed IWRC (1570/1770) 7/ X21 S Rt Reg , / X21 S Rt Reg , MM X21 S Rt Reg MM /8 16 9X26 F Rt Reg , /4 19 9X26 F Rt Reg ,

42 40 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS Zzipco Elevator Shackle Assembly ZZWNS Elevator Shackles have been approved by MEA (City of New York, Building Department), the State of California, and TSSA, Canada. All standard wedge shackles are painted with a black body color coded to match each wedge color for the highest safety standards. Special wedge shackle assemblies are offered for governor rope applications. All shackles come with wedge, two rope retaining clips, cotter pin, washer, and two (2) nuts as standard. Wedge Shackle Assembly Specifications Part Size A B C Nut Size H ZZWNS8 1/4-5/16 (6-8 mm) 5 12, 18, M12 17, 23, 29 ZZWNS10 3/8 (10 mm) 6 12, 18, M12 17, 23, 29 ZZWNS13 7/16-1/2 (11-13 mm) 7.5 ZZWNS16 9/16-5/8 (14-16 mm) 7.5 ZZWNS19 11/16-3/4 ( mm) 9 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, M20 18, 24, 30, 36, 42, M20 18, 24, 30, 36, 42, M24 Standard Rod Lengths are listed above. Additional rod Lengths are available. 19.5, 25.5, 31.5, 37.5, 43.5, 49.5 Governor Wedge Shackle Specifications Part Size ZZWG10 ZZWG10 ZZWG13 ZZWG16 3/8 (10 mm) 7/16-1/2 (11-13 mm) 9/16-5/8 (14-16 mm) ZZWG13 & ZZWG16

43 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS 41 L. Wedge Insert Specifications Part Size L I Color I. ZZWW8 1/4-5/16 (6-8 mm) White ZZWW10 3/8 (10 mm) Red ZZWW13 7/16-1/2 (11-13 mm) Blue ZZWW16 9/16-5/8 (14-16 mm) Yellow ELEVATOR PRODUCTS ZZWW19 11/16-3/4 ( mm) Green P. Retaining Clip Specifications Part Size N O P Nut Size Bolt Size O. ZZWRC810 1/4-3/8 (6-10 mm) M6 M6x30mm ZZWRC1316 7/16-5/8 (11-16 mm) M6 M6x35mm ZZWRC19 11/16-3/4 ( mm) M6 M6x40mm N. Spring Isolation Bushing Assembly Spring Isolation Bushing Assemblies assist in providing equal tensioning of all wire rope. In addition, metal parts are isolated to provide noiseless operation between the sockets, spring, and hitch plate. Spring Isolation Bushing Assembly Part ZZWS10 ZZWS13 ZZWS16 ZZWS19 Size 3/8 (10 mm) 7/16-1/2 (11-13 mm) 9/16-5/8 (14-16 mm) 11/16-3/4 ( mm)

44 42 Related Elevator Products Tiller Rope SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS Tiller Rope is one of the most flexible wire ropes made. However, because of its fine wires, it should be used only where loads are light and abrasion and crushing are at a minimum. The 6x42 construction is comprised of 6 strands of 6x7 fiber core around a fiber core center. Manufactured in both Phosphor Bronze or Galvanized Steel, this rope is used as a hand rope in connection with the operating device of passenger and freight elevators, as steering cable on small boats and steamers, and for industrial and mining signaling devices. Tiller Rope should NOT be used as a hoisting rope where breakage will endanger life or property. 6x42 Tiller Rope Diameter Phosphor Bronze Galvanized Steel (mm) P/N Min. Break Str. Wt. M/ft P/N Min. Break Str. Wt. M/ft 3/8 ( 9.5 mm) , lb , lb 7/16 (11 mm) , lb , lb 1/2 (12.7 mm) , lb , lb Galvanized Aircord Small diameter galvanized wire rope, sometimes called Galvanized Aircord, is used in many applications including small winch lines, overhead doors, yacht rigging, and, even clothes line. Selector Cable is a special application of 1/8 7x19 Galvanized Aircord that has been specially lubricated and conforms to the MIL-DTL military specification. 7x19 Galvanized Aircord Diameter Nominal Strength Approx. Wt. lb/100 ft 1/8 2, /32 2, /16 4, /32 5, /4 7, /16 9, /8 14, Other diameters and constructions available.

45 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS 43 Wire Rope Go-NoGo Gauge ELEVATOR PRODUCTS The Go-NoGo Gauge is designed for quick checks and is not meant to replace accurate diameter measuring techniques. To use the Go-NoGo Gauge, slip the elevator rope into the corresponding diameter groove. If the rope slides in, the diameter has reduced and the rope should be retired under the criteria established by ASME specifications for diameter reduction. Before final condemnation, use a caliper or other accurate diameter measuring tool to confirm the measurement. Manufactured with anodized aluminum for lightweight, durable construction More accurate than plastic models - diameter grooves will not wear as readily, nor will the grooves accommodate a rope whose diameter is still within acceptable limits under A17.6 specifications Nominal diameter provided on one side, ASME diameter reduction criteria for rope retirement on the other side ATL00I is Red in color and has 7 slots designed to gauge wire ropes from 3/8 to 3/4 in 1/16 increments ATL00KM is Blue in color and has 8 slots designed to gauge wire rope of 6 mm, 8 mm, 9.5 mm, 10 mm, 11 mm, 13 mm, 16 mm, and 19 mm diameters

46 44 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS Preformed Reeving Splices PLP Reeving Splices were designed in conjunction with the Otis Elevator Company as an aid to simplify marrying wire ropes during elevator repairs. Reeving splices hold galvanized steel cables in place, allowing old elevator ropes to be removed and replaced. The reeving splice is an economical disposable tool that saves repair time by allowing easy passage of the married ropes over pulleys or sheaves. Applied quickly without special tools, Reeving Splices are designed to maintain a constant, positive grip, even when rope go slack. Designed to hold working loads from zero to 2,000 lbs For use on Galvanized Steel Elevator wire rope Patented PIN # Wire Rope Size Units per Carton Reeving Splice Specifications Wt. per Carton Length Color Code Overall Diameter of Spliced Rope RS / Yellow RS / Black 0.64 RS / Yellow RS / Black RS / Red RS / Green 0.95 RS / Yellow RS / Blue RS Orange 1.238

47 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS 45 Roebling Clamp The Roebling Clamp utilizes spiral ridges on one side of the groove to resist slippage. Properly applied, the clamp will allow two parallel ropes to share the load during shortening or tensioning applications. The clamps are designed for either 1/2 or 5/8 diameter ropes. When the included bolts are torqued to 50 ft-lbs the clamp maintains a maximum safe working load of 600 lb per rope. ELEVATOR PRODUCTS Cable Bands Cable Bands are made of pliable material indented with a groove and lock seam at one edge. Application of the band is simple, requires no special tools, and may be made in seconds with an ordinary pair of pliers. Cable Bands are packaged 50 per box and are designed to fit a particular diameter of rope from 3/16 to 1-1/2. Shackle Tie Kits Shackle Tie Kits are used to minimize the rotation of elevator rope wedge sockets under load. Once equal tension has been established, the shackles need to be secured to prevent rotation during the operation of the elevator. A short length of wire rope is laced through the shackles and the ends are joined using wire rope clips. (Local elevator codes vary as to the diameter of the wire rope required.) The Shackle Tie Kit contains a short length of wire rope and two (2) wire rope clips.

48 46 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS Wire Rope Cleaner The WRC-2000 Wire Rope Cleaner eliminates the need to clean elevator hoist ropes manually thus saving labor costs and down-time of the elevator. This assembly is designed to clean the elevator hoist ropes passively as the wire rope is used in the elevator s everyday operation. The WRC-2000 maintains the cleanliness of the wire rope without involving any moving mechanism, thereby increasing the durability and longevity of the wire rope. Wire Rope Lubricator The WRC-2000-LP Wire Rope Lubricator reduces the friction between the elevator ropes and machine drive sheaves, minimizes corrosion due to atmospheric and/or operating conditions, and reduces bending fatigue by allowing movement between the wires and strands. Together with the WRC-2000 Wire Rope Cleaner, this is the ultimate in elevator rope maintenance. Babbitt Our superior lead alloy Babbitt is used for shackling of elevator wire ropes. The combination of lead, tin, and antimony (approx. 88/12/5 ratio) has a melting point of 475 degrees Fahrenheit. The Babbitt pours (casts) between 725 degrees and 775 degrees Fahrenheit. At ambient temperatures the Babbitt forms an effective cone to secure the wires within the Babbitt socket cavity.

49 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS 47 Rail Blocks Rail Block (left) and Rail Block with Clevis (right) are used to hang the elevator car or counter weight at any position in the hoistway. The maximum, safe working load limit is 25,000 lb per pair of Rail Blocks when the bolts have been properly installed to 70 ft-lbs of torque. Rail blocks are available for three rail sizes (5/8 rail, 3/4 rail, & 1-1/8 / 1-1/4 rail). Rail Blocks MUST be used in pairs. ELEVATOR PRODUCTS Seizing Wire Seizing Wire (sometimes called Mousing Wire ) has a variety of uses where light-duty or temporary securement is required. The 21 gauge ( dia.) dark annealed steel wire is handy for whipping, bailing, binding, mousing, seizing, and other fastening applications. These 1/2 lb spools contain approximately ft of wire. Wide-Jaw Wire Rope Caliper Stainless Steel Digital Caliper with 30 mm x 40 mm faces specifically designed to accurately determine wire rope diameters Measuring range is mm (up to 6 inches) Accuracy is to within +/ mm ( +/ ) Zero setting at any position Convenient switch to change from inches to millimeters Uses SR 44 Watch Battery (included)

50 48 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS Tensionometer Measures the relative tension in ropes Allows adjustment to equal tension Eliminates unequal sheave groove wear, slippage and vibration Lengthens service life Dynamometer Used to measure governor pull-through tension or empty car weight Accuracy at an affordable price (within 2%) Choice of 2,000 lb or 5,000 lb gauge Solid all-metal construction Made in the U.S.A. Model LM LM LM LM Range kg lb kg lb

51 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS 49 Tractel Minifor The Tractel Minifor Portable Electric Hoist has - Unlimited lift heights A complete range of electric hoist for a wide range of applications Rated loads of 220 lb, 660 lb and 1,000 lb which can be doubled by a sheave kit Unloaded wire rope freely suspended or optional rope reeler Pendant control TR50 ELEVATOR PRODUCTS Direct lift or sheaving kit for increased capacity Single-phase or three-phase power TR 10 & TR 30 come with blue steel box - TR 30S & TR 50 come in cardboard box Quality & Power High power to weight ratio Aluminum alloy body Unlimited length of lifting wire rope Wire rope diameter 0.25 in (6.5 mm) 110V standard, 220V available Safety TR30 Upper and lower adjustable end limit stops Motor integrated brake Minifor fitted with wire rope reeler (optional) TR10 - TR30 Kit TR10 - TR30 fitted with sheave block kit (optional) Model Tractel Minifor Dimensions Work Load Limit Speed Power Supply L x W x D w/o Rope (kg) fpm (mpm) Single Phase Single Phase Three Phase Optional WR Reeler (kg) Direct Sheaved Direct Sheaved 115V 220V 220V 66 ft (20 m) 100 ft (35 m) TR10 14 x9x17 46 (20) 220 (100) 441 (200) 50 (15) 25 (7.5) X X X X TR30 14 x9x17 46 (20) 660 (300) TR30S 19 x9x17 71 (32) 660 (300) TR50 19 x9x17 71 (32) 1,000 (453) 1,320 (600) 1,320 (600) 2,000 (906) 17 (5) 8.5 (2.5) X X X X 43 (13) 21 (6.5) X X X 23 (7) 11.5 (3.5) X X X

52 50 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS Manual Cable Cutter The TS-20 Handheld Hydraulic Cable Cutter is portable, lightweight, and designed to perform for years in the toughest field conditions. This cutter can be used in many applications. However, do not use for telephone & lead sheathed cable, chain, or EHS grade Guy Wire. TS-20 Handheld Hydraulic Cutter Output Length Jaw Opg. Wire Rope Soft Stl Bolts Rebar, Ground & Anchor Rod ACSR Cu & Al Wire Std. Guy Wire 4.4 tons 5.75 lb /4 11/16 1/2 3/4 3/4 1/2 (20 mm) (17 mm) (13 mm) (20 mm) (20 mm) (14 mm) Impact Cable Cutter Actuated by striking with a hammer, these portable Impact Cable Cutters are simple to operate and do a superior cutting job with just a few blows. They are precision engineered to deliver a cut without affecting the original roundness of the rope. The blades and dies are made of heat-treated tool steel ground to close tolerances. A firm base is required for operation of the cutter. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES AND FOLLOW ALL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WHEN OPERATING THE IMPACT CABLE CUTTER. Model Capacity Height Base 1 5/ /2 7 lb 1A 1-1/ /4 15 lb 2 1-1/ /4 28 lb Hydraulic Cable Cutter The Pell Hydrashear Hydraulic Cable Cutter is a self-contained hydraulic cable cutter designed to give a clean cut with minimum effort. Just pump the handle... no outside power required. The blades and dies are made of heat-treated tool steel ground to close tolerances. This means a long life for the blades and provides superior performance. Hydraulic cutters are available in three sizes and capacities: Model W-075 has a 3/4 capacity Model P-1125 has a 1-1/8 capacity Model C-1750 has a 1-3/4 capacity

53 SECTION 2-ELEVATOR PRODUCTS 51 Klein Parallel-Jaw Grip The Parallel-Jaw Grip has: Longer jaws to achieve a firm hold, reducing the possibility of slippage and damage to the cable A design which includes a latch, plus a large diameter eye to accommodate large hooks on hoists, winches, and tackle blocks ELEVATOR PRODUCTS A latch, when closed, that helps maintain cable position in the grip jaws P/N Min. Diameter Max. Diameter Max. Safe Load Jaw Type Jaw Length Approx (5.08 mm) 0.40 (10.16 mm) 10,000 lb (4545 kg) Smooth 4-3/8 (111 mm) 5 lb (2.27 kg) (5.08 mm) 0.40 (10.16 mm) 10,000 lb (4545 kg) Knurled 4-3/8 (111 mm) 5 lb (2.27 kg) (9.40 mm) 0.75 (19.05 mm) 10,000 lb (4545 kg) Smooth 4-3/8 (111 mm) 5 lb (2.27 kg) (9.40 mm) 0.75 (19.05 mm) 10,000 lb (4545 kg) Knurled 4-3/8 (111 mm) 5 lb (2.27 kg) Tractel Wire Rope Gripper The Tractel Wire Rope Gripper with a self-gripping jaw will hold a wire rope at any point along its length or take up the tension while fixing or adjusting the slack end. Light alloy body Complete with shackle for anchoring Spring-operated jaw for automatic gripping Breech loading Model Range of Wire Rope in (kg) Capacity (kg) Breaking Load lb (kg) (mm) G2 3/32-5/16 (2-8 mm).64 lb (.28 kg) 900 lb (400 kg) 3,500 lb (1,600 kg) G3 5/16-9/16 (7-15 mm) 1.25 lb (.56 kg) 1,300 lb (600 kg) 4,100 lb (1,900 kg) G4 9/16-11/16 (14-18 mm) 1.3 lb (.59 mm) 1,750 lb (800 kg) 4,400 lb (2,000 kg) Tractel Con-Klam Wire Rope Gripper The Coni-Klam Wire Rope Gripper is held by a pair of slightly serrated jaws providing a positive lock by a self-gripping wedge. Manufactured in forged steel Breech loading Immediate adjustment to the required positions Does not damage the rope High safety factor Model Range of Wire Rope in (mm) Capacity (kg) w/o Shackle (kg) w/ Shackle (kg) EC10 3/16-3/8 (5-10 mm) 2,200 lb (1,000 kg) 2.6 lb (1.2 kg) 3.5 lb (1.6 kg) EC14 7/16-9/16 ( mm) 4,400 lb (2,000 kg) 5.7 lb (2.6 kg) 3.7 lb (8.1 kg) EC21 5/8-13/16 (15-21 mm) 6,600 lb (3,000 kg) 11.9 lb (5.4 kg) 7.5 lb (16.5 kg)

54 52 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS Alloy Chain Slings CHAIN PRODUCTS Types of Chain Slings ALLOY CHAIN - the components used in welded or mechanical slings meet or exceed all existing OSHA, Federal NACM, ASTM and ISO chain specification requirements. Certificates for OSHA and internal record requirements are available upon request. The WORKING LOAD LIMITS are based on a 4:1 design factor required by the International Standards Organization (ISO). Should an extreme load actually deform the chain, it will stretch (elongate) a minimum of 15% before breaking. An embossing of the chain link allow for easy identification of Alloy Chain. While Grade 80 is the more commonly used, Grade 100 usage is increasing. Single Chain Sling Double Chain Slings Triple Chain Slings Quadruple Chain Slings Type One End Other End SOS Oblong Link Sling Hook SOG Oblong Link Grab Hook SGS Grab Hook Sling Hook SGG Grab Hook Grab Hook SSS Sling Hook Sling Hook SOF Oblong Link Foundry Hook SOO Oblong Link Oblong Link DOS Oblong Link Sling Hooks DOG Oblong Link Grab Hooks DOF Oblong Link Foundry Hooks TOS Oblong Link Sling Hooks TOG Oblong Link Grab Hooks TOF Oblong Link Foundry Hooks QOS Oblong Link Sling Hooks QOG Oblong Link Grab Hooks QOF Oblong Link Foundry Hooks The following information is required to process an order or an inquiry: WELDED CHAIN SLINGS: We maintain the specification of each welded sling on file under a unique registration serial number for inspection or should the chain require servicing. The rated capacity of a welded sling cannot be altered since its welded construction prevents on site tampering. Welded slings can be fabricated to your specific needs and are available with a variety of special end attachments. MECHANICAL CHAIN SLINGS: This flexible system saves on costly down time, since they can be repaired or altered on site. Components are manufactured under rigid quality control standards and meet or exceed the capacity of Grade 80 Chain. Every component has forged marking indicating the alloy chain size to be used with it. SIZE & GRADE: This is specified by the size of the material from which the chain is made and is dependent upon the working load limit required. REACH: This is the length, including attachments, measured from bearing point to bearing point. TYPE: Select and specify the proper type of sling from the list below. (ex. S - Single O - Oblong Link S - Sling Hook). ATTACHMENTS: Unless otherwise specified standard master links and hooks as given herein will be used. When other than standard attachments are required, we should be given a complete description or a drawing of the requested substitute. ASME B requires all new components of alloy lifting chain assemblies to be proofloaded prior to their initial use. ASME B requires all repaired alloy lifting chain assemblies incorporating previously used components to be proofloaded prior to their initial use. When hot galvanized chain is specified, the recommended work load limits MUST be reduced. Please refer such inquiries to our nearest Branch Manager.

55 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS Alloy Chain Sling Working Load Limits Grade 80 Alloy Chain Sling Working Load Limits Chain Size Double (D) Chain Slings /Lbs. Triple (T) & Quadruple (Q) Chain Slings /Lbs. 53 (mm) Single 90 o 9/32 7 3,500 6,100 4,900 3,500 9,100 7,400 5,200 3/8 10 7,100 12,300 10,000 7,100 18,400 15,100 10,600 1/ ,000 20,800 17,000 12,000 31,200 25,500 18,000 5/ ,100 31,300 25,600 18,100 47,000 38,400 27,100 3/ ,300 49,000 40,000 28,300 73,500 60,000 42,400 7/ ,200 59,200 48,400 34,200 88,900 72,500 51, ,700 82,600 67,400 47, , ,200 71, / , , ,200 72, , , ,400 NOTE: Working Load Limit should not be exceeded. CHAIN Chain Size (mm) Single 90 o Grade 100 Alloy Chain Sling Working Load Limits Double (D) Chain Slings /Lbs. Triple (T) & Quadruple (Q) Chain Slings /Lbs. 9/32 7 4,300 7,400 6,100 4,300 11,200 9,100 6,400 3/8 10 8,800 15,200 12,400 8,800 22,900 18,700 13,200 1/ ,000 26,000 21,200 15,000 39,000 31,800 22,500 5/ ,600 39,100 32,000 22,600 58,700 47,900 33,900 NOTE: Working Load Limit should not be exceeded. Do not use Grade 80 Fittings with Grade 100 Chain. Do Not Exceed Work Load Limits Grade 80 & Grade 100 Alloy Chain - NACM Specifications Size Working Load Limit ** Nominal Material Dia. Nominal Inside Length Nominal Inside Width Maximum Grade 80 P8A (mm) &PA8 * Grade 100 PA10 Grade 80 P8A & PA8 Grade 100 PA10 Grade 80 P8A & PA8 * Grade 100 PA10 Grade 80 P8A & PA8 * Grade 100 PA10 Grade 80 P8A & PA8 * Grade 100 PA10 Grade 80 P8A & PA8 (lbs/100 ft)* Grade 100 PA10 (lbs/100 ft) 7mm 9/32 3,500 4, mm 5/16 4,500 5, mm 3/8 7,100 8, mm 1/2 12,000 15, mm 5/8 18,100 22, mm 3/4 28,300 35, /8-34, , , /4-72, , * Grade 80 Alloy Chain sizes up to and including 20mm are stamped P8A and sizes 7/8 and above are stamped PA8. ** CAUTION: Do not exceed Working Load Limits (WLL). Peerless Chain does not accept liability for damages which may result from chain used in excess of working load limits. To determine which chain size and leg style are best suited to your requirements - use the working load limit table as a guide. The table gives the working load limits of 9/32 through 1-1/4 in 1, 2, 3 and 4 leg styles. Determine the maximum load you will lift and the angle of the lift involved. Always select a chain assembly that has a higher working load limit and a lift angle greater than or equal to the desired load and angle. Working Load Limits of the chain and components are established as pounds applied at the indicated degrees from horizontal.

56 54 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS Single Leg Chain Sling Single Leg Chain Sling Specifications Chain Size SOO SOS or SOSH SOG SOF SG Plain End Single 90 o Kuplink (mm) Grade 80 Grade 100 Cut Chain for 5 Reach SOO/CO SOS/SOSH Sling Hooks SOG Grab Hook SOF Foundry Hook Cut Chain for 5 Reach Cut Chain for 5 Reach Cut Chain for 5 Reach 9/32 7 3,500 4,300 K K K K /8 10 7,100 8,800 K K K K / ,000 15,000 K K K K / ,100 22,600 K K K K / ,300 - K K K K / , K K K , K-86* * K-86 1 Kuplex Sling Hook available only in Grade 63 - Working Load Limit is 35,900 lbs. Double Leg Chain Sling Double Leg Chain Sling Specifications DOS or DOSH DOG DOF Chain Size Double o Master Kuplok Kupler Links (Gr 80 (Gr 80 Only) Only) (mm) Grade 80 Grade 100 Cut Chain for 5 Reach DOS/DOSH Sling Hooks DOG Grab Hooks DOF Foundry Hooks Cut Chain for 5 Reach Cut Chain for 5 Reach 9/32 7 6,100 7,400 K-1 9/32 K-20 K K K / ,300 15,200 K-2 3/8 K-21 K K K / ,800 26,000 K-3 1/2 K-22 K K K / ,300 39,100 K-4 5/8 K-23 K K K / ,000 - K-5 3/4 K-24 K K K / ,200 - K-6 - K-25 K K K ,600-2x7x K Do Not Use Grade 80 Fitting with Grade 100 Chain Do Not Exceed Work Load Limits

57 Triple Leg Chain Sling SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS 55 TOS or TOSH TOF TOG Similar with Grab Hooks CHAIN Triple Leg Chain Sling Specifications Chain Size Triple o Quad Master Links Kuplok (Gr 80 Only) Kupler (Gr 80 Only) (mm) Grade 80 Grade 100 TOS/TOSH Sling Hooks TOG Grab Hooks TOF Foundry Hooks Cut Chain for 5 Reach Cut Chain for 5 Reach Cut Chain for 5 Reach 9/32 7 9,100 11,200 9/32 9/32 K-20 K K K / ,400 22,900 3/8 3/8 K-21 K K K / ,200 39,000 1/2 1/2 K-22 K K K / ,000 58,700 5/8 5/8 K-23 K K K / ,500-3/4 3/4 K-24 K K K / ,900-7/8 - K-25 K K K , K Quadruple Leg Chain Sling Quadruple Leg Chain Sling Specifications QOS or QOSH QOF (QOG similar) Chain Size Quadruple o Quad Master Kuplok Kupler Links (mm) Grade 80 Grade 100 Cut Chain for 5 Reach QOS/QOSH Sling Hooks QOG Grab Hooks QOF Foundry Hooks Cut Chain for 5 Reach Cut Chain for 5 Reach 9/32 7 9,100 11,200 9/32 9/32 K-20 K K K / ,400 22,900 3/8 3/8 K-21 K K K / ,200 39,000 1/2 1/2 K-22 K K K / ,000 58,700 5/8 5/8 K-23 K K K / ,500-3/4 3/4 K-24 K K K / ,900-7/8 - K-25 K K K , K Do not use Grade 80 Fittings with Grade 100 Chain Do Not Exceed Work Load Limits

58 56 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS Adjustable Chain Slings SOS-A SOS-B Alloy Chain Attachments Oblong Master Link Use Alloy Chain Attachments Only as Indicated. Do Not exceed Working Load Limits. Chain slings may be used for lifting various odd sized loads by the use of assemblies where the length of the sling lengths are adjustable. This may eliminate the need for additional assemblies when the use of anyone is infrequent. Short adjuster lengths with grab hooks are added. Style A the grab hook is connected directly to the Master Link. Style B a short piece of chain is used to connect the grab hook and the Master Link. Work Load Limits are the same as assemblies without the adjuster legs. DOS-A DOS-B Oblong Master Link Specifications - 5:1 Design Factor Link Size AxBxC ** Painted Stock Bulk Link Type: Forged Welded Unpainted Stock Type: Forged Welded Working Load Limit Single Type S Use with Chain Sizes Double Type D Approx. 5/8x3x6 * K1 F F 7,400 9/32 9/ /4x3x6 * K2 F F 15,200 3/8 3/ x 3-1/2 x 7 * K3 F F 26,000 1/2 x 5/8 1/ /4 x4x8 * K4 F F 39,100 3/4 5/ /2 x6x12 * K5 W W 58,700 7/8 3/ /4 x6x K6 W W 73, / x7x W 88, / /2 x8x W 135, * Grade 100. ** Other sizes available upon request. Kuplink Kuplex II Kuplink Specifications Stock Kuplink Size of Chain (mm) Working Load Limit A B C D E F G H I J K-11 9/32 7 4,300** 3/ /2 7-1/8 1/8 5/16 13/32 11/32 5/ K-12 3/8 10 8,800** 3/ /2 7-1/4 5/32 7/16 9/16 15/32 7/ K-13 1/ ,000** 15/ /16 7-9/16 3/16 9/16 3/4 21/32 1-1/ K-14 5/ ,600** 1-1/ /8 9-15/16 1/4 11/16 15/16 13/16 1-1/2 8.2 * K-15 3/ ,300 * 1-1/ /8 10-3/16 5/16 13/16 1-7/ / * Use for Grade 80 assembly - Not suitable for Grade 100 assembly. ** Values shown for these sizes are Grade 100.

59 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS 57 Quadruple Master Assembly PIN # Quadruple Master Assembly Specifications Chain Size (mm) Working Load Limit A Mtl Dia. B Ins Width C Ins Length Oblong Link D Mtl Dia. E Ins Width F Ins Length Approx / ,200 3/ /8 1-5/32 2-3/ / , /2 7 3/4 1-1/ / , / / / , / /8 2-1/4 4-9/ / , / /2 2-1/2 5-1/ / , / , / / / , / / Consult specifications for Oblong Master Link for proper configuration of chain assemblies using these fittings. CHAIN Kuplex II Kuplok Kuplok mechanical coupling links, an essential component of mechanically coupled slings, are used to assemble Chain Legs to the Master Links and/or attach eye type fittings. Grade 80 Fitting Do Not Use with Grade 100 G80 Kuplok Specifications PIN # Chain Size (mm) Grade Working Load Limits Max Width Dia. Hole to Accept Male Leg Each Qty per Box A B C D E Largest Mtl. Diam. to be used with Kuplok / , /16 35/ /8 11/16 5/8 1-13/16 1/ / , /16 47/ /2 1 15/16 2-3/8 3/ / , /32 59/ /8 1-1/4 1-3/8 2-11/ / , /32 1-1/ /4 1-1/2 1-11/ / / , /16 1-1/ /16 1-3/ /4 1-5/8 These fittings are not rated for Grade 100 chain assemblies. Do Not Exceed Work Load Limits Kuplex II Kuplers Kuplers are connection devices between Master Links and Chain on all multiple leg Kuplex II Chain Slings. On single leg assemblies Kuplers can be used in lieu of the popular Kuplink. Resembling a shackle in appearance the Kuplers provide a high strength, high integrity connection when used to connect a special attachment to the alloy chain assembly. PIN # Kupler Chain Size Grade Working A B C D E G H I J Load (mm) Limit K-20 9/ ,500 7/16 13/16 1-5/16 5/16 1/8 23/32 13/32 11/32 5/ K-21 3/ ,100 19/32 1-1/ /16 7/16 5/32 7/8 9/16 15/32 7/ K-22 1/ ,000 3/4 1-5/16 2-9/16 9/16 3/16 1-3/32 3/4 21/32 1-1/ K-23 5/ ,100 15/16 1-5/8 3 11/16 1/4 1-11/32 15/16 13/16 1-1/ K-24 3/ , / /32 13/16 5/ /32 1-7/ / K-25 7/ , /8 2-1/4 3-7/8 15/16 3/8 1-27/32 1-9/32 1-1/ K ,900* 1-1/4 2-11/16 4-1/4 1-1/ /32 1-3/32 2-3/ K / ,100* 1-1/2 3-1/2 5-1/8 1-15/16-2-9/32 1-1/2 1-11/32 2-7/8 14.8

60 58 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS Accoloy Eye Sling Hook Accoloy Eye Sling Hook Specifications PIN # Chain Size (mm) Grade Working Load Limits D E F G H I K / , /16 1-7/32 5/8 11/16 5-7/32 3-5/8 1-1/ / , /8 1-5/8 13/16 15/16 7-1/4 4-13/16 1-3/ / , / /32 1-3/ /16 6-1/ / / , /4 2-7/16 1-1/4 1-5/ /8 7-5/32 2-1/8 * / , /8 2-11/16 1-1/2 1-1/ /16 7-7/8 2-5/16 * / , / /4 1-3/4 13-3/4 9-5/32 2-3/4 ** ,700* /16 3-3/ / /16 3 ** / ,300* /8 4-1/16 2-1/4 2-5/ /16 3-3/4 * Do Not Use with Grade 100 assemblies. ** Do Not Use with Grade 80 or Grade 100 assemblies. Do Not Exceed Work Load Limits Kuplex II Clevis Sling Hook Specifications Kuplex II Clevis Sling Hook Kuplex II Hooks are engineered to make a rapid, high integrity chain to hook connection with these major advantages: No bulky connection link is required - this permits easy withdrawal of the hook from beneath the load. All hooks are color coded ACCO orange to provide maximum visibility. PIN # Kuplink Chain Size (mm) Grade Working Load Limit A B C D E F G H I J K-80 9/ , /2 3-5/16 3-5/8 1-1/8 1/8 5/16 13/32 11/32 5/ K-81 3/ , /32 2-1/ / /16 1-5/8 5/32 7/16 9/16 15/32 7/ K-82 1/ , /16 2-7/16 6-1/8 6-1/8 2 3/16 9/16 3/4 21/32 1-1/ K-83 5/ , /16 2-7/8 6-13/16 7-7/32 2-7/16 1/4 11/16 15/16 13/16 1-1/ * K-84 3/ , /8 3-1/4 8-17/32 8-3/ /16 5/16 13/16 1-7/ / * K-85 7/ , /4 3-21/32 9-5/8 9-15/32 3 3/8 15/16 1-9/32 1-1/ ** K ,900* 2-11/16 4-1/ / /16 3-3/8-1-3/8 1-7/32 1-3/32 1-7/ * Do Not Use with Grade 100 assemblies. ** Do Not Use with Grade 80 or Grade 100 assemblies.

61 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS 59 Crosby Grade 100 SHUR-LOC Hook S-1316 Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered. Recessed trigger design is flush with the hook body, which protects the trigger from potential damage. Easy to operate with enlarged thumb access. 25% stronger than Grade 80. Individually Proof Tested to 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit with certification. Positive Lock Latch is Self-Locking when hook is loaded. Eye style is designed with Engineered Flat to connect to S-1325 chain coupler. Suitable for use with Grade 100 and Grade 80 chain. The SHUR-LOC hook, if properly installed and locked, can be used for personnel lifting applications and meets the intent of OSHA Rule (g) (4) (iv) (B). Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles. Look for the Platinum Color - Crosby Grade 100 Alloy Products. Crosby Grade 100 SHUR-LOC Hook - S1316 S-1317 CHAIN Chain Size Working Load Limit * S-1316 Stock Each Dimensions (mm) A C D E J L AA /4-5/ / / / / / * Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. Chain Size Crosby Grade 100 SHUR-LOC Hook - S1317 Working Load Limit * S-1317 Stock Each Dimensions (mm) C D E G J L AA / / / / / / / * Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.

62 60 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS Accoloy Eye Grab Hook Accoloy Eye Grab Hook Specifications PIN # Chain Size Grade (mm) Kuplex II Clevis Grab Working Load Limits D E Kuplex II Grab Hooks provide a chain to grab hook connection method that completely eliminates the necessity for cumbersome mechanical connection devices. The Kuplex II Grab Hook needs no more clearance than the chain with which it is used when being pulled from beneath a load. The Kuplex II Grab Hook is identified by hook number and chain size, permitting the selection of the proper hook for the chain being used. Kuplex II Grab Hooks are made from premium alloy steel which is drop forged to precise tolerances. F G H I / , /16 11/32 5/8 39/64 4-1/8 2-3/ / , /8 31/64 13/16 47/64 5-1/ / / , /4 41/64 1-1/32 31/ / / / , /32 25/32 1-1/4 1-3/ /16 * / , /4 15/16 1-1/2 1-13/ / /32 * / , /4 1-3/32 1-3/4 1-5/ /8 * , /16 1-7/8 1-13/ /32 6-3/4 * / , /2 1-1/2 2-1/4 2-1/2 15-9/16 8-1/4 * Do Not Use with Grade 100 assemblies. PIN # Chain Hook Size (mm) Working Grade Load Limits A B K-72 9/ ,300 11/16 1-1/4 2-1/8 2-1/8 3/8 1/8 5/16 13/32 11/32 5/ K-73 3/ , /32 1-1/2 2-7/8 2-5/8 1/2 5/32 7/16 9/16 15/32 7/ K-75 1/ , / / /32 5/8 3/16 9/16 3/4 21/32 1-1/ K-76 5/ , /8 2-3/8 4-5/16 4-1/4 25/32 1/4 11/16 15/16 13/16 1-1/2 6.2 * K-77 3/ , /8 2-15/16 5-3/32 5-1/16 7/8 5/16 13/16 1-7/ / C D E F G H I J * K-78 7/ , /8 3-1/2 5-7/8 6-3/32 1-1/8 3/8 15/16 1-9/32 1-1/ * Do Not Use with Grade 100 assemblies. Grade 100 Cradle Grab Hook A-1338 Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered. Innovative cradle design allows for 100% efficiency of Grade 100 chain. Individually Proof Tested to 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit with certification. Each hook has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability, along with the size and the name Crosby & U.S.A. in raised letters. Suitable for use with Grade 100 and Grade 80 chain in overhead lifting applications as long as hook is Proof Tested as part of the chain sling assembly or as an individual component. Per ANSI B The use of A-1338 Cradle Grab Hook will allow 100 percent of the chain sling capacity. When used to hook back to chain leg to form a choker, the angle of the choke must be 120 degrees or greater. When used as a chain shortener, minimize twist of chain and ensure chain is fully engaged in hook. Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles. Look for the Platinum color - Crosby Grade 100 Alloy Products. A/L-1338 Cradle Grab Hook L-1338 Chain Size Dimensions S-4338 Working A-1338 L-1338 Replacement Load Stock Stock Each Latch Kit Stock (mm) Limit A B C D E F * 1/ / / / / * Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. Do Not Exceed Work Load Limits

63 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS 61 Accoloy Eye Foundry Hook Accoloy Eye Foundry Hook Specifications CHAIN PIN # Chain Size (mm) Grade Working Load Limits D E F G J K Spherical Radius / , /4 2-5/8 5/ /16 1-1/8 1/ / , /4 3-1/8 13/16 1-1/4 1-7/8 1-3/8 5/ / , /8 3-3/4 1-1/32 1-1/2 2-1/4 1-5/8 3/ / , /16 4-1/4 1-1/4 1-3/4 2-5/8 1-7/8 7/16 * / , /4 4-3/4 1-1/ /8 1/2 * / , /8 5-1/4 1-3/4 2-1/4 3-3/8 2-3/8 9/16 * , /16 5-3/ /2 2-3/4 2-3/4 5/8 * / , /4 6-3/8 2-1/ /4 3-1/4 3/4 * Do Not Use with Grade 100 assemblies. Kuplex II Clevis Foundry Hook Kuplex II Foundry Hooks when properly used are designed for maximum service such as those applications encountered in foundry work. The throat of the hook is designed to accommodate standard trunnions. The tip of the hook is designed for ease of insertion into holes in the casing. Kuplex II Clevis Foundry Hook Specifications PIN # Hook Chain Size (mm) Grade Working Load Limit A B C D E F G H I J K-498 9/ , /8 1-9/16 4-7/16 4-7/8 2-5/8 1/8 5/16 13/32 11/32 7/ K-499 3/ , /8 1-7/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3 5/32 7/16 9/16 15/32 1-1/ K-500 1/ , /2 2-1/4 6-5/8 6-7/8 3-7/8 3/16 9/16 3/4 21/32 1-1/ K-501 5/ , /16 2-9/16 7-5/8 8-9/32 4-1/8 1/4 11/16 15/16 13/16 1-3/ * K-502 3/ , / /16 9-5/8 4-13/16 5/16 13/16 1-7/ * K-503 7/ , /8 9-15/ /16 5-3/8 3/8 15/16 1-9/32 1-1/16 2-1/ * Do Not Use with Grade 100 assemblies. Do Not Exceed Work Load Limits

64 62 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS Single Leg Sling Grade 100 Assembly Chart Spectrum 10 Chain Size 1/4 (9/32) (mm) Grade 100 Chain Stock # Master Link A-1342N + Stock # Master Link Assembly A-1345N + Stock # Master Link A-342 Stock # Master Link A-345 Stock # Eliminator L-1361 Stock # Lok-A- Loy A-1337 Stock # Chain Coupler S-1325A Stock # Chain Shortener Link S-1311N Stock # Shur-Loc Clevis Hook S-1317 Stock # Shur- Loc Swivel Hook S-1316 Stock # Shur-Loc Swivel Hook S-1326 Stock # X / X2-3/ X3-1/ X4-5/ X5-3/ X6-7/ X / Double Leg Sling Spectrum 10 Chain Size (mm) Grade 100 Chain Stock # Master Link A-1342N + Stock # Master Link Assembly A-1345N + Stock # Master Link A-342 Stock # Master Link A-345 Stock # Eliminator L-1362 Stock # Lok-A- Loy A-1337 Stock # Chain Coupler S-1325A Stock # Chain Shortener Link S-1311N Stock # Shur-Loc Clevis Hook S-1317 Stock # Shur-Loc Swivel Hook S-1316 Stock # Shur-Loc Swivel Hook S-1326 Stock # 1/ X (9/32) 5/ X / X / X / X / X / X / Triple & Quad Leg Slings Spectrum 10 Chain Size Grade 100 Chain Stock # Master Link A-1342N + Stock # Master Link Assembly A-1345N + Stock # Master Link A-342 Stock # Master Link A-345 Stock # Eliminator Stock # Lok-A- Loy A-1337 Stock # Chain Coupler S-1325A Stock # Chain Shortener Link S-1311N Stock # Shur-Loc Clevis Hook S-1317 Stock # Shur-Loc Swivel Hook S-1316 Stock # Shur-Loc Swivel Hook S-1326 Stock # (mm) 1/ (9/32) 5/ / / See Page / / / /

65 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS 63 Grade 100 Assembly Chart Single Leg Sling CHAIN Spectrum 10 Chain Size (mm) Shur-Loc Swivel Hook w/bearing S Stock # Clevis Sling Hook L-1339 Stock # Eye Sling Hook L-1327 Stock # Cradle Grab Hook A-1338* Stock # Clevis Grab Hook A-1358* Stock # Eye Grab Hook A-1328 Stock # Clevis Foundry Hook A-1359 Stock # Eye Foundry Hook A-1329 Stock # Chain Choker A-1355 Stock # 1/ (9/32) 5/ / / / / / / Double Leg Sling Spectrum 10 Chain Size Shur-Loc Swivel Hook w/ Bearing S-1326 Stock # Clevis Sling Hook A-1339 * Stock # Eye Sling Hook L-1327 Stock # Cradle Grab Hook A-1338 * Stock # Clevis Grab Hook A-1358 * Stock # Eye Grab Hook A-1328 Stock # Clevis Foundry Hook A-1359 Stock # Eye Foundry Hook A-1329 Stock # Chain Choker A-1355 Stock # (mm) 1/ (9/32) 5/ / / / / / / Triple & Quad Leg Slings Spectrum 10 Chain Size Shur-Loc Swivel Hook (mm) w/bearing S-1326 Stock # Clevis Sling Hook A-1339 * Stock # Eye Sling Hook L-1327 Stock # Cradle Grab Hook A-1338 * Stock # Clevis Grab Hook A-1358 * Stock # Eye Grab Hook A-1328 Stock # Clevis Foundry Hook A-1359 Stock # Eye Foundry Hook A-1329 Stock # Chain Choker A-1355 Stock # 1/ (9/32) 5/ / / / / / /

66 64 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS Crosby ELIMINATOR A-1361 The Crosby ELIMINATOR combines selected features and functionality of a master link, connecting link, grab hook and adjuster legs to provide you with one fitting that is suitable for applications that require an adjustable length chain sling. Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered Innovative two piece design allows for maximum flexibility Individually Proof Tested with certification The Crosby ELIMINATOR, if properly installed and locked, can be used for personnel lifting applications and meets the intent of OSHA Rule (g) (4) (iv) (B) Suitable for use with Grade 100 and Grade 80 chain Engineered to accommodate optional locking pins that can be inserted to lock the shortened chain legs into place Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles Use the A-1361 and A-1362 in combination to make 3 leg chain slings Look for the platinum Color - Crosby Grade 100 Alloy Products All sizes are RFID equipped A-1362 A-1361 Crosby ELIMINATOR Single Hook Chain Size Working Dimensions A-1361 L-1361 Load Frame Limit Stock Stock Each (mm) Size A B C D E G H AA * 1/ / / / / * Proof tested at 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. A-1362 Crosby ELIMINATOR Single Hook Chain Size Working Dimensions A-1362 L-1362 Load Frame Limit Stock Stock Each (mm) Size A B C D E G H AA * 1/ / / / / * Proof tested at 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.

67 Special Chain Assemblies Accoloy Steady-Lift Magnet Chain Eliminates Costly Down Time With Lift After Lift - Built-In Dependability SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS 65 Ease of Use - Designed so the bail stands up while the chain rests on the floor, there is no wrestling with the bail for hookup. Balanced Loading - Three point suspension offers superior stability. Wearability - Engineered and built for increased service life, with heat treated bail, pins, alloy chain and end links. CHAIN Less Down Time - Easy Inspection, replaceable pins, legs and bail mean more time on the job and fewer off site repairs. Steady-Lift Replacement Parts Magnet Chain Size Pin Leg Yoke / Accoloy Steady-Lift Magnet Chain Specifications PIN # Chain Size Work Load Limit of Links A Mtl Dia. B Yoke Width C Yoke Length D Vert. Reach E End Link Width F End Link Length G End Link Dia. Complete Assembly Yoke Chain Leg Pin Magnet Diameter , / / Up to /4 150, / / and Larger Accoloy Standard Magnet Chain Standard Magnet Chain Specifications PIN # Chain Size (mm) Work Load o A Dia Mtl Master Link B Ins Width C Ins Length A Dia Mtl Oblong Link B Ins Width C Ins Length 5 Link Reach Magnet Diameter / , / /8 2-1/4 5-1/2 30-5/8 Up to / , / Up to / , /8 6-1/2 11-1/ / /8 Up to , /4 6-1/2 11-1/2 1-1/ Up to / , /2 6-1/2 12-3/4 1-1/ /2 60 and Larger

68 66 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS Alloy Chain Mesh Sling Liftex PAC-FLEX Alloy Chain Mesh Slings are specified for multiple lifting uses in metalworking and other applications where the loads are abrasive, hot or will tend to cut other types of slings. PAC- FLEX is vastly superior in many respects to the wire mesh sling. Pac-Flex Slings Feature Flat, smoother bearing surfaces. High tensile strength alloy steel chain. Flexibility to conform to irregular shapes. Withstands temperatures to 550 degrees. Excellent resistance to abrasion and cutting. Easy to inspect - use the same inspection criteria used for other alloy sling chains. Compare Liftex Pac-Flex Alloy Chain Mesh Slings to Wire Mesh Slings More capacity per sling width. Our 2 wide sling is 260% stronger than 2 wide wire mesh slings. Our 4 wide sling is 200% stronger than 4 wide wire mesh slings. BI-DIRECTIONAL FLEXIBILITY. Pac-Flex Fitting Dimensions (in inches) Pac-Flex Materials of Construction PAC-FLEX is a uniquely engineered and patented arrangement of alloy steel chain and 1/8 wire rope. End Fittings are heat treated alloy steel. A-1 A-2 B D Thickness PAC PAC PAC-5HD PAC-8HD Sling Type Pac-Flex Chain Mesh Sling Specifications Part Nominal Sling Width Choker Hitch *Rated Capacity Vertical Hitch Basket Hitch Approx. 3 Sling 1 Body Type II PAC-4B Type I PAC-4C Type II PAC-7B Type I PAC-7C Type II PAC-5B/HD Type I PAC-5C/HD Type II PAC-8B/HD Type I PAC-8C/HD DO NOT EXCEED RATED CAPACITY HOW TO ORDER Specify on Purchase Order Sling Width Sling Length (pull to pull - see illustration at right) Part

69 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS 67 Table of Wear Chain Size Material Diameter Minimum Safe Dimension at Worn Part of Link (C) (mm) Grade 80 Grade 100 Grade 80 Grade 100 9/32 7 mm in in 3/8 10 mm in in. 1/2 13 mm in in. 5/8 16 mm in in. 3/4 20 mm in in.- 7/8 22 mm mm in /4 32 mm in. - If thickness at any location on the chain, master link and/or sublink is less than the minimum on this table, remove from service immediately. CHAIN Effects of High Temperature on Working Load Limits of Grade 80 Alloy Chain Maximum Temperature of Chain (degrees F) Reduction of working Load Limit While at Temperature Reduction of Working Load Limit After Exposure to Temperature Below 400 None None % None % None % 5% % 10% % 15% % 20% % 25% Over 1000 * (See Below) * (See Below) * OSHA requires all slings exposed to temperature over 1000 F to be removed from service. Effects of High Temperature on Working Load Limits of Grade 100 Alloy Chain Maximum Temperature of Chain (degrees F) Reduction of working Load Limit Reduction of Working Load Limit After Exposure to While at Temperature Temperature Below 400 None None % None % 5% % 15% % 20% % 25% % 30% % 35% Over 1000 * (See Below) * (See Below) * OSHA requires all slings exposed to temperature over 1000 F to be removed from service.

70 68 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS Safer Chain Sling Use Follow these Recommendations for Safer Chain Sling Use 7 Protect the chain with padding when lifting sharp edged loads. 1 Visually examine the sling before each use. Look for stretched, gouged, bent, or damaged links and components, including hooks, with opened throats, cracks or distortion. If damaged, remove from service. 2 Know the load - determine the weight, center of gravity, angle of lift and select the proper size and type of sling. 8 Lift and lower loads smoothly, do not jerk. 3 Never overload the sling - check the working load limit on the identification tag. Always consider the effect of the Angle of Lift - the tension on each leg of the sling is increased as the angle of lift, from horizontal, decreases. Consult ALP Sales Representative for more information. 9 Hands and fingers should not be placed between the sling and the load while the sling is being tightened around the load. When lifted, the load should not be pushed or guided by employee s hands directly on the load. 4 Do not point load (tip load) hooks - load should bear on the bowl of the hook. 10 Do not expose A8A alloy chain or slings to temperatures above 500 o F. 11 Protect chain slings from corrosion during storage. 5 Make sure the chain is not twisted, knotted or kinked before lifting the load. 12 Store slings properly on an A-Frame. 6 Slings should not be shortened with knots, bolts or other makeshift devices.

71 Chain Sling Inspection SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS 69 Daily Inspection - as shown in No. 1 - should be conducted by a competent person designated by the employer. Periodic Inspection - OSHA specifies that all alloy steel chain slings shall have a thorough periodic inspection, by a competent person, at least once every 12 months. These inspections must be recorded and maintained for each individual sling. The inspection schedule should be based on frequency of sling use, severity of service conditions, nature of lifts being made and experience gained on service life of slings used in similar circumstances. Inspection 1 Clean Chain prior to inspection, to more easily see damage or defects. 3 Make a link-by-link inspection of the chain slings for: a. Excessive wear - If the wear on any portion of any link exceeds the allowable wear shown in the Table of Wear remove from service. CHAIN 2 Hang chain vertically, if practical, for preliminary inspection. Measure reach accurately (bearing point of master link to bearing point of hook). Check this length against reach shown on tag. If present length is greater than that shown on tag, there is a possibility that the sling has been subjected to overloading or excessive wear. b. Twisted, bent, gouged, nicked, worn or elongated links. c. Cracks in the weld area of any portion of the link. Transverse markings are the most dangerous. d. Severe corrosion. 4 Check master links and hooks for all of the above faults - hooks especially for excessive throat opening. Slings showing any of the faults described above should immediately be removed from service and returned to the manufacturer for repair. ALP offers a chain inspection service performed by our own qualified chain inspectors

72 70 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS Carbon Chain Proof Coil - Grade 30 A general light purpose chain ideal for most applications requiring a light duty steel chain Available in self colored, electro-galvanized, hot galvanized, and powder coated (by special order) Chain Size Working Load Limit Grade 30 Specifications per 100 ft. Material Diameter Inside Length Inside Width Chain embossed L3 1/8* / /4 1, Long Link 1/4 1, /16 1, Long Link 5/16 1, /8 2, Long Link 3/8 2, /2 4, /8 6, /4* 10, * Import Long Link - chain that has a reduction in weight and cost without compromising the strength Do not use for overhead lifting Do Not Exceed Work Load Limits Laclede High Test - Grade 43 Low carbon steel chain ideal for most tie down applications Electronically welded and proof tested Available as self colored, electro-galvanized, or hot galvanized finishes Chain embossed L4 Chain Size Working Load Limit Grade 43 Specifications per 100 ft. Material Diameter Inside Length Inside Width 1/ / / / /

73 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS 71 Laclede Transport - Grade 70 Electronically welded and heat treated Higher strength to weight ratio Easily recognized Gold Chromate Finish Grade 70 Specifications Chain Size Working Load Limit Chain embossed L7 per 100 ft. Material Diameter Inside Length Inside Width CHAIN 1/4 3, /16 4, /8 6, /16 8, /2 11, /8 15, Machine Chain - Straight & Twist Agricultural Implements Playground Equipment Animal Tie Outs Tailgates General Utility Low Carbon Welded Steel Straight Link Twist Link Machine Chain Specifications Straight Link Twist Link Chain Size (Trade Size) Working Load Limit per 100 ft. Material Diameter Inside Length Inside Width Chain Size (Trade Size) Working Load Limit per 100 ft. Material Diameter Inside Length Inside Width # # # # / / / / / / / / Do not use for overhead lifting Do Not Exceed Work Load Limits

74 72 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS Link Coil Chain - Straight & Twist Welded steel chain used in many light duty industrial applications Agricultural Implements Playground Equipment Animal Tie Outs Tailgates General Utility Link Coil Chain Specifications Straight Coil Chain Twist Coil Chain Chain Size (Trade Size) Working Load Limit Coil Chain - Straight per 100 ft. Material Diameter Inside Length Inside Width Chain Size (Trade Size) Working Load Limit Coil Chain - Twist per 100 ft. Material Diameter Inside Length # # # # / / / / / / / Inside Width Single Jack Chain A chain made of light wire. Uses: - Flower pots - Lights - Light Industrial Applications Chain Size (Trade Size) Working Load Limit (Steel) Specifications Single Jack Chain Working Load Limit (Brass per 100 ft. Material Diameter # # # # # Lockdown Chain Square heat treated links make it very difficult to cut with conventional bolt cutters Perfect for construction equipment, trailers, ATVS, watercrafts, and all your other valuables Lockdown Chain Specifications Chain Size Working Load Limit per 100 ft. Material Diameter Inside Length Inside Width 10MM (3/8) NA MM (1/2) NA

75 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS 73 Binders & Chains Stock Chain Grade Usage Ratchet Chain Binder Min.-Max Working Chain Size Load Limit Proof Load Each Handle Length Barrel Length Take Up Red Blue Gr 43 & 70 5/16-3/ Red Gr 43 & 70 3/8-1/ Red Gr 43 & 70 1/2-5/ (R-7) Gr 70, 80 & 100 5/16-3/ (R-A) Gr 70, 80 & 100 3/8-1/ (R-C) Gr 70, 80 & 100 1/2-5/ CHAIN Lever Chain Binder Stock Std. Pkg. Min.-Max Chain Size Working Load Limit Proof Load Each Handle Length Take up Red Blue 4 5/16-3/ Red 4 3/8-1/ Red 4 1/2-5/ Chain Size Gr 70 or Gr 80 QuikBinder TM Plus Ratchet Load Binder Take Up Handle Length (in) Qty per Package Package Working Load Limit Folded Straight lbs kg 5/16 or 3/ ,100 3,220 3/8 or 1/ ,000 5,443 1/2 or 5/ ,100 8,210 Size Grade 40 High Test Tiedown Chain Working Load Limit Each Welded Hooks Stock Self Colored Clevis Hooks Stock 3/8x /8x /8x /8x /16x Grade 70 Transport Tiedown Chain Clevis Hook Working Size Each Load Limit Stock * Yellow Dichromate 5/16x14 ft /16x16 ft /16x20 ft /16x25 ft /8x14 ft /8x16 ft /8x20 ft /8x25 ft

76 74 SECTION 3-CHAIN PRODUCTS Stainless Steel Chain 316L Stainless Anchor Chain (S1) Item Size Dia. L W WLL BL S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. Note: This chain has dimensions of BBB chain and fits most standard windlasses, it also complies with all requirements of Din 766. Other types such as G4 available on special order. 316L Stainless Industrial Chain Item Size Dia. L W WLL BL S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S lb lb lb. Note: Most economic & commonly used chain for commercial and marine applications, made to proof coil dimensions. 316L Stainless Lifting Chain (S5) Item Size Dia. L W WLL BL S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. CAUTION Note: Suncor Grade 50 lifting chain is made to grade 80 dimensions, never exceed working load limit. Working loads are based on gradual pull and NOT shock loads. Make sure all components in your assembly are overhead lifting rated and have the same working loads. 304L Stainless Long Link Chain (S6) Item Size Dia. L W WLL BL S / lb. 720 lb lb. S /32-7/ lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. S / lb lb lb. Note: Long Link Chain is the least expensive stainless chain. The links on average are 1.5 times longer than standard chain links. This chain complies with all requirements of Din 5685-C.

77 Synthetic Web Slings SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS SYNTHETIC SLINGS 75 Web Sling Types Type 1 - TC (AL-1) TRIANGLE CHOKER - Designed for use in choker, basket or vertical hitch. Available with forged Aluminum Alloy or flame cut Alloy Steel fittings. Type 2 - TT (AL-2) TRIANGLE TRIANGLE - Application is limited to basket or vertical hitch only. Triangle fittings cannot be used in choke hitch since they will not pass through one another. Available with forged Aluminum Alloy or flame cut Alloy Steel fittings. SYNTHETIC SLINGS Type3-EEF(AL-3) Type 4-EET(AL-4) FLAT EYE - The eye is formed by folding the webbing back and sewing it flat against the sling body. Available in single or multiple thickness. Slings in widths 3 and wider are furnished with tapered eyes as standard. TWISTED EYE - The eye is formed by turning the fabric 180 o before sewing to form an eye which lays 90 o to the sling body. This allows for easier choking. Slings in widths 3 and wider are furnished with tapered eyes as standard. Type5-EN(AL5) Type6-RE(AL-6) ENDLESS - Fabric is overlapped and sewn to form an endless grommet. The most versatile of all slings. Used in vertical, basket or choker hitch it provides the best gripping and holding power around the object to be lifted in the upright position. It is also the easiest to use and lasts longer because there are no eyes to determine wearing points. Endless slings are furnished with flat ends and can be supplied tapered. REVERSED EYE - Eye is formed by folding back the webbing and sewing it side by side. Designed primarily for use in choker hitch, although it lends itself equally well to basket and vertical hitch applications. This type of construction results in eye openings which are in the same plane as the sling body, and is best for choking. The sling body remains flat against the load.

78 76 SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS Considerations When Ordering Typical Sling Identification: EET2904 X 10 Ft. Nylon Sling Type Plies Grade Available Width Length TC - Triangle Choker Typically 6 - Safe-T-Grip Light Duty 1 / 2 / 3 TT - Triangle Triangle Tufskin Light Duty 4 / 5 / 6 EEF - Eye & Eye Flat Plies 9 - Mulox Light Duty 8 / 10 / 12 EET - Eye & Eye Twisted 13 - Tufskin Heavy Duty EN - Endless RE - Reversed Eye As Required in Feet Length Length Length ALP routinely fabricates synthetic sling using polyester webbing. Please specify if nylon webbing is desire. Also, indicate the use of non-standard fitting or wear pads. When ordering, specify any Non-Standard End Fittings or Optional Wear Pads. Chemical Resistance of Web Materials: Web Material Acids Alcohols Aldehydes Strong Alkalis Bleach Agents Dry Cleaning Solvents Ethers Crude Oils Halo-genated Hydrocarbons Hydrocarbons Ketones Lubricant Oils Soap & Detergents Water & Seawater Nylon No Ok Ok Ok No Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok Polyester * Ok No ** Ok Ok No Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok Disintegrated by concentrated sulfuric acid. * Good Resistance to weak and strong acids at room temperature. ** Degraded by strong alkalis at elevated temperatures. Weak Alkalis Standard Eye Length Specifications ** Sling Width One Ply Two Ply Three Ply Four Ply 1 8-1/2 8-1/ ** Non-Standard Eye Lengths must be specified at the time of order. Aluminum Fittings are not recommended where sprays, mists, fumes, vapors or liquids of caustics are present.

79 Effects of Sling Angle SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS 77 Sling capacity decreases as the horizontal angle decreases. Sling angles of less than 30 0 are not recommended. SYNTHETIC SLINGS Do Not Use Slings Beyond Rated Capacity. OPTIONAL WEAR PADS Sliding Sleeve wear pads protect both sides of the sling. It provides the opportunity to shift the sleeve to any area where the sling may come into contact with sharp edges. Edgeguard is a strip of webbing sewn along the edges of the sling. This may be desired for certain applications where the edge of the sling is subject to damage. Regular wear pads are additional layers of material sewn to the sling at the point of expected wear. This can be sewn to one or both sides and at any point of the sling and to any length. Regular wear material can be added to the wear area of the eyes. ALP has adopted rated capacities in accordance with ANSI B30.9 and the Web Sling & Tied Down Association, where applicable.

80 78 SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS Mulox Heavy Duty Polyester Sling* One Ply* Two Ply** One Ply Two Ply Three Ply Four Ply Type 1 (TC) & Type 2 (TT) Slings TC TT Vertical Choke Basket TCP1902 TTP1902 3,100 2,480 6,200 TCP1903 TTP1903 4,700 3,760 9,400 TCP1904 TTP1904 6,200 4,960 12,400 TCP1905 TTP1905 7,800 6,240 15,600 TCP1906 TTP1906 9,300 7,440 18,600 TCP1908 TTP ,800 9,440 23,600 TCP2902 TTP2902 6,200 4,960 12,400 TCP2903 TTP2903 8,800 7,040 17,600 TCP2904 TTP ,000 8,800 22,000 TCP2905 TTP ,700 10,960 27,400 TCP2906 TTP ,500 13,200 33,000 TCP2908 TTP ,700 18,160 45, & 12 Widths Available *Available with Aluminum or Steel Fittings **Available only with steel fittings. Type 3 (EEF) & Type 4 (EET) Slings EEF EET Vertical Choke Basket EEFP1901 EETP1901 1,600 1,280 3,200 EEFP1902 EETP1902 3,100 2,480 6,200 EEFP1903 EETP1903 4,700 3,760 9,400 EEFP1904 EETP1904 6,200 4,960 12,400 EEFP1905 EETP1905 7,800 6,240 15,600 EEFP1906 EETP1906 9,300 7,440 18,600 EEFP1908 EETP ,800 9,440 23,600 EEFP2901 EETP2901 3,100 2,480 6,200 EEFP2902 EETP2902 6,200 4,960 12,400 EEFP2903 EETP2903 8,800 7,040 17,600 EEFP2904 EETP ,000 8,800 22,000 EEFP2905 EETP ,700 10,960 27,400 EEFP2906 EETP ,500 13,200 33,000 EEFP2908 EETP ,700 18,160 45,400 EEFP3901 EETP3901 4,100 3,300 8,200 EEFP3902 EETP3902 8,300 6,600 16,600 EEFP3903 EETP ,500 10,000 25,000 EEFP3904 EETP ,000 12,800 32,000 EEFP3905 EETP ,200 15,400 38,400 EEFP3906 EETP ,000 18,400 46,000 EEFP3908 EETP ,700 24,500 61,400 EEFP4901 EETP4901 5,500 4,400 11,000 EEFP4902 EETP ,000 8,800 22,000 EEFP4903 EETP ,400 13,120 32,800 EEFP4904 EETP ,400 16,320 40,800 EEFP4905 EETP ,500 20,400 51,000 EEFP4906 EETP ,600 24,480 61,200 EEFP4908 EETP ,700 31,700 79, & 12 Widths Available. One Ply Two Ply Three Ply Four Ply One Ply Two Ply Three Ply Type 5 (EN) Endless Sling EEF Vertical Choke Basket ENP1901 3,200 2,560 6,400 ENP1902 6,200 4,960 12,400 ENP1903 9,400 7,520 18,800 ENP ,400 9,920 24,800 ENP ,600 12,480 31,200 ENP ,600 14,880 37,200 ENP ,200 16,960 42,400 ENP2901 6,200 4,960 12,400 ENP ,400 9,920 24,800 ENP ,600 14,080 35,200 ENP ,000 17,600 44,000 ENP ,400 21,920 54,800 ENP ,000 26,400 66,000 ENP ,300 33,840 84,600 ENP3901 8,000 6,400 16,000 ENP ,000 12,800 32,000 ENP ,500 17,200 43,000 ENP ,700 23,000 57,400 ENP ,000 27,200 68,000 ENP ,700 32,500 81,400 ENP ,000 36,800 92,000 ENP ,000 8,800 22,000 ENP ,000 17,600 44,000 ENP ,900 26,300 65,800 ENP ,800 32,640 81,600 ENP ,000 40, ,000 ENP ,200 48, ,400 ENP ,600 46, , & 12 Widths Available. Type 6 (RE) Reverse Eye Sling RE Vertical Choke Basket REP1902 4,500 3,600 9,000 REP1904 7,700 6,200 15,400 REP ,000 8,800 22,000 REP2902 6,500 5,200 13,000 REP ,000 10,400 26,000 REP ,000 16,000 40,000 REP ,400 13,100 32,800 REP ,500 20,400 51,000 * Also available in Nylon upon request.

81 Multi-Leg Synthetic Slings SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS Mulox Multi-Leg Slings - Flat Eyes 79 of Legs Web Width of Plies Rated Capacity Recommended Minimum Master Link * Eye Sling Hook ** ,100 2,800 2,300 1,600 1/2 1TA 2 6,200 5,400 4,400 3,100 3/4 1.5TA 1 6,200 5,400 4,400 3,100 3/4 1.5TA 2 12,400 10,700 8,800 6, TA 1 9,400 8,100 6,600 4,700 3/4 1.5TA 2 17,600 15,200 12,400 8, TA 1 4,800 4,100 3,300 2,400 3/4 1TA 2 9,000 7,700 6,300 4,500 3/4 1.5TA 1 9,000 7,700 6,300 4,500 3/4 1.5TA 2 18,600 15,500 12,700 9, TA 1 14,100 12,000 9,900 7, TA 2 26,400 22,800 18,600 13, /4 5TA 1 6,400 5,500 4,500 3, TA 2 12,000 10,300 8,400 6, TA 1 12,000 10,300 8,400 6, TA 2 24,800 20,700 16,900 12, /4 3TA ,800 16,280 13,292 9, TA 2 35,200 30,484 24,884 17, /4 5TA * Oblong Master Link & Eye Sling Hooks may be sewn in place or mechanically attached ** Sling Hooks are supplied with safety latch attached when possible. Tapered eyes are standard for 3 and 4 web widths in assemblies. SYNTHETIC SLINGS PENCO Multi-Leg Round Slings of Legs Sling Size Color Rated Capacity Recommended Min. Master Link * PR-1 Purple 5,200 4,500 3,600 2,600 5/8 PR-2 Green 10,600 9,100 7,400 5,300 3/4 PR-3 Yellow 16,800 14,500 11,800 8,400 1 PR-4 Tan 21,200 18,300 14,900 10,600 1 PR-5 Red 26,400 22,800 18,600 13, /4 PR-6 White 33,600 29,100 23,700 16, /4 PR-1 Purple 7,800 6,700 5,500 3,900 3/4 PR-2 Green 15,900 13,700 11,200 7,900 1 PR-3 Yellow 25,200 21,800 17,800 12,600 1 PR-4 Tan 31,800 27,500 22,400 15, /4 PR-5 Red 39,600 34,200 27,900 19, /4 PR-6 White 50,400 43,600 35,600 25, /2 PR-1 Purple 10,400 9,000 7,300 5,200 3/4 PR-2 Green 21,200 18,300 14,900 10,600 1 PR-3 Yellow 33,600 29,100 23,700 16, /4 PR-4 Tan 42,400 36,700 29,900 21, /2 PR-5 Red 52,800 42,700 37,300 26, /2 PR-6 White 67,200 58,100 47,500 33, /4 * Oblong Master Links & Fittings are mechanically connected - see pages

82 80 SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS Specialty Synthetic Web Slings Penco Tufskin Abrasion Resistant Nylon Slings Penco Tufskin Slings are made from Latex-Treated, Cordura-Jacketed Webbing with Red Yarn Innerwear Indicators. It is the toughest, most abrasive resistant and durable webbing available. It s like having slings with built-in wear pads - resulting in appreciably greater sling life. Tufskin Light Duty Nylon Slings Visible Single Stripe on the outside of the webbing for easy identification. Eyes are tapered for 3 & 4 webbing widths in single ply only. Type 1 (TC) & Type 2 (TT) Tufskin Nylon Slings Ply Width TC TT Vertical Choker Basket 2 TC1702 TT1702 2,200 1,650 4,400 3 TC1703 TT1703 3,150 2,375 6,300 4 TC1704 TT1704 4,500 3,375 9,000 2 TC2702 TT2702 4,350 3,275 8,700 3 TC2703 TT2703 6,450 4,850 12,900 4 TC2704 TT2704 9,200 6,900 18,400 One Ply Two Ply Tufskin Heavy Duty Nylon Slings Visible Double Stripes on the outside of the webbing for easy identification. Heavy Duty Tufskin Slings are 30% stronger compared with other sling webbing. Eyes are not tapered in any webbing widths. Type 1 (TC) & Type 2 (TT) Tufskin Nylon Slings Ply Width TC TT Vertical Choker Basket One Ply Two Ply 2 TC11302 TT ,400 3,300 8,800 3 TC11303 TT ,300 4,750 12,600 4 TC11304 TT ,000 6,750 18,000 2 TC21302 TT ,700 6,550 17,400 3 TC21303 TT ,900 9,700 25,800 4 TC21304 TT ,200 11,400 30,400 Type 3 (EEF) & Type 4 (EET) Tufskin Nylon Slings Ply Width EEF EET Vertical Choker Basket 1 EEF1701 EET1701 1, ,200 Two Ply One Ply 2 EEF1702 EET1702 2,200 1,650 4,400 3 EEF1703 EET1703 3,150 2,375 6,300 4 EEF1704 EET1704 4,300 3,225 8,600 1 EEF2701 EET2701 2,200 1,650 4,400 2 EEF2702 EET2702 4,050 3,050 8,100 3 EEF2703 EET2703 6,000 4,500 12,000 4 EEF2704 EET2704 8,150 6,125 16,300 Type 3 (EEF) & Type 4 (EET) Tufskin Nylon Slings Ply Width EEF EET Vertical Choker Basket 1 EEF11301 EET ,200 1,650 4,400 Two Ply One Ply 2 EEF11302 EET ,400 3,300 8,800 3 EEF11303 EET ,300 4,750 12,600 4 EEF11304 EET ,600 6,450 17,200 1 EEF21301 EET ,400 3,300 8,800 2 EEF21302 EET ,100 6,100 16,200 3 EEF21303 EET ,000 9,000 24,000 4 EEF21304 EET ,300 12,250 32,600 Type 5 (EN) Tufskin Nylon Slings Ply Width EN Vertical Choker Basket 1 EN1701 2,200 1,650 4,400 Two Ply One Ply 2 EN1702 4,000 3,000 8,000 3 EN1703 5,550 4,175 11,100 4 EN1704 8,150 6,125 16,300 1 EN2701 4,000 3,000 8,000 2 EN2702 8,700 6,525 17,400 3 EN ,450 7,850 20,900 4 EN ,900 8,925 23,800 Type 5 (EN) Tufskin Nylon Slings Ply Width TC Vertical Choker Basket 1 EN ,400 3,300 8,800 Two Ply One Ply 2 EN ,000 6,000 16,000 3 EN ,100 8,350 22,200 4 EN ,300 12,250 32,600 1 EN ,000 6,000 16,000 2 EN ,400 13,050 34,800 3 EN ,900 15,700 41,800 4 EN ,800 17,850 47,600

83 SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS 81 Penco Stone Handling Slings With natural untreated webbing, Penco Stone Handling Slings are ideally suited for handling polished granite, concrete panels and marble blocks. Available in 4 width only. Part # Width Ply Vertical Choker Basket STC ,400 4,300 10,800 STC ,700 7,770 19,400 STT ,400 4,300 10,800 STT ,700 7,770 19,400 SEE ,400 4,300 10,800 SEE ,700 7,770 19,400 SEN ,800 8,600 21,600 SEN ,400 15,500 38,800 STC - Triangle Choker STT - Triangle Triangle SEE - Eye & Eye SEN - Endless. SYNTHETIC SLINGS Penco Cargo Slings Use only in a Basket Hitch Designed as a wide-body sling where extra width is critical. Used only in a basket hitch Provides better balance and load distribution. Available in widths 6 thru 24 Special wide-body slings above 24 are available upon request Penco Standard Duty Cargo Slings Penco Heavy Duty Cargo Slings PIN # Webbing Width Rated Capacity Eye Length Eye Width PIN # Webbing Width Rated Capacity Eye Length Eye Width PCS , PCS , PCS , PCS , PCS , PCS , PCS , PCS , PCS , PCS , PCS , PCS , PCS , PCS ,

84 82 SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS Lumber Sorter Slings Lumber Sorter Slings are used specifically in saw mill operations. The slings are fabricated with aluminum or flame cut fitting on one end. The other end is a sewn pocket. Lumber Sorter Sling PIN # Width Ply Rated Capacity LS ,800 lbs Auger Slings Designed to quick lift and secure the drilling auger to the truck boom. The auger sling, in swift wrap around action, lifts the auger to the boom where it is held securely in travel position. The nylon webbing will hang straight from the boom when not in use, will not curl or kink. Most common lengths Rated Capacity: Vertical 2,400 lbs Choker 1,900 lbs. Glass Handling Sling Glass Handling Slings are used to move the glass from the production line to the shipping/crating area. Standard Duty Glass Handling Slings utilize two plies of 2 polyester material sewn in a configuration to provide stabile, controlled transport of the glass panels. These slings are rated to 12,200 lbs when used in a vertical basket. Heavy duty Glass Handling Slings use two plies of 4 polyester webbing and are rated to 20,700 lbs when used in a vertical basket. Both Standard Duty and Heavy Duty have a felt lining sewn in the areas that contact the glass. This lining protects the webbing from marring the glass and the glass from cutting the webbing. Many of these slings are custom designed to the specific requirements of the glass manufacturer.

85 Web Sling Inspection SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS 83 Initial Inspection - Before using any new, repaired, or modified sling, it shall be inspected to ensure that the correct sling is being used as well as to determine that the sling meets the B Standard. Frequent Inspection - This inspection should be made by the person handling the sling each day the sling is used. Periodic Inspection - This inspection should be conducted by designated personnel. Frequency of inspection should be based on: Frequency of Use, Severity of Service Conditions, and Experience Gained on the Service Life of Slings Used in Similar Applications. Inspection Records - Written inspection records, utilizing the identification for each sling as established by the user, should be kept for all slings. These records should show a description of the new sling and its condition on each periodic inspection. Removal Criteria A sling shall be removed from service if damage such as the following is visible and shall only be returned to service when approved by a designated person. Missing or illegible sling identification Knots in any part of the sling Acid or caustic burns Excessive pitting or corrosion, or cracked, distorted or Melting or charring of any part of the sling broken fittings Holes, tears, cuts, or snags Red warning yarns are visible in the body of the sling Broken or worn stitching in load bearing splices Other visible damage that causes doubt as to the strength of the sling Excessive abrasive wear Operating Practices Slings having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitch, and environment shall be selected in accordance with appropriate tables. The weight of load shall be within the rated load of the sling. (Sling Angles have a dramatic affect on rated load). Slings shall be shortened, lengthened, or adjusted only by methods approved by the sling manufacturer. Slings shall not be shortened or lengthened by knotting. Slings that appear to be damaged shall not be used unless inspected and accepted as usable under the Inspection and Removal Criteria. Slings shall be hitched in a manner providing control of the load. Sharp corners in contact with the sling should be padded with material of sufficient strength to minimize damage to the sling. All portions of the human body shall be kept from between the sling and the load, and from between the sling and the crane hook or hoist hook. Personnel should stand clear of the suspended load. Personnel should not ride the sling. Shock loading should be avoided. Slings should not be pulled from under a load when the load is resting on the sling. Slings should be stored in a cool, dry, and dark place to prevent environmental damage. Twisting and kinking the legs shall be avoided. Load applied to the hook should be centered in the base (bowl) of hook to prevent point loading on the hook. During lifting, with or without load, personnel shall be alert for possible snagging. In a basket hitch, the load should be balanced to prevent slippage. The sling s legs should contain or support the load from the sides above the center of gravity when using a basket hitch. Slings should be long enough so that the rated load is adequate when the angle of the legs is taken into consideration. Slings should not be dragged on the floor or over an abrasive surface. In a choker hitch, slings shall be long enough so the choker fitting chokes on the webbing and never on another fitting. Nylon and polyester slings shall not be used in contact with object or at temperatures in excess of 194 o F (90 o C) or below -40 o F (-40 o C). When extensive exposure to sunlight or ultraviolet light is experienced by nylon or polyester web slings, the sling manufacturer should be consulted for recommended inspection procedure. SYNTHETIC SLINGS Additional information and safe operating practices are outlined in current OSHA and ANSI/ASME B30.9c Standards as applicable, pertaining to Lifting assemblies. Operating practices are outlined in current Commercial Vehicle Safety Alliance (CVSA) guidelines for Federal, State, and Provincial practices pertaining to Tiedown Assemblies.

86 84 Polyester Roundslings Penco Polyester Roundslings are: SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS Lightweight - High strength-to-weight ratio Low elongation Extreme flexibility Double cover for extra life Endless style means wear points change with each lift Polyester interior fibers do not contact the load causing little wear as long as the cover is intact Color coding indicates sizes 1 to 7, our most common sizes Maximum Operating Temperature is F(93 0 C) Penco Polyester Roundslings Sling Size Color Vertical Choke Vertical Basket Basket English Metric English Metric English Metric English Metric PR-1 Purple 2,600 lb. 1,200 kg 2,100 lb. 1,000 kg 5,200 lb. 2,400 kg 3,700 lb. 1,700 kg PR-2 Green 5,300 lb. 2,400 kg 4,200 lb. 1,900 kg 10,600 lb. 4,800 kg 7,500 lb. 3,400 kg PR-3 Yellow 8,400 lb. 3,800 kg 6,700 lb. 3,000 kg 16,800 lb. 7,600 kg 11,900 lb. 5,400 kg PR-4 Tan 10,600 lb. 4,800 kg 8,500 lb. 3,800 kg 21,200 lb. 9,600 kg 15,000 lb. 6,800 kg PR-5 Red 13,200 lb. 6,000 kg 10,600 lb. 4,800 kg 26,400 lb. 12,000 kg 18,700 lb. 8,500 kg PR-6 White 16,800 lb. 7,600 kg 13,400 lb. 6,000 kg 33,600 lb. 15,200 kg 23,800 lb. 10,700 kg PR-7 Blue 21,200 lb. 9,600 kg 17,000 lb. 7,600 kg 42,400 lb. 19,200 kg 30,000 lb. 13,600 kg PR-8 Orange 25,000 lb. 11,400 kg 20,000 lb. 9,100 kg 50,000 lb. 22,800 kg 35,400 lb. 16,100 kg PR-9 Orange 31,000 lb. 14,100 kg 24,800 lb. 11,300 kg 62,000 lb. 28,200 kg 43,800 lb. 19,900 kg PR-10 Orange 40,000 lb. 18,200 kg 32,000 lb. 14,500 kg 80,000 lb. 36,400 kg 56,600 lb. 25,700 kg PR-11 Orange 53,000 lb. 24,100 kg 42,400 lb. 19,300 kg 106,000 lb. 48,200 kg 74,900 lb. 34,100 kg PR-12 Orange 66,000 lb. 30,000 kg 52,800 lb. 24,000 kg 132,000 lb. 60,000 kg 93,000 lb. 42,400 kg PR-13 Orange 90,000 lb. 40,900 kg 72,000 lb. 32,700 kg 180,000 lb. 81,800 kg 127,300 lb. 57,800 kg SuperTechlon TM Round Sling SuperTechlon TM Round Slings offer a unique blend of strength and flexibility. They are lightweight and have superior abrasion resistance. Features include: Patented abrasion resistant Techlon TM outer cover delivers up to twice the durability of a standard cover. Stripe coded to assist in identifying sling capacity (each stripe equals 3,000 lb of vertical capacity). Outer cover print coded with vertical capacity. Color coded for easy Rated Capacity * identification. Part Color Code Minimum Vertical Choker Vertical Basket Length Protected tag feature helps ST-ENR-3000 Purple 3,000 lb 2,400 lb 6,000 lb 3 ft protect tag from illegibility. ST-ENR-6000 Green 6,000 lb 4,800 lb 12,000 lb 3 ft Individually serialized for ST-ENR-9000 Yellow 9,000 lb 7,200 lb 18,000 lb 3 ft traceability. ST-ENR Tan 12,000 lb 9,600 lb 24,000 lb 3 ft Highest capacity per color ST-ENR Red 15,000 lb 12,000 lb 30,000 lb 3 ft in the industry. ST-ENR White 18,000 lb 14,400 lb 36,000 lb 6 ft ST-ENR Blue 24,000 lb 19,200 lb 48,000 lb 6 ft ST-ENR Orange 30,000 lb 24,000 lb 60,000 lb 6 ft Note: Larger Capacities are available.

87 Polyester Roundsling Inspection SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS Initial Inspection - Before any polyester round sling is placed into service it shall be inspected by a designated person to ensure that the correct round sling is being used, as well as to determine that the round sling meets the requirements for this specification. Frequent Inspection - This inspection shall be made by a qualified person handling the polyester round sling each time the round sling is used. Periodic Inspection - This inspection shall be conducted by a designated person. Frequency of inspection of the round sling should be based on: Frequency of use. Severity of service conditions. Experience gained on service life of polyester round slings in similar applications. Periodic Inspection should be conducted at least monthly. 85 Removal from Service A polyester round sling shall be removed from service if any of the following is visible: If polyester round sling identification is missing or unreadable. Fittings when damaged, stretched or distorted in any way. Melting, charring or weld spatter on any part of the polyester Polyester round slings that are knotted. round sling. Acid or alkali burns of the polyester round sling. Holes, tears, cuts, embedded particles, abrasive wear, or snags Any conditions which causes doubt as to the strength of the that expose the core fibers of the polyester round sling. polyester round sling. Broken or worn stitching in the cover which exposes the core fibers. Operating Practices Determine weight of the load. The weight of the load shall be within the rated capacity of the polyester round sling(s). Select a polyester round sling having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitch and environment. Polyester round slings shall not be loaded in excess of the rated capacity. Consideration shall be given to the round sling to load angle which affects rated capacities. Polyester round slings with fittings which are used in a choking hitch shall be sufficient length to assure that the choking action is on the round sling, and never on the fittings. Polyester round slings used in a basket hitch shall have the load balanced to prevent slippage. The openings in fittings shall be proper shape and size to ensure that the fitting will seat properly on the polyester round sling, crane hook, or other attachments. Polyester round slings shall always be protected from being cut by sharp corners, sharp edges, protrusions, or abrasive surfaces. Polyester round slings shall not be dragged on the floor or over an abrasive surface. Polyester round slings shall not be twisted, shortened, lengthened, tied in knots, or joined by knotting. Polyester round slings shall not be pulled from under loads when load is resting on the polyester round sling. Do not drop polyester round slings equipped with metal fittings. Polyester round slings that appear to be damaged shall not be used unless inspected and accepted as usable under Section 4.4 and 4.5. The polyester round sling shall be hitched in a manner providing control of the load. Personnel, including all portions of the human body, shall be kept from between the polyester round sling and the load, and from between the polyester round sling and the crane hook or hoist hook. Personnel shall stand clear of the suspended load. Personnel shall not ride the polyester round sling. Shock loading shall be avoided. Twisting the legs (branches) shall be avoided. Load applied to a hook shall be centered in the bowl of the hook to prevent point loading. During lifting, with or without the load, personnel shall be alert for possible snagging of the polyester round sling. The polyester round sling shall be long enough so the rated capacity is adequate when the sling to load angle is taken into consideration. Only Polyester round slings with legible identification tags shall be used. Tags and labels should be kept away from the load, hold and choke point. The polyester round sling shall not be constricted or bunched between the ears of a clevis or shackle, or in a hook. When a polyester round sling is used with a shackle, it is recommended that it be used (rigged) in the bowl of the shackle. SYNTHETIC SLINGS Additional information and safe operating practices are outlined in current OSHA and ANSI/ASME B30.9c Standards as applicable, pertaining to Lifting assemblies. Operating practices are outlined in current Commercial Vehicle Safety Alliance (CVSA) guidelines for Federal, State, Provincial practices pertaining to Tiedown Assemblies.

88 86 SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS Web Sling Hardware Aluminum Triangles & Chokers Aluminum Triangle Fitting Specifications Size A B C D E F G Approx Max Rec. Safe Load Min. Break AT /8 2-1/4 1-3/4 15/16 2-3/8 9/ ,360 16,800 AT3 5-1/ / /8 3-5/16 5/ ,000 25,000 AT4 6-1/4 6-5/8 4-3/8 2-3/8 1-7/ / ,700 33,500 AT6 8-15/16 8-7/8 6-3/8 3-1/8 1-3/4 5-1/2 15/ ,700 48,500 Aluminum Choker Fitting Specifications Size A B C D E F G Approx Max Rec. Safe Load Min. Break AC2 6-1/8 5-1/4 2-1/8 1-3/4 15/16 2-3/8 9/ ,360 16,800 AC3 7-1/8 7-1/2 3-1/ /8 3-5/16 5/ ,000 25,000 AC4 8-3/4 8-3/4 4-1/8 2-3/8 1-7/ / ,700 33,500 AC6 11-5/ /4 6-1/8 3-1/8 1-3/4 5-1/2 15/ ,700 48,500 Steel Triangles & Chokers Steel Triangle Fitting Specifications Part Rated Capacity Dimensions A B D T W ST2 8,000 11/16 2-3/8 1-3/4 9/ ST3 8,600 13/16 3-7/16 2 9/ ST4 11,500 15/ /8 9/ ST6 16, /16 5-9/16 3-1/8 3/ ST8 22, /16 6-1/2 4 3/ ST10 28, /2 8-1/ ST12 33, /4 8-3/4 5-1/ Steel Choker Fitting Specifications Part Rated Capacity A B C D T W SC2 8,000 11/16 2-7/16 5-1/8 1-3/4 9/ SC3 8,600 13/16 3-1/4 6-3/16 2 9/ SC4 11,500 15/16 3-3/4 6-15/16 2-3/8 9/ SC6 16, /16 4-3/4 8-7/8 3-1/8 3/ SC8 22, /16 5-5/ / SC10 28, / / SC12 33, /4 7-3/ /16 5-1/

89 SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS 87 Synthetic Sling Connectors S-237 Sling Connector S-238 Sling Connector Working Load Limit (5:1) 5,000 through 60,000 lbs Sling Body Widths: 2 through 6 Allows easy connection to master links or eye hooks, and is ideal for bridles Increased radius of bow gives wider sling bearing surface resulting in an increased area for load distribution, thus increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency as compared to master links, shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. This allows 100% of the sling s rated Working Load Limit to be achieved and allows better load distribution on internal fibers. Individually Proof Tested at 2.5 times the Working Load Limit Each connector has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability, along with a frame size, and the Crosby name and USA in raised letters Allows better load distribution on internal fibers All Alloy Construction Design Factor of 5:1 SYNTHETIC SLINGS S-237 High Performance Sling Connector Working Load Limit 4:1 * 5:1 S-237 Web to Lok-A-Loy Frame Assy. No. Stock Nominal Sling Body Width Lok-A-Loy Size Each Dimensions A B C E G H L N R S W S-238 Web to Web Assy. Stock / / / / / *Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit at 4:1 design factor. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit. S-238 High Performance Sling Connector Working Load Limit S-238 Web to Web Assy. Stock Frame Nominal Sling Body Width Lok-A-Loy Size Each Dimensions A B C E G H K M W / / / / / / * Maximum Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements for minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact with shown in the Recommended Standards Specification for Synthetic Polyester Round Slings by the Web Sling & Tie Down Association. WSTDA-RS (2010).

90 88 SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS Typical Applications The S-237 and S-238 connectors have been designed to easily adapt to other Crosby fittings to develop complete systems for high performance Synthetic Slings. Use S-238 to join two slings Use S-237 to connect to other hardware Sling Saver Web Connector All Alloy construction. Durable vinyl cover that protects the sling at the eye and keeps the sling positioned correctly on the spool. Design Factor is 5:1. Connects Synthetic Web and Synthetic Round Slings to conventional Crosby hardware including: 320N Eye Hook, Additional Crosby Grade 8 Fittings, Master Links, Rings, & Shackles. Makes field-assembled bridles quick and easy No cotter pin to snag sling material. Increased radius of spool gives wider sling bearing surface resulting in an increased area of load distribution, thus : Allowing better load distribution on internal fibers and Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency as compared to standard anchor and chain shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. (This allows 100% of the slings rated Working Load Limit to be achieved.) Replacement kit for spool and web cover available. Designed for use with Type III (Eye & Eye), Class 7, 2 ply webbing & Synthetic Round Slings. Also accommodate single ply and endless slings. Round Sling Size S-280 Crosby Web Connector Specifications Web Slings* Working Dimensions Load S-280 Limit** Stock Web Eye (tons) Width Width Ply A B C D E F G H I J 1 & / / / & / * Designed for use with Type III (Eye & Eye), Class 7, 2 Ply Web Slings. For 3 and larger webbing width, tapered eye is required ** Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

91 Sling Saver Web Sling Shackles SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS 89 S-252 Bolt Type Sling Shackle Shackles available in size 3-1/4 to 50 metric tons. All Alloy construction. Design factor of 5:1. Each shackle has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability along with a Working Load Limit and the name Crosby forged into it. Increased radius of bow gives wider sling bearing surface resulting in an increased area for load distribution, thus: Allows better load distribution on internal fibers and Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency as compared to standard anchor and chain shackle bows and conventional hooks. This allows 100% of the slings rated Working Load Limit to be achieved. Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these shackles meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B Shackles available in both a Screw Pin and Bolt, Nut, & Cotter Pin configuration. Bolt (Pin) has a larger diameter that provides better load distribution. Look for the Red Pin... the mark of Genuine Crosby quality. S-253 Screw Pin Sling Shackle SYNTHETIC SLINGS Web Sling Eye Width Round Sling Size S-252 Bolt-Type Screw Pin Sling Saver Shackle Specifications Work Load Limit* (tons) S-252 Bolt-Type PIN# Dimensions A B C D E F G H J K L M 1 1 & 2 3-1/ & 4 6-1/ & 6 8-3/ & / & / & * Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Web Sling Eye Width Round Sling Size S-253 Screw Pin Sling Saver Shackle Specifications Work Load Limit* (tons) S-253 Screw Pin PIN# Dimensions A B C D E G K L M N P R 1 1 & 2 3-1/ & 4 6-1/ & 6 8-3/ & / & / & * Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

92 90 SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS WS-320A Synthetic Sling Hook Web Sling Hook Hook capacities available: 1-1/2, 3 and 5 metric tons. All Alloy construction. Design factor of 5:1. Each hook has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability along with working load limit and the name Crosby forged in it. Originally designed for 2-Ply Web slings, the Crosby Web Sling Hook can also be used with Round Slings as long as the Working Load Limit ratings are compatible. The Eye is designed with a wide beam surface which: Eliminates bunching effects, Reduces sling tendency to slide, Allows a better load distribution on internal fibers. All hooks feature Crosby s patented QUIC-CHECK indicators. Hook Web Sling Eye width available: 1, 2, and 3. Fatigue rated to 20,000 cycles at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. WS-320-A S.C. Web Sling Eye Width Round Sling Size () Working Load Limit* (tons) WS-320A Web Sling Hook Specifications Dimensions A B C D F G H J K L M N O P Q T AA / *Note: Proof load is 2-1/2 times Working Load Limit. Average straightening load (Ultimate Load) is 5 times Working Load Limit. Each S-287 Choker Hook Web Choker Hook Available in 2 sizes: 3-1/4 tons (2 webbing) and 4-1/2 tons (3 webbing). Forged Alloy steel - Quenched & Tempered. Design factor of 5:1. Each connector has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability along with a Working Load Limit and the name Crosby forged in it. Special design of hook protects the synthetic sling when dropped or dragged. Designed to reduce friction, abrasion, and fraying in choker area. Uses same spool and cover as S-280 Web Connector - Replacement kit for spool and web cover available. S-287 Choker Hook Specifications Web Sling* S-287 Sliding Working Dimension Choker Hook Round Sling Load PIN# Size Webbing Eye Limit Width Width Ply (tons)** A B C D E F G H J AA & / / * Designed for use with Type III (Eye & Eye), Class 7, 2 Ply web slings. ** Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Average straightening load (Ultimate Load) is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

93 S-282 Web/Chain Connector Web/Chain Connector Available in three sizes: SECTION 4-SYNTHETIC SLINGS 3-1/4 ton Working Load Limit - 2 webbing to 3/8 (10 mm) chain. 4-1/2 ton Working Load Limit - 1-1/2 (3 Tapered Webbing) to 1/ 2 (13mm) chain. 6-1/4 ton Working Load Limit - 2 (4 Tapered Webbing) to 5/8 (16 mm) chain. Alloy Steel (Quenched and Tempered). Each connector has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability along with a Working Load Limit and the name Crosby forged into it. Uses same spool and cover as S-280 Web Connector. - Replacement Kit for Spool and Web Cover available. 91 S-282 Web/Chain Connector Round Sling Size Webbing Width Web Slings* Eye Width Working Dimensions Chain Load S-282 Size Limit Stock Each Ply (tons)** B C E F SYNTHETIC SLINGS 1 & /8 3-1/ /2 4-1/ /8 6-1/ * Note: Designed for use with Type III, (Eye & Eye), Class 7, 2 Ply web slings. ** Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 4 times the Working Load Limit. Link Plate & Spool The Link Plate is designed to connect two (2) S-252 or S-253 Sling Shackles together. The Spool is designed to keep the load centered on the pin, therefore keeping the sling positioned correctly in the shackle bow. Link Plate Working Load S-256 Stock Limit (tons)* Each S-256 Link Plate Dimensions A B C D E Spool 3-1/ / / / / * Maximum Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Working S-255 Stock Load Limit (tons)* S-255 Spool Each Dimensions A B C D 3-1/ / / / / * Maximum Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

94 92 Wire Rope Clips G-450 Crosby Clips, all sizes 1/4 and larger, meet the performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-C-450 TYPE 1 CLASS 1, except for those provisions required of the contractor. SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Each base has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability, the name CROSBY or CG, and a size forged into it. Based on the catalog breaking strength of wire rope, Crosby wire rope clips have an efficiency rating of 80% for 1/8-7/8 sizes, and 90% for sizes 1 through 3-1/2. Sizes 1/8 through 2-1/2 and 3 have forged bases. Entire Clip - Galvanized to resist corrosive and rusting action. Only Genuine Crosby Clips have a Red U-Bolt for instant recognition. All Clips are individually bagged or tagged with proper application instructions and warning information. Clip sizes up through 1-1/2 have rolled threads. Meets or exceeds all requirements of AME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these wire rope clips meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B Look for the Red-U-Bolt, your assurance of Genuine Crosby Clips. G-450 Crosby Clip Specifications Refer to the Warning and Application Information on the Next Page. Rope Rope Size G-450 Stock Std. Dimensions Size (mm) No. Galv. Package Per 100 Qty. A B C D E F G H *1/8 3-4* *3/16 5* / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Bulk / Bulk Bulk / Bulk / Bulk **2 3/4 ** Bulk Bulk **3 1/2 ** Bulk * Electro-Plated U-Bolt and Nuts. ** 2-3/4 and 3-1/2 base made of cast steel. SS-450 Stainless Steel Wire Rope Clips FITTINGS & BLOCKS Each base has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability, the name CROSBY or CG, and a size forged into it. Entire clip is made from 316 Stainless Steel to resist corrosive and rusting action. All components are Electro-Polished. All Clips are individually bagged or tagged with proper application instructions and warning information. Rope Size SS-450 Per Dimensions Stock Std. Package Qty. (mm) 100 A B C D E F G H 1/ Bulk / Bulk / Bulk / Bulk / Bulk / Bulk SS-450

95 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 93 G-450/SS450 Crosby Wire Rope Clips Warnings & Application Instructions 4. If a pulley (sheave) is used, in place of a thimble add one additional clip. Clip spacing should be as shown. 5. WIRE ROPE SPLICING PROCEDURES: The preferred method of splicing two wire ropes together is to use inter-locking turnback eyes with thimbles, using the recommended number of clips on each eye (See Figure 5). Failure to read, understand and follow these instructions may cause death or serious injury. Read and understand these instructions before using clips. Match the same size slip to the same size wire rope. Prepare wire rope end termination only as instructed. Do not use plastic coated wire rope. Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next check and retighten nuts to recommended torque. (See table below). Efficiency ratings for wire rope end terminations are based upon the catalog breaking strength of wire rope. The efficiency rating of a properly prepared loop or thimble - eye termination for clip sizes 1/8 through 7/8 is 80%, and for sizes 1 through 3-1/2 is 90%. An alternate method is to use twice the number of clips as used for a turnback termination. The rope ends are placed parallel to each other, overlapping by twice the turnback amount shown in the application instructions. The minimum number of clips should be installed on each dead end (See Figure 6). Spacing, installation torque, and other instructions still apply. 6. IMPORTANT: Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check and use torque wrench to retighten to recommended torque. In accordance with good rigging and maintenance practices, the wire rope end termination should be inspected periodically for wear, abuse, and general adequacy. FITTINGS & BLOCKS The number of clips shown (see Table 1) is based upon using RRL or RLL wire rope, 6 x 19 or 6x37Class, FC or IWRC; IPS or XIP, XXIP. If Seale construction or similar large outer wire type construction in the6x19class is to be used for sizes 1 inch and larger, add one additional clip. If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip. The number of clips shown also applies to rotation - resistant RRL wire rope, 8 x 19 Class, IPS, XIP, XXIP sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller; and to rotation - resistant RRL wire rope, 19 x 7 Class, IPS, XIP, XXIP sizes 1-3/4 inch and smaller. For other classes of wire rope not mentioned above, we recommend contacting Crosby Engineering to ensure the desired efficiency rating. For elevator, personnel hoist, and scaffold applications, refer to ANSI A17.1 and ANSI A10.4. These standards do not recommend U-Bolt style wire rope clip terminations. The style wire rope termination used for any application is the obligation of the user. For OSHA (Construction) applications, see OSHA Refer to Table 1 in following these instructions. Turn back specified amount of rope from thimble or loop. Apply first clip one base width from dead end of rope. Apply U-Bolt over dead end of wire rope - live end rests in saddle (Never saddle a dead horse!). Use torque wrench to tighten evenly, alternate from one nut to the other until reaching the recommended torque. (See Figure 1). 2. When two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible. Use torque wrench to tighten evenly, alternating until reaching the recommended torque. When more than two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible, turn nuts on second clip firmly, but do not tighten. (See Figure 2). 3. When three or more clips are required, space additional clips equally between first two - take up rope slack - use torque wrench to tighten on each U-Bolt evenly, alternating from one nut to the other until reaching recommended torque. (See Figure 3). G450 Crosby Wire Rope Clip Specifications Clip Size Rope Size Minimum of Clips Rope Turnback *Torque (ft/lbs) 1/8 1/ / /16 3/ / /4 1/ /4 15 5/16 5/ /4 30 3/8 3/ /2 45 7/16 7/ /2 1/ /2 65 9/16 9/ /8 5/ /4 3/ /8 7/ /8 1-1/ /4 1-1/ /8 1-3/ /2 1-1/ /8 1-5/ /4 1-3/ /4 2-1/ /2 2-1/ /4 2-3/ /2 3-1/ If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip. See Figure 4. If a greater number of clips are used than shown in the table, the amount of turnback should be increased proportionately. * The tightening torque values shown are based upon the threads being clean, dry, and free of lubrication.

96 94 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Fist Grip Wire Rope Clips Refer to the Warning and Application Information on the Next Page. 3/16-5/8 (New Style) Entire clip is Galvanized to resist corrosive and rusting action. Based on the catalog breaking strength of wire rope, Crosby wire rope clips have an efficiency rating of 80% for 3/16-7/8 sizes, and 90% for sizes 1 through 1-1/2. Bolts are an integral part of the saddle. Nuts can be installed in such a way as to enable the operator to swing the wrench in a full arc for fast installation. All sizes have forged steel saddles. All Clips are individually bagged or tagged with proper application instructions and warning information. Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these wire rope clips meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B Assembled with standard heavy hex nuts. 3/4-1-1/2 Fist Grip wire clips meet or exceed the performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-C-450 Type III, Class 1, except for those provisions required of the contractor. G429 Fist Grip Wire Rope Clip Specifications Rope Size * Rope Size (mm) G-429 Stock Galv. Std. Package Qty. Per 100 Dimensions C D E G N 3/16-1/ / / /16-1/ /16-5/ / / / / /8-1-1/ Bulk * Sizes through 5/8 incorporate New Style design.

97 G-429 Crosby Fist Grip Clip Warnings & Application Instructions SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS If a pulley (sheave) is used, in place of a thimble add one additional Fist Grip. Fist Grip spacing should be as shown. (See Figure 4). New Style Fist Grip 3/16-5/8 Failure to read, understand and follow these instructions may cause death or serious injury. Read and understand these instructions before using clips. Match the same size clip to the same size wire rope. Do not mismatch Crosby clips with other manufacturers clips. Prepare wire rope end termination only as instructed. Do not use plastic coated wire rope. Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next check and retighten nuts to recommended torque. (See table below). Efficiency ratings for wire rope end terminations are based upon the catalog breaking strength of wire rope. The efficiency rating of a properly pre-pared loop or thimble-eye termination for clip sizes 1/8 through 7/8 is 80%, and for sizes 1 through 3-1/2 is 90%. The number of clips shown (see Table 1) is based upon using RRL or RLL wire rope, 6 x 19 or 6x37Class, FC or IWRC; IPS or XIP. If Seale construction or similar large outer wire type construction in the 6 x 19 Class is to be used for sizes 1 inch and larger, add one additional clip. If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip. The number of clips shown also applies to rotation - resistant RRL wire rope, 8 x 19 Class, IPS, XIP, sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller; and to rotation - resistant RRL wire rope, 19 x 7 Class, IPS, XIP, sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller. For other classes of wire rope not mentioned above, we recommend contacting Crosby Engineering at the address or telephone number on the back cover to ensure the desired efficiency rating. The style of wire rope termination used for any application is the obligation of the user. For OSHA (Construction) applications, see OSHA Old Style Fist Grip 3/4-1-1/2 1. Refer to Table 1 in following these instructions. Turn back specified amount of rope from thimble or loop. Apply first clip one base width from dead end of rope. Tighten nuts evenly, alternating from one nut to the other until reaching the recommended torque. (See Figure 1). 2. When two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible. Tighten nuts evenly, alternating until reaching the recommended torque. When more than two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible, turn nuts on second clip firmly, but do not tighten. (See Figure 2). 3. When three or more clips are required, space additional clips equally between first two - take up rope slack - tighten nuts on each bolt evenly, alternating from one nut to the other until reaching recommended torque. (See Figure 3). 5. WIRE ROPE SPLIC- ING PROCEDURES: The preferred method of splicing two wire ropes together is to use interlocking turnback eyes with thimbles, using the recommended number of clips on each eye (See Figure 5). An alternate method is to use twice the number of clips as used for a turn-back termination. The rope ends are placed parallel to each other, overlapping by twice the turnback amount shown in the application instructions. The minimum number of clips should be installed on each dead end (See Figure 6). Spacing, installation torque, and other instructions still apply. 6. IMPORTANT: Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check and retighten nuts to recommended torque. In accordance with good rigging and maintenance practices, the wire rope end termination should be inspected periodically for wear, abuse, and general adequacy. G-429 Crosby Fist Grip - Recommendations Clip Size Rope Size Minimum of Clips Amount of Rope to Turn Back *Torque in (ft. lbs) 3/16 3/ /4 1/ /16 5/ /8 3/ /4 45 7/16 7/ /2 65 1/2 1/ /16 9/ / /8 5/ / /4 3/ /8 7/ /8 1-1/ /4 1-1/ /8 1-3/ /2 1-1/ If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip. See Figure 4. If a greater number of clips are used than show in the table, the amount of turnback should be increased proportionately. * The tightening torque values shown are based upon the threads being clean, dry, and free of lubrication. FITTINGS & BLOCKS

98 96 Links & Rings Alloy Master Link SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered. Individually Proof Tested to values shown, with certification. Proof Tested with 60% inside width special fixtures sized to prevent localized point loading per ASME A-952. Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these links meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B Forgings have a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability, along with the size, the name Crosby and USA in raised lettering. Selected sizes designated with W in the size column have enlarged inside dimensions to allow additional room for sling hardware and crane hook. Crosby 1 1/4 to 2 342/345 master links are type approved to DNV Certification Notes Offshore Containers. These Crosby master links are 100% proof tested, MPI and impact tested. The tests are conducted by Crosby and 3.1 test certification is available upon request. Refer to page 161 for Crosby COLD TUFF master links that meet the additional requirements of DNV rules for certification of lifting applications - Loose Gear. Incorporated patented QUIC-CHECK deformation indicators. A-342 Master Link Specifications A-342 A-345 Size Size (mm) A-342 Stock Working Proof Dimensions Load Limit Load Each A B C Deformation Indicator ** 1/2W 13W ** 5/ ** 3/4W 19W ** 7/8W 22W ** 1W 26W ** 1-1/4W 32W ** 1-1/2W 38W ** 1-3/ ** **^ 2-1/ ^ 2-1/ ** ^ 2-3/ ^ ^ 3-1/ ^ 3-1/ ^ 3-3/ ^ ^ 4-1/ ^ 4-1/ ^ 4-3/ ^ * Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Based on single leg sling (in-line load), or resultant load on multiple legs with an included angle less than or equal to 120 degrees. Applications with wire rope and synthetic sling generally require a design factor of 5. ** Proof Test Load equals or exceeds the requirements of ASTM A952(8.1) and ASME B Welded Master Link. A-345 Master Link Assembly with Engineered Flat for use with S-1325A coupler link Size Working Load Dimensions A-3456 Proof Stock Each Limit Based Load (mm) on 5:1 Design ** A B C D E F G Factor Deformation Indicator 3/4W 19W /8W 22W W 26W /4W 32W /2W 38W / / / *** * Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. The maximum individual sublink working load limit is 75% of the assembly working load limit except for 2-1/2 and 2-34, which are 100% of assembly working load limit. Applications with wire rope and synthetic sling generally require a design factor of 5. ** Proof Test Load equals or exceeds the requirement of ASTM A952(8.1) and ASME B30.9. *** Sublink only.

99 G-340 & S-340 Weldless End Links SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 97 Self-Colored or Hot Dip Galvanized Forged carbon steel - Quenched and Tempered Size (A) Stock Working Dimensions G-340 Galv. S-340 S.C. Load Limit * B C D 5/ / / / / / / / * Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Based on single leg sling (in-line load), or resultant load on multiple legs with an included angle less than or equal to 120 o. G-340 from 5/8 thru 7/8 meet the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271F, Type XV, except for those provisions required of the contractor. Pear Shaped Links A-341 Alloy Steel - Quenches and Tempered. Individually Proof Tested at 2 times Working Load Limit with certification. Proof Test certification shipped with each link. Sizes 1/2, 5/8, 3/4 7/8, 1, 1-1/4 and 1/3/8 are forged. Size (A) Stock Working Load Dimensions Limit* Single Each G-341 Galv. Pull B C D F 1/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / * Based on single leg sling (in-line load), or resultant load on multiple legs with an included angle less than or equal to 120 o. Minimum Ultimate load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. ++ Welded Link. FITTINGS & BLOCKS S-643 Weldless Ring Self-Colored Forged carbon steel - Quenched and Tempered Size A (In.) S-643 Stock Working Load Limit Single Pull * Each B Dimensions C Weldless Rings meet the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR-C- 271D, Type VI, except for those provisions required of the contractor. 7/8 x /8 x 5-1/ x /8 x /4 x /8 x * Ultimate Load is 6 times the Working Load Limit.

100 98 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Crosby Shackles Side Loaded Rating Reduction Table for 3/16-3 (120 Metric Tons) Angle loads must be applied in the plane of the bow. Angle loads must be applied in the plane of the bow. In-Line 45 Degrees 90 Degrees Table 1 Side Loading Reduction Chart for Screw Pin and Bolt Type Shackles Only + Angle of Side Load from Vertical In-Line of Shackle Adjusted Working Load Limit In-Line* 100% of Rated Working Load Limit 45 0 from In-Line* 70% of Rated Working Load Limit 90 0 from In-Line* 50% of Rated Working Load Limit + In-Line Load is applied perpendicular to pin * DO NOT SIDE LOAD ROUND PIN SHACKLES For shackles larger than 125 metric tons, where the angle of the side load is greater than 5 degrees, contact Crosby Engineering. Included Angle - Shackles Never exceed 120 o included angle. Use Bolt Type and Screw Pin Shackles ONLY. Shackles symmetrically loaded with two leg slings having a maximum included angle of 120 o can be utilized to full Working Load Limit. For shackles larger than 125 metric tons, the maximum included angle is 90 o for full working load limit. Contact Crosby Engineering if included angle is greater than 90 o.

101 Crosby Screw Pin Shackles G-209/S-209 Screw Pin Anchor Shackle G-209 Screw pin anchor shackles meet the performance requirements of Federal Specifications RR-C- 271F Type IVA, Grade A, Class 2, except for those provisions required of the contractor. G-209/S-209 G-210/S-210 Screw Pin Chain Shackle G-210 Screw pin chain shackles meet the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR-C 271F Type IVB, Grade A, Class 2, except for those provisions required of the contractor. G210/S-210 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 99 Capacities 1/3 thru 55 metric tons, grade 6.. Forged - Quenched and Tempered, with alloy pins. Working Load Limit and grade 6 permanently shown on every shackle. Hot Dip galvanized or Self Colored. Fatigue Rated. Shackles 25t and larger are RFID EQUIPPED. Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to designated standards, such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other certification. Charges for proof testing and certification available when requested at the time of order. Approved for use at -40 degree C (-40 degree F) to 204 degree C (400 degree F). 2t through 25t bow and screw pin are Certified to meet charpy impact testing of 42 joules (31 ft-lbs.) minimum average at -20 degree C (-4 degree F). All shackles are Quenches and Tempered and can meet DNV impact requirements of 42 joules (31 ft. lbs.) at -20 degree C (-4 degree F). Meet or exceeds all requirements of ASME B Type Approval and certification in accordance with ABS 2006 Steel Vessel Rules , and ABS Guide for Certification of Cranes. Crosby 2t through 25t G209 anchor shackles are type approved to DNV Certification Notes Offshore Containers. These Crosby shackles are statistical proof and impact tested. The tests are conducted by Crosby and 3.1 test certification is available upon request. Look for the Red Pin... the mark of genuine Crosby quality. Nominal Working Stock Tolerance Dimensions +/- Size Load Limit Each (tons) * G-209 S-209 A B C D E F G H L M P C A 3/16 1/ /4 1/ /16 3/ / /16 1-1/ / /8 3-1/ /4 4-3/ /8 6-1/ / /8 9-1/ / /8 13-1/ / / / Nominal Size Working Load Limit (tons) * G-209 & S-209 Screw Pin Anchor Shackles G-210 & S-210 Screw Pin Chain Shackles G-210 & S-210 Screw Dimensions Pin Chain Shackles Stock Tolerance +/- Each G-210 S-210 A B C D E F G K L M G A 1/4 1/ /16 3/ / /16 1-1/ / /8 3-1/ /4 4-3/ /8 6-1/ / /8 9-1/ / /8 13-1/ / / / * Note: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. FITTINGS & BLOCKS

102 100 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Crosby Alloy Screw Pin Anchor Shackles G-209A Alloy Screw Pin Shackle Screw pin anchor shackles meet the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR- C-271DF Type IVA, Grade B, Class 2, except for those provisions required of the contractor. Nominal Shackle Size Capacities 2 thru 21 metric tons. Meets performance requirements of Grade 8 shackles. Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered, with alloy pins. Working Load Limit permanently shown on every shackle. Hot Dip Galvanized. Meet or exceed all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design, factor, proof load, and temperature requirements. Importantly, Crosby products meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to designated standards, such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other certification. Charges for proof testing and certification available when requested at the time of order. Approved for use at -40 degree C (-40 degree F) to 204 degree C (400 degree F). Working Load Limit * (tons) G-209-A Stock G-209A Alloy Screw Pin Shackles Each Dimensions Tolerance +/- A B C D E F G H L M P C A 3/ /16 2-2/ /2 3-1/ / / /8 9-1/ / / / / * Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit (metric tons) and 2.2 times the Working Load Limit (short tons). Minimum Ultimate Strength is 4.5 times the Working Load Limit for metric tons, and 5 times the Working Load Limit for short tons. For Working Load Limit reduction due to side loading applications, see section titled Safe Shackle Use. S-209T Theatrical Shackles Sizes 3/8 through 3/4. Capacities: 1 through 4-3/4 metric tonnes. Forged - Quenched and Tempered with alloy pins. Working Load Limit permanently shown on every shackle. Flat Black baked on powder coat finish. Fatigue Rated. Industry leading 6:1 design factor. Screw pin anchor shackles meet the performance requirement of Federal Specification RR-C-271F Type A, Grade A, Class 2, except for those provisions required of the contractor. Meets the performance requirements of EN 13889:2003. S-209 Theatrical Shackles Meet or exceed all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor,proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, Crosby products meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B Nominal Shackle Size Working Load Limit * (tons) S-209T Stock Each Dimensions Tolerance +/- A B C D E F G H L M P C A 3/ /16 1-1/ / /8 3-1/ /4 4-3/ * Minimum Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

103 Crosby Round Pin Shackles SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 101 G-213/S-213 Round Pin Anchor Shackle Round pin anchor shackles meet the performance requirements of Federal Specification, RR-C 271F Type IVA, Grade A, Class 1, except for those provisions required of the contractor. Nominal Size Shackles are Quenched and Tempered and can meet DNV impact requirements of 42 joules (31 ft-lbs.) at -20 degree C (-4 degree F). Working Load Limit permanently shown on every shackle. Forged - Quenched and Tempered, with alloy pins. Capacities 1/2 thru 35 metric tons. Hot Dip Galvanized or Self-Colored. Fatigue Rated. Fatigue rated. Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to designated standards, such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other certification. Charges for proof testing and certification available when requested at the time of order. Shackles 25t and larger are RFID EQUIPPED Look for the Red Pin... the mark of genuine Crosby quality. Working Load Limit (tons) * G-213 & S-213 Round Pin Anchor Shackles G-215/S-215 Round Pin Chain Shackle Round pin chain shackles meet the performance requirements of Federal Specification, RR-C 271F Type IVB, Grade A, Class 1, except for those provisions required of the contractor. Tolerance Stock Dimensions +/- Each G-213 S-213 A B C D E F G H N P C A G-213/S-213 1/4 1/ /16 3/ / /16 1-1/ / /8 3-1/ /4 4-3/ /8 6-1/ / /8 9-1/ / /8 13-1/ / / * Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. For Working Load Limit reduction due to side loading applications, see section titled Safe Shackle Use. Nominal Size Working Load Limit (tons) * G-215 & S-215 Round Pin Chain Shackles Stock Dimensions Tolerance +/- Each G-215 S-215 A B C D E F G K N G A FITTINGS & BLOCKS G-215/S-215 1/4 1/ /16 3/ / /16 1-1/ / /8 3-1/ /4 4-3/ /8 6-1/ / /8 9-1/ / /8 13-1/ / / * Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. For Working Load Limit reduction due to side loading applications, see section titled Safe Shackle Use.

104 102 Crosby Bolt Type Shackles G-2130/S-2130 Bolt Type Anchor Shackle G-2130/S-2130 Bolt Type Anchor shackles. Thin hex head bolt - nut with cotter pin. Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271F Type IVA, Grade A, Class 3, except for those provisions required of the contractors. SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Capacities 1/3 thru 150 metric tons, grade 6. Working Load Limit and grade 6 permanently shown on every shackle. Forged - Quenched and Tempered, with alloy pins. Hot Dip galvanized or Self Colored. (85, 120 and 150 metric ton shackles are all hot dip galvanized bows and the bolts and Dimetcoted and painted red). Fatigue rated (1/3t - 55t). Shackles 25t and larger are RFID EQUIPPED. Approved for use at -40 degree C (-40 degree F) to 204 degree C (400 degree F). Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B Shackles 85 metric tons and larger are individually proof tested to 2.0 times the working load limit. Shackles 120 metric tons and larger are proof tested, Magnetic Particle Inspected and provided with Serialized Pin and Bow. Type Approval and certification in accordance with ABS 2006 Steel Vessel Rules , and a BS Guide for Certification of Cranes. 3.1 Certification as standard available for charpy and statistical proof test for page 79 only up to 25 tons to DNV2.7-1 and EN Crosby 2t through 25t G2130 anchor shackles are type approved to DNV Certification Notes Offshore Containers. These Crosby shackles are statistical proof and impact tested to 42 joules (31 ft-lbs.) minimum average at -20 degree C (-4 degree F). The tests are conducted by Crosby and 3.1 test certification is available upon request. Refer to page 76 for Crosby COLD TUFF shackles that meet the additional requirements of DNV rules for certification of lifting applications - Loose Gear. All other 2130 and all 2150 shackles can meet charpy requirements of 42 joules (31 ft-lbs) average at -20 degree C (-4 degree F) upon special request. Look for the Red Pin... the mark of genuine Crosby quality. G-2150/S-2150 Bolt Type Chain Shackle G-2150/S-2150 Bolt Type Chain shackles. Thin hex head bolt - nut with cotter pin. Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271F Type IVB, Grade A, Class 3, except for those provisions required of the contractors. Nominal Size Working Load Limit (t)* Working Nominal Stock Dimensions Tolerance Load Each +/- Size Limit (t)* G-2130 S-2130 A B C D E F H L N C A 3/16 1/ /4 1/ /16 3/ / /16 1-1/ / /8 3-1/ /4 4-3/ /8 6-1/ / /8 9-1/ / /8 13-1/ / / / # /2 # # Tolerance Stock Dimensions Each +/- G-2150 S-2150 A B D F G K M P R G A 1/4 1/ /16 3/ / /16 1-1/ / /8 3-1/ /4 4-3/ /8 6-1/ / /8 9-1/ / /8 13-1/ / / / # *Note: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. + Individually proof Tested with certification. ++ Furnished in Anchor style only and furnished with Round Head Bolts with welded handles.

105 Crosby Alloy Bolt Type Shackles G-2140/S-2140 Alloy Bolt Type Anchor Shackles Nominal Shackle Size Working Load Limit (tons)* SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 103 Quenched and Tempered. Alloy bows, Alloy bolts. Forged Alloy Steel 30 thru 200 metric tons and Cast Alloy Steel 250 thru 400 metric tons. Meets performance requirements of grade 8 shackles. Working Load Limit is permanently shown on every shackle. 30, 40, 55 and 85 metric ton shackle bows are available galvanized or self colored with pins that are galvanized and painted red. 120, 150 and 175 metric ton shackle bows are hotdip galvanized; pins are Dimetcoted and painted red. 200, 250, 300 and 400 metric ton shackle bows are Dimetcoted ; and painted red. All sizes are RFID EQUIPPED. Approved for use at -40 degree C (-40 degree F) to 204 degree C (400 degree F). Shackles are Quenches and Tempered and can meet DNV impact requirements of 42 joules (31 ft-lbs.) at -20 degree C (-4 degree F). All sizes are individually proof tested to 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Check with your sales representative for Crosby COLD TUFF shackles that meet the additional requirements of DNV rules for certification of G-2140 & S-2140 Crosby Alloy Bolt Type Shackles Stock G-2140 S-2140 Each A B C Tolerance +/- D +/-.02 lifting applications - Loose Gear. Shackles 200 metric tons and larger are provided as follows. - Serialized Pin and Bow - Material Certification (Chemical) - Magnetic Particle Inspected - Certification must be requested at time of order Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these shackles meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B Type Approval and certification in accordance with ABS 2006 Steel Vessel Rules , and ABS Guide for Certification of Cranes. Look for the Red Pin... the mark of genuine Crosby quality. Dimensions Nominal Working Tolerance Shackle Load Stock Dimensions Each Size Limit +/- (tons)* G-2140E S-2140E A B C D +/-.02 E F G H J K L M A E 4-3/4 # ** # ** # E F G H J K L A E 1-1/ / / /2 # # ** # *Note: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit on 200 through 400 metric Tons. For sizes 30 through 175 metric Tons, Minimum Ultimate Load is 5.4 times the Working Load Limit. ** Cast Alloy Steel. # Furnished with Round Head Bolts with an eye bolt for handling. FITTINGS & BLOCKS Crosby Alloy Easy-Loc Shackles G-2140E & S-2140E Crosby Alloy Easy-Loc Shackles G-2140E

106 104 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Crosby Hoist Hooks S-320 & S-320N Eye Hooks S-320 S-320N All Crosby 320 Eye Hoist Hooks incorporate the following features: The most complete line of Eye hoist hooks. Available in carbon steel and alloy steel. Designed with a 5:1 Design Factor for (Carbon Steel); 4:5:1 Design Factor for 30t - 60t (Alloy Steel). Eye hooks are load rated. Proper design, careful forging and precision controlled quenched and tempering give maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk. Every Crosby Eye Hook has a pre-drilled cam which can be equipped with a latch. Even years after purchase of the original hook, latch assemblies can be added. Chemical analysis and tensile tests performed on each PIC to verify chemistry and mechanical properties. Type Approval and certification in accordance with ABS 2007 Steel Vessel Rules , and ABS Guide for Certification of Cranes. Hoists hooks incorporate two types of strategically placed markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK features: Deformation Indicators and Angle Indicators. The following additional features have been incorporated in the new Crosby S-320N Eye Hoist Hooks. (Sizes 3/4 metric ton Carbon through 22 metric ton Alloy.) Metric Rated at 5:1 Design Factor for (Carbon Steel); 5:1 Design Factor for 1t - 22 (Alloy Steel). Can be proof tested to 2 times the working Load Limit. Low profile hook tip. New integrated latch (S-4320) meets the World class standard for lifting. - Heavy duty stamped latch interlocks with the hook tip. - High cycle, long life spring. - When secured with proper cotter pin through the hold in the tip of hook, meets the intent of OSHA Rule (g) and (g) for personnel hoisting. Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles. Working Load Limit (t) Eye Hook Stock Replacement Latch Kits Carbon Alloy Hook ID Code Each Carbon S.C. Carbon Galv Alloy S.C. S-4320 PL SS-4055 S-320C/S-320CN G-320N S-320-A/S-320AN Stock Stock Stock.75 1 #D #F #G #H #I #J #K #L #N O P S T * Eye Hooks (3/4 TC - 22 TA), Proof load is 2 times Working Load Limit. Eye Hooks (20 TC - 60 TA). All carbon hooks - average straightening load (Ultimate Load) is 5 times Working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 1 ton through 22 ton - average straightening load (Ultimate Load) is 5 times Working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 30 tons through 60 tons - average straightening load (Ultimate Load) is 4.5 times Working Load Limit. # New 320N style hook.

107 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 105 Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC- CHECK features. Deformation Indicators - Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook tip, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. To check, use a measuring device (i.e., tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage. S-320CN Angle Indicators - Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two sling legs. FITTINGS & BLOCKS S320 HOOK SPECIFICATIONS Hook ID* Code Dimensions C D F G J K M N O # O2## Q T# T2## AA D F G H I J K L N O P S T * Eye Hooks (3/4 TC-22TA), Proof load is 2 times Working Load Limit. Eye Hooks (20TC-60TA). All carbon hooks - average straightening load (Ultimate Load) is 5 times Working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 1t through 22t - average straightening load (Ultimate Load) is 5 times Working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 30t through 60t - average straightening load (Ultimate Load) is 4.5 times Working Load Limit. # 3/4tC - 22tA dimensions shown are for S-4320 Latch Kits. Dimensions for sizes 20t carbon and larger are for PL Latch Kits. ## Dimensions are for PL-N Latch Kits.

108 106 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Crosby Swivel Hooks S-322CN/S-322AN (L-322 AN Shown) Forged - Quenches and Tempered. Swivel hooks are load rated. Proper design, careful forging, and precision controlled quench and tempering gives maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk. Low profile hook tip designed to utilize Crosby S-4320 or PL-N latch kit. Even years after purchase of the original hook, latch assemblies can be added. Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK features:- Deformation Indicators & Angle Indicators. Deformation Indicators - Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook tip, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. Angle Indicators - Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two sling legs. Type Approval and certification in accordance with ABS 2007 Steel Vessel Rules , and ABS Guide for Certification of Cranes. This hook is a positioning device and is not intended to rotate under load. Use in corrosive environment requires shank and nut inspection in accordance with ASME B (b)(5)(c) Working Load Limit* (tons) S-322CN Stock S-322AN Stock Each Dimensions 322C 322A A B C D F G H J K L M O+ R S AA Rep. Latch Stock 3/ / / / *Note: Carbon swivel hooks.75tc-15tc: proof load is 2 times working load limit. Designed with a 5 to 1 design factor. Alloy swivel hooks 1tA-22A: proof load is 2.5 times working load limit. Designed with a 4.5 to 1 design factor. Alloy swivel hook 30tA: proof load is 2 times working load limit. Designed with a 4 to 1 design factor. + Dimensions for hooks 3 4t carbon thru 22t alloy are for S-4320 latch kits. Dimensions for hooks 31.5t alloy are for PL Latch Kit. Working Load Limit (tons)* L-322 CN Stock L-322 AN Stock Each Dimensions Rep. Latch Stock Carbon Alloy A B C D F G H J K L M O+ R S AA 3/ / / / *Note: Carbon swivel hooks.75tc-15tc: proof load is 2 times working load limit. Designed with a 5 to 1 design factor. Alloy swivel hooks 1A-22A: proof load is 2.5 times working load limit. Designed with a 4.5 to 1 design factor. Alloy swivel hook 30tA: proof load is 2 times working load limit. Designed with a 4 to 1 design factor. + Dimensions for hooks 3 /4t carbon thru 22t alloy are for S-4320 latch kits. Dimensions for hooks 31.5t alloy for PL latch kit.

109 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 107 S-3322B Swivel Hooks with Bearing New anti-friction bearing design allows hook to rotate freely under load. Capacity ranging from 2 through 15 metric tonnes. Forged - Quenched and Tempered. Proper design, careful forging, and precision controlled quench and tempering gives maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk. Low profile hook tip designed to utilize Crosby S-4320 or PL-N latch kit. Simply purchase the latch assemblies listed and shown. Even years after purchase of the original hook, latch assemblies can be added. S-3322 hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which addresses two (2) QUIC-CHECK features: - Deformation Indicators - Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook tip, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. - Angle Indicators - Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles two sling legs. FITTINGS & BLOCKS For other swivel hooks designed to rotate under load, contact a Crosby Engineer. Use in corrosive environment requires shank and nut inspection in accordance with ASME B (b)(5)(c) Working Load Limit (tons) S-3322B Stock L-3322B Stock + Each Dimensions A B C D F G H J K L M O R S AA Rep. Latch Stock * Note: Proof load is 2.5 times working load limit. Designed with a 4.5 to 1 design factor. + Supplied with latch attached.

110 108 Crosby SHUR-LOC Hooks SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS S1316 Hook All SHUR-LOC hooks have the following features: Forged Alloy Steel - Aquenches and Tempered. Recessed trigger design is flush with the hook body, protecting the trigger from potential damage. - Easy to operate with enlarged thumb access. Positive Lock Latch is Self-Locking when hook is loaded. The SHUR-LOC hook, if properly installed and locked, can be used for personnel lifting applications and meets the intent of OSHA Rule (g)(1)(i)(A) and (g)(4) (iv)(b). Eye Style incorporates these added features: Individually Proof Tested to 2-1/2 times the 4:1 Working Load Limit with certification. Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles. 25% stronger than grade 80. Suitable for use with Grade 100 and grade 80 chain. Designed with Engineered Flat to connect to S-1325 chain coupler. S1318 Hook SHUR-LOC Hook Series with Positive Locking Latch S-1316 Eye Hook Chain (mm) Working Load Limit * Wire Rope XXIP IWRC Mechanical Splice S-1316 Stock Size Working Load Limit 5:1 Each Dimensions A C D E F H J L AA / /4-5/ / / / / / / / / / / * Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. S-1318A SHUR-LOC Shank Hooks Chain Size S-1318A Frame Grade 100 Dimensions (mm) Stock Code Alloy Chain Working Load Limit * A+ B C D E F G J L AA Each D / G /16 3/ H / I / J * Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Limit based on Grade 100 chain. # Dimension before machining (as forged).

111 Crosby SHUR-LOC Swivel Hooks SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 109 Forged Alloy Steel - Quenches and Tempered. Individually Proof Tested at 2-1/2 times the 4:1 Working Load Limit with certification. Recessed trigger design is flush with the hook body, protecting the trigger from potential damage. - Easy to operate with enlarged thumb access. Positive Lock Latch is Self-Locking when hook is loaded. Rated for both Wire Rope and use with Grade 80/100 Chain. G-414 Heavy Thimble should be used with wire rope slings. Trigger repair Kit available (S-4316). Consists of spring, roll pin and trigger. S Swivel Hook utilizes anti-friction bearing design which allows hook to rotate freely under load. Fatigue rated. The SHUR-LOC hook, if properly installed and locked, can be used for personnel lifting applications and meets the intent of OSHA Rule (g)(1) (i)(a) and (g)(4)(iv)(B). Look for the Platinum Color - Crosby Grade 100 Alloy Products. FITTINGS & BLOCKS Chain Size (mm) Grade 100 Alloy Chain Working Load Limit 4:1* Wire Rope XXIP IWRC Mechanical Splice S-1326 Working Load Limit 5:1* Stock Each Dimensions A B C D E F H J L AA /4-5/ / / / / / Suitable for infrequent, non-continuous rotation under load. * Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. Chain Size (mm) Grade 100 Alloy Chain Working Load Limit 4:1* Wire Rope XXIP IWRC Mechanical Splice Working Load Limit 5:1* S Stock S-1326 Shur-Loc Swivel Hooks S Shur-Loc Swivel Hooks with Bearing Each Dimensions A B C D E F H J L AA /4-5/ / / / Suitable for frequent rotation under load. * Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. Use in corrosive environment requires shank and nut inspection in accordance with ASME B (b)(5)(c) 2009.

112 110 Crosby Shank Hooks S-319 S-319N SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS The most complete line of shank hoist hooks. Available 3/4 to 300 metric tons. Hook Identification code forged into each hook. Quenches and Tempered. Available in carbon steel, alloy steel and bronze. Proper design, careful forging, and precision controlled quench and tempering give maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk. Every Crosby Shank Hook has a pre-drilled cam which can be equipped with a latch. Simply purchase the latch assemblies. Even years after purchase of the original hook, latch assemblies can be added. Type Approval and certification in accordance with ABS 2006 Steel Vessel Rules , and ABS Guide for Certification of Cranes. Patented McKissick Split-Nut retention system available. Working Load Limit (tons)* Hook ID Shank Hooks Stock Carbon Alloy Bronze Code Carbon Alloy Bronze S-319C & S-319A S-19BN S-319N & 319AN Shank Length ++ Each S-4320 Stock # Rep. Latch Kits PL Stock # SS-4055 Stock # 3/4 1.5 #D Std #F Std /2 2 1 #G Std #H Std #I Std #J Std / #K Std #L Std #N Std O Std O Long P Std P Long S Std S Long T Std T Long U Std U Long W Std W Long X Std Y Std Z Std *Note: Proof load is 2 times Working Load Limit. All carbon hooks designed with a 5/1 design factor. All alloy hooks 1-22t designed with a 4.5 /1 design factor. All alloy hooks 30t and larger designed with a 4 /1 design factor. All bronze hooks designed with a 4/ 1 design factor. + New 319N style hook. ++ See column Y on following page for actual length. Hoist hooks incorporated markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK features. - Deformation Indicators - Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook tip, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. To check, use a measuring device (i.e., tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage. - Angle Indicators - Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two sling legs. - Chemical analysis and tensile tests performed on each PIC to verify chemistry and mechanical properties. Rough as forged dimension. Shank will not machine to this dimension. + 3 /4tC - 22tA dimensions shown are for S-4320 Latch Kits. Dimensions for sizes 20 ton carbon and larger are for PL Latch Kits. ++ Dimensions are for PL-N Latch Kits. For the purpose of calculating D / d ratio, utilize dimension M. Trademark indicates QUIC-CHECK product. Hook Material Codes: A-Alloy Steel, B-Bronze High Strength, C-Carbon Steel. Hook Dimensions ID Code D F G H J K L M O O2 P R T T2++ X Y Z AA ++ D F G H I J K L N O O P P S S T T U U W W X Y Z

113 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 111 Crosby Gate Hooks Hook Connectors The six (6) connector styles shown below make it possible for Crosby to furnish a Golden Gate Hook to fit almost any make or model of hoisting equipment including American Engineering Lo-Hed, ARO, Coffing, Electro Lift, Ingersoll-Rand, P & H, Robbins and Myers, Shepard Niles, CM, Shaw-Box, Wright, Yale & Towne. CLOSED SWIVEL BAIL SHANK-TYPE HOOK - Standard Length SHANK -TYPE HOOK - Long Length For use where hoisting line or shackle can be inserted into the bail. Suitable for infrequent, non continuous rotation under load. Hook sizes: 1 through 14. For use on existing load blocks, with standard shank length. Hook sizes: 2 through 14. For use on existing load blocks requiring extra shank length. Hook sizes: 4 through 17. Style A - Manual-Closing Gate Style C - Self-Closing Gate Style B - Manual-Closing Gate Style D - Self-Closing Gate Style I - Manual -Closing Gate Style K - Self-Closing Gate FITTINGS & BLOCKS UNIVERSAL TYPE LINK CHAIN NEST ROLLER CHAIN NEST Open swivel bail for attachment to link chain. Suitable for infrequent, non continuous rotation under load. Hook sizes: 3, 4 and 5. With ball-bearing swivel; attaches to chain by an alloy pin. Suitable for frequent rotation under load. Hook sizes: 4, 5 and 7. Attachment with ball-bearing swivel and full-floating connector. Suitable for frequent rotation under load. Hook sizes: 4, 5 and 6. Style G - Manual-Closing Gate Style E - Self-Closing Gate Style P - Manual-Closing Gate Style O - Self-Closing Gate Style R - Manual-Closing Gate Style S - Self-Closing Gate Letter designations shown beneath each illustration above indicate BOTH connector style and gate type. Each connector is available with either a self-closing or manual-closing gate. (e.g.: A size 4 hook with a closed swivel bail connector and self-closing gate is 4-C; with manual-closing gate, it is 4-A.)

114 112 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Warnings and Application Instructions S-3319 S-319 S-320 S-322 S-3322B Series Series Series Series Series Positioning Only Positioning Only QUIC-CHECK Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK features: Deformation Indicators - Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook tip, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. To check, use a measuring device (i.e., tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage. Angle Indicator - Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two sling legs. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION READ AND FOLLOW A visual periodic inspection for cracks, nicks, wear, gouges and deformation as part of a comprehensive documented inspection program, should be conducted by trained personnel in compliance with the schedule in ANSI B For hooks used in frequent load cycles or pulsating loads, the hook and threads should be periodically inspected by Magnetic Particle or Dye Penetrant. (Note: Some disassembly may be required.) Never use a hook whose throat opening has been increased, or whose tip has been bent more than 10 degrees out of plane from the hook body, or is in any other way distorted or bent. Note: A latch will not work properly on a hook with a bent or worn tip. Never use a hook that is worn beyond the limits shown in Figure 1. Remove from service any hook with a crack, nick, or gouge. Hooks with a nick or gouge shall be repaired by grinding lengthwise, following the contour of the hook, provided that the reduced dimension is within the limits shown in Figure 1. Contact Crosby Engineering to evaluate any crack. Never repair, alter, rework, or reshape a hook by welding, heating, burning or bending. Never side load, back load, or tip load a hook. (Side loading, back loading and tip loading are conditions that damage and reduce the capacity of the hook.) (See Figure 2.) Eye hooks, shank hooks and swivel hooks are designed to be used with wire rope or chain. Efficiency of assembly may be reduced when used with synthetic material. Do not swivel the S-322, S-3316, ors-3319 swivel hooks while supporting a load. These hooks are distinguishable by hex nuts and flat washers. The S-3322 swivel hook is designed to rotate under load. The S-3322 is distinguishable from the S-322 by use of a round nut designed to shield bearing. The frequency of bearing lubrication on the S-3322 depends upon frequency and period of product use as well as environmental conditions, which are contingent upon the user s good judgement. The use of a latch may be mandatory by regulations or safety codes; e.g., OSHA, MSHA, ANSI/ASME B30, Insurance, etc.. (Note: When using latches, see instructions in Understanding: The Crosby group Warnings for further information.) Always make sure the hook supports the load. (See Figure 3). The latch must never support the load (See Figure 4). When placing two (2) sling legs in hook, make sure the angle from the vertical to the outermost leg is not greater than 45 degrees, and the included angle between the legs does not exceed 90 degrees* (See Figure 5). See ANSI/ASME B30.10 Hooks for additional information. Loads may disengage from hook if proper procedures are not followed. A falling load may cause serious injury or death. See OSHA Rule (g)(1)(i)(A) and (g)(4)(iv)(B) for personnel hoisting by cranes or derricks, and OSHA Directive CPL Interim Inspection Procedures During Communication. Tower Construction Activities. A Crosby 319, 320, or 322 hook with a PL Latch attached and secured with a bolt, nut and cotter pin (or toggle pin) may be used for lifting personnel. A Crosby 319N, 320N or 322N hook with a S-4320 latch attached and secured with cotter pin or bolt, nut and pin; or a PL-N latch attached and secured with toggle pin may be used for lifting personnel. A hook with a Crosby SS-4055 latch attached shall NOT be used for personnel lifting. See OSHA Directive CPL Crosby does not recommend the placement of lanyards directly into the positive locking Crosby hook when hoisting personnel. Crosby requires that all suspension systems (vertical lifelines/lanyards) shall be gathered at the positive locked load hook by use of a master link, or a bolt-type shackle secured with cotter pin. Threads may corrode and/or strip and drop the load. Remove securement nut to inspect or to replace S-322, S-3316 and S3319 bearing washers (2). Hook must always support the load. The load must never be supported by the latch. Never apply more force than the hook s assigned Working Load Limit (WLL) rating. Read and understand these instructions before using hook. Figure 1 Zone A: Repair Not Required Zone B: 10% of Original Dimension Zone C: 5% of Original Dimension Zone D: Consult Minimum Thread Chart 2009 Crosby Catalog p Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 RIGHT WRONG RIGHT * For two legged slings with angles greater than 90 degrees, use an intermediate link such as a master link or bolt type shackle to collect the legs of the slings. The intermediate link can be placed over the hook to provide an in-line load on the hook. This approach must also be used when using slings with three or more legs.

115 SS-4055 Safety Latches SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 113 SS-4055 Latch Kits Stainless steel construction with cadmium plated steelnuts. Shipped packaged and unassembled. Instructions included for easy field assembly. Read and Understand latch kit package before installing. These latches will not work on new N Style Hooks. Use with old style hook. Review the Warning and Application Information on page 114 (except Step 7). LATCH ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Specify latch kit stock number. 2. Specify capacity of hook to which latch will be assembled. 3. Specify hook material (carbon or alloy). Hook Size (t) Hook SS-4055 Dimensions Carbon Alloy Bronze ID Stock Each Code A B C D 3/4 1.5 D /2.6 F / G/H /2 2.0 I J / K/L N O P/S T FITTINGS & BLOCKS Universal Hook Latch PRODUCT FEATURES: Keeps fingers out of danger zones. Keeps load on bottom hook when load is slack. Keeps top hook on ring, hook or trolley. Can be installed on any hook in minutes with only simple tools. Meets requirements: Sec (a)(29) OSHA. Specifications Hook Dimensions Model Neck (N) Throat (T) A 9/16 to 5/8 1-1/16 to 1-1/8 B 3/4 to 13/16 1-1/4 C 7/8 to 1 1-3/8 to 1-1/2 D 1-1/8 to 1-1/4 1-3/4 to 1-7/8 E 1-3/8 to 1-1/2 2-1/16 F 1-5/8 to 1-11/16 2-1/4 G 1-3/4 to 1-13/16 2-1/2 H 1-7/8 to 2 3 J 2-1/16 to 2-1/8 3-3/8 K 2-3/16 to 2-1/4 3-1/2 L 2-5/16 to 2-3/8 3-3/4 M 2-7/16 to 2-3/4 4 O 3 to 3-1/4 4-1/2

116 114 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Crosby Hook Latch Kit S-4320 Latch Kits Heavy duty stamped latch interlocks with the hook tip. High cycle, long life spring. Can be made into a Positive Locking Hook when proper cotter pin is utilized. Latch kits shipped unassembled and individually packaged with instructions. Meets the intent of OSHA Rule (g) of (g)(when secured with the bolt, nut and pin) for lifting personnel. NOTE: The new S-4320 Latch Kit will not fit the old style 319, 320, and 322 hooks. S-4320 Replacement Latch Kit (For New 319N, and 320N, 322N and 339N and New 1327 and 1339 Hooks) Hook Size (t) Dimensions S-4320 SS-4320 Hook ID Code Stock Stock Each Carbon Alloy Bronze * B D E 3/4 1.5 D /2.6 F /2 2 1 G H I J / K L N * SS-4320 is Stainless Steel construction with cad plated steel nuts.

117 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 115 S-4320 HOOK LATCH KIT (For Crosby 319N, 320N, 322N, S-1327, A1339 Hooks) WARNINGS & APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS Important Safety Information - Read & Follow Always inspect hook and latch before using. Never use a latch that is distorted or bent. Always make sure spring will force the latch against the tip of the hook. Always make sure hook supports the load. The latch must never support the load. (See figure 1&2). When placing two (2) sling legs in hook, make sure the angle between the legs is less than 90 o and if the hook or load is tilted, nothing bears against the bottom of this latch. (See figure 3&4). Latches are intended to retain loose sling or devices under slack conditions. Latches are not intended to be an anti-fouling device. When using a latch for personnel lifting, select proper cotter pin (See figure 5). See Step 7 below for proper installation instructions. Never reuse a bent cotter pin. Never use a cotter pin with a smaller diameter or different length than recommended in Figure 5. Never use a nail, a welding rod, wire, etc., in place of a recommended cotter pin. Always ensure cotter pin is bent so as not to interfere with sling operation. Periodically inspect cotter pin for corrosion and general adequacy. Loads may disengage from hook if proper procedures are not followed. A falling load may cause serious injury or death. Hook must always support the load. The load must never be supported by the latch. See OSHA rule (g)(1)(i)(A) and (g)(4) (iv)(b) for personnel hoisting by crane or Derricks. A Crosby S-319N, S-320N, S-322N, S-1327, A-1339 Hook with an S-4320 latch attached (when secured with cotter pin) may be used for lifting personnel. An S-4320 Latch is only to be used with a Crosby S-319N, S-320N, S-322N, S-1327 and A-1339 Hook. DO NOT use this latch in applications requiring non-sparking. Read and understand these instructions before using hook and latch. Hook Identification Recommended Cotter Pin Dimensions Code Diameter Length D 1/8 3/4 F 1/8 3/4 G 1/8 1 H 3/16 1-1/4 I 1/4 1-1/2 J 5/16 2 K 5/16 2 L 3/8 3 N 3/8 3 # The current SS-4055 latch kit and the PL latch will not fit new 319N, 320N, or 322N hooks. They will continue to be offered in both styles to service existing hooks. Important - The new S4320 latch kit will not fit the old 319, 320 or 322 hooks. FITTINGS & BLOCKS IMPORTANT - Instructions for Assembling S-4320 Latch on Crosby 320N Hooks Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Steps 4, 5, & 6 Place hook at approximately Position coils of spring Position latch to side of 4. Line up holes in latch a 45 degree angle with the over cam with legs of hook points. Slide latch with hook cam. cam up. spring pointing toward onto spring legs between 5. Insert bolt through point of hook and loop of lock plate and latch body spring positioned down latch, spring, and cam. until latch is partially over and lying against the hook cam. Then depress 6. Tighten self-locking hook. latch and spring until latch nut on one end of bolt. clears point of hook. Step 7 For Personnel Lifting With latch in closed position and rigging resting in bowl of hook, insert cotter pin through hook tip and secure by bending prongs.

118 116 Positive Flapper Latch Kits PL Latch Kit SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Hot Dipped Galvanized. Heavy duty latch with easy operating features. Flapper lever indicates locked or unlocked position. Assembly instructions included with each latch. For additional dimensional data on eye, shank or swivel hooks refer to previous pages in this section. Meets the intent of OSHA Rule (g) and (g) (when secured with the bolt, nut, and pin) for lifting personnel. Hook size (tons) Hook Dimensions PL Latch Kit ID Stock Each Carbon Alloy Code A B C D E F 3 4-1/2 #I #J /2 11 #K #L #N O P S T U W - X Y Z # New 319N style hook. LATCH ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Specify PL latch kit stock number from chart. 2. Specify capacity of hook to which latch will be assembled. PL-N/O Latch Kits Heavy Duty latch with easy operating features. PL-N designed for Crosby 319N & 320N hooks, PL-O designed for Crosby 319 & 320 old style hooks. Flapper lever indicates locked or unlocked position. Assembly instructions included with each latch. For additional dimensional data on eye, shank or swivel hooks refer to previous pages in this section. Meets the intent of OSHA Rule (g) and (g)(when secured with the supplied toggle pin) for lifting personnel. 3. Specify hook material (carbon or alloy). PL-N/O Latch Kits Hook Size (tons) Hook PL-N PL-O Dimension ID Stock Stock Each Carbon Alloy Code A B C D E F 3 4.5/5* I J /2 11 K L N * N style hooks are rated at 5 tonnes. The PL latch will not work on 319N, 320N, or 322N Hooks. The PL-N/O Latches, in the sizes available, will work on both the old style and new style hooks.

119 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 117 Specialty Forged Hooks Crosby A378 Sorting Hook Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered. Deep straight throat permits efficient handling of flat plates or large cylindrical shapes. Working Load Limit at tip of Hook (tons) Working Load Limit at bottom of Hook (tons)* A-378 Sorting Hook Specifications A-378 Stock Style Each I.D. of Eye Overall Length Dimensions Opening at tip of Hook Radius at bottom of Hook 2 7-1/ No Handle / With Handle * Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. Newco Pipe Hooks Newco Pipe Hooks are designed to ease the job of handling pipe. They speed up loading or unloading of pipe sections, or the moving of pipe. For handling pipe with ease, select the pipe hook best suited to your need from these six sizes. Federal stock number, FSN FITTINGS & BLOCKS Minimum Horizontal Angle of 30 Degrees No. 2 - Equipped with soft brass inserts to prevent damaging thin wall gas or oil pipe. No. 3 - Same as No. 2 with a longer throat opening. Has brass insert. No.4-Aflame cut 3/4 steel plate hook adaptable for lifting jobs requiring a wide throat opening. No. 5 - A wide bearing surface pipe hook with a scuff resistant plastic insert for protecting epoxy lined pipe. No A versatile multi-purpose pipe hook for lighter lifting jobs. No Same as No. 5 with a 8-1/2 wide bearing surface and plastic insert. Note: Working loads shown in table are based on slings using two pipe hooks. All Newco Pipe Hooks are equipped with handles for ease of handling. Warning: The angle of each sling leg should be carefully checked with each usage to prevent overloading. Stock Dimensions & Data A B C Rope Size in WLL PH-2 1-1/ /4 3/8-5/ /2 PH-3 1-1/ /4 3/8-5/ /2 PH-4 1-3/ /2 3/ PH-5 1-1/4 7/8 5-1/2 3/8-5/ PH /16 2-1/2 4-1/4 3/8-1/ /2 PH /4 7/8 5-1/2 3/8-5/

120 118 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Crosby A350N Choker Hooks New style incorporated throat opening equal to or larger than old style hooks. Each product has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability, along with a Working Load Limit, and the name Crosby or CG forged into it. All hooks incorporate Crosby s patented QUIC-CHECK marks to help in determining if throat opening dimension has changed. Each hook can be equipped with a Crosby S-4320 heavy duty stamped latch with the high cycle, long life spring. Forged Alloy Steel -- Quenched and Tempered. Design Factor of 5:1 Single Part Rope Size Eight Part Rope Size A-350 Stock S.C. A-350L Stock Each Dimensions A B C D E F G H L P R Hook Frame Code Replacement Latch Kit 3/ D /2 1/ F / G /8 3/ G / H /4 1/ H / I * Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit Determine EYE Diameter C, before ordering. 7/8-1 is Cast Steel and furnished with latch attached. Dual Choker Hook The Dual Choker Hooks are adapted for endless slings in choker hitch applications. Ideal for moving round billets and pipe when choker type slings are desired. Dimensions & Data Stock Rope Size A B C D E F G H J K WLL DCH-4 3/16-1/4 1-1/4 2-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/8 1-1/4 7/32 3/8 3/8 7/ DCH-6 3/8-7/16 2-1/2 4-1/4 2-3/16 2-1/4 2-3/8 7/16 5/8 9/16 7/8 2-1/ DCH-8 1/2-5/8 2-3/4 4-7/8 2-1/2 2-7/8 2-1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1-1/8 2-1/ DCH-12 3/4 3-1/2 5-3/ /2 2-7/8 3/ /4 3-1/ DCH-14 7/ / /4 4-5/8 3-1/2 7/8 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-3/8 3-5/ DCH /8-1-1/4 5-1/4 9-1/ /8 1-1/2 1-1/ / Roll Off Hooks Part : ROH-28 For Roll-Off Containers Alloy steel for strength and durability Heavy Duty Design For 7/8 Wire Rope 17,000 lb. working load limit Use with Standard NB-28 or TB-28 Swage Button DO NOT exceed stated working load limit of wire rope.

121 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 119 Slip-Thru Thimbles Ears can be peened over to retain wire rope. High strength casting. Designed to resist elongation from loading. Can come cut to bend around a master link. Stock Dimensions Single Part 6PTS 8PTS Rope Size A B C D E F ST-10 5/16-3/8 1/8 3/ ST-16 1/2-9/16 3/16 3/ ST-20 5/8-3/4 1/4-5/16 1/ ST-24 7/8-1 3/8 5/16 3-3/4 7-1/8 9-3/8 6-1/4 1-1/8 1-5/8 ST /8-1-1/4 7/16 3/8 4-3/8 8-3/ /8 1-3/8 1-7/16 ST /8-1-1/2 1/ / /2 12-1/2 8-1/8 1-5/8 2-1/8 ST /8-1- 3/4 5/8 9/16 6-3/4 11-3/4 14-3/4 9-3/8 1-13/16 2-9/16 ST /8-2 3/4 5/ /2 19-1/ /8 3-1/4 ST /8-2-1/4 7/8-1 3/4 8-1/2 15-1/2 20-3/ /2 3-3/4 ST / /8 7/ /2 24-3/4 15-3/4 3-3/ /16 FITTINGS & BLOCKS Combination Clamp and Thimble The Newco Combination Clamp and Thimble provides a simple, efficient wire rope coupling which derives its extraordinary holding power from its basic design. Properly assembled and torqued, this clamp develops 70 to 75 percent of catalog listing of wire rope strength. Recommend usage with 6 strand right lay wire rope only. Efficiencies are based upon extra improved plow steel wire rope. See working load limit on chart below. Rugged construction-made to give longer service reduces down time. Dimensions & Data Stock Rope Diameter A B C D E s & Sizes of Bolts Torque Measure WLL CCT-4 1/8 2-1/2 1-1/16 1-1/8 9/16 5/16 2-1/4 x 3/4 8 Ft.-Lbs CCT-6 3/16 2-7/8 1-11/32 1-3/16 21/32 3/8 2-1/4 x 1 12 Ft.-Lbs CCT-8 1/4 3-3/4 1-3/4 1-7/16 7/8 1/2 2-5/16 x 1-1/4 19 Ft.-Lbs ,000 CCT-10 5/16 4-5/8 2-1/8 1-9/16 1-1/16 5/8 2-5/16 x 1-1/2 19 Ft.-Lbs ,600 CCT-12 3/8 5-3/8 2-7/16 1-7/8 1-1/4 15/16 2-3/8 x 1-3/4 40 Ft.-Lbs ,200 CCT-14 7/16 6-1/2 2-15/32 2-1/4 1-7/ /16 x 2 80 Ft.-Lbs ,000 CCT-16 1/2 7-1/8 3-13/ / / /2 x 2 90 Ft.-Lbs ,000 CCT-18 9/ /4 2-5/8 1-7/8 1-1/8 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 90 Ft.-Lbs ,000 CCT-20 5/8 8-1/4 4-1/4 2-3/ /8 2-5/8 x 2-1/2 130 Ft.-Lbs ,000 CCT-24 3/4 11-5/ /16 2-1/2 1-3/8 4-5/8 x Ft.-Lbs ,800 CCT-28 7/8 13-3/16 5-7/8 3-3/8 2-7/8 1-9/16 4-5/8 x 3-1/2 140 Ft.-Lbs ,000 CCT /4 6-5/8 3-13/16 3-1/4 1-13/16 4-3/4 x 3-1/2 150 Ft.-Lbs ,500

122 120 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Wire Rope Thimbles G-414 Heavy Duty Thimble Available in Hot Dip Galvanized or Stainless Steel. Stainless Steel recommended for more corrosive environments where greater protection is required. Greater protection against wear and deformation of the wire rope eye. Longer service life. G414 Extra Heavy Wire Rope Thimbles G-414 meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-T-276b Type III, except for those provisions required of the contractor. Rope Diameter (mm) Stock G-414 Stock SS-414 Stainless Per 100 Dimensions A B C D E F G H *1/ *5/ *3/ / *1/2-9/ *5/ *3/ / /8-1- 1/ /4-1- 3/ /8-1- 1/ / / / / * SS-414 sizes available in stainless steel type 304. G-414SL Heavy Duty Shackle-Loc Thimble Prevents the shackle from being removed and replaced in the field, which could compromise the certified integrity of the sling assembly. Available in Hot Dip galvanized. Crosby s shackle locking thimbles are galvanized after the welding of the wedge has been completed. Greater protection against wear and deformation of the wire rope eye. Longer service life. Extra Heavy Wire Rope Thimbles (Shackle-Loc) Rope Diameter Stock Dimensions (mm) G-414SL Stock Per 100 A B C D E F G H J 3/ /2-9/ / / / G-414SL meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-T-276b Type III, except for those provisions required of the contractor. 1-1/8-1-1/ /8-1-1/

123 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 121 G-411 Standard Wire Rope Thimble The standard choice for light duty applications and loading conditions. Hot Dip galvanized steel. Rope Dia. G-411 Stock Galv. Per 100 Dimensions A B C D E F G H 1/ / / / / / / / / /8-1-1/ G-411 meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-T-276b Type II, except for those provisions required of the contractor. FITTINGS & BLOCKS S-412 Solid Wire Rope Thimbles Fits pin for open wire rope socket, boom pendant clevis and wedge socket. Cast Ductile Iron. Rope Diameter S-412 Stock S.C. Each Dimensions A B C D E F G H J K L 1/ / / / / /4-1-3/ Cast Ductile Iron

124 122 Sling Saddle SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Bottom Saddle ( B ) Top Saddle ( T ) Newco Sling Saddles (type B and type T) will protect wire rope slings from being cut or severely damaged when rigged around square corner loads, and will aid in protecting the loads themselves. These can be moved or adjusted by hand for various sizes of loads, and are made from a manganese bronze alloy. Type B - Bottom Rope Size A B C D E F G X RSP-5B 3/8 2-1/8 3 7/8 7/16 1-3/16 7/16 1-1/ /2 RSP-5.5B 1/2 3-1/16 4-1/2 1-3/16 5/8 1-5/8 5/8 1-7/ /2 RSP-6B 5/8 3-7/ /16 3/4 1-3/4 3/ /4 RSP-7B 3/4 4-9/32 6-1/4 1-1/2 15/16 2-3/16 15/16 2-5/ RSP-9B 7/8 &1 5-1/8 7-3/8 1-3/4 1-1/8 2-5/8 1-1/8 3-1/ RSP-10B 1-1/8 & 1-1/4 6-1/ /8 1-3/8 3-1/8 1-5/16 3-3/ RSP-12B 1-3/8 & 1-1/2 6-7/8 10-1/4 2-3/8 1-11/16 3-1/2 1-5/8 4-1/ Type T- Top Rope Size A B C D E F G H RSP-5T 3/8 1-5/32 23/ /16 3-5/8 4-5/8 7/16 7/16 7/8 1/2 RSP-5.5T 1/2 1-7/8 1-3/16 2-9/16 5-5/16 5-3/4 5/8 5/8 1-3/16 1-1/4 RSP-6T 5/ /8 2-15/16 5-7/8 8 3/4 3/4 1-5/16 1-1/2 RSP-7T 3/4 2-1/2 1-23/ /32 7-1/ /16 15/16 1-1/2 2-1/2 RSP-9T 7/8 & /16 4-7/16 8-3/ /8 1-1/8 1-3/4 4-1/4 RSP-10T 1-1/8 & 1-1/4 3-1/2 2-3/ / /8 1-5/16 2-1/8 7-1/2 RSP-12T 1-3/8 &1-1/2 4-1/4 2-13/ / / /16 1-1/8 2-3/8 9

125 Crosby Forged Swivels SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 123 Hot dip Galvanized Quenched & Tempered Crosby products meet or exceed all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, Crosby products meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life,impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B G-401Chain Swivels Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271F, Type VII, Class 1, except for those provisions required by the contractor. G-402 Regular Swivels Size G-401 Working Dimensions Stock Load Limit Each * A B C D E G J M R U V 1/ / / / / / * Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Limit. Size G-402 Stock Working Load Limit * Each Dimensions A B C D J M R S FITTINGS & BLOCKS Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271F, Type VII, Class 2, except for those provisions required by the contractor. G-403 Jaw End Swivels Size 1/ / / / / / / / / * Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. G-403 Stock Working Load Limit * Each Dimensions A B C G J K L M N P R U V 1/ / / / / / / / /2# * Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. # Manufactured with two 1 1/2 bails connected by a stud with a nut on each side. Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271F, Type VII, Class 3, except for those provisions required by the contractor. 401, 402 and 403 swivels are positioning devices and are not intended to rotate under load. Use in corrosive environment requires shank and nut inspection in accordance with ASME B (b)(5)(c)2099.

126 124 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Crosby Swivels w/ Tapered Roller Thrust Bearing Suitable for frequent rotation under load. All swivels individually proof tested with certification. All hooks furnished with latches assembled. All jaws complete with bolts, nuts and cotter pins. Pressure lube fitting provided. NOT TO USED ON DEMOLITION (WRECKING ) BALLS. Other types and capacities up to 1250t available to meet your requirements. IMPORTANT - Crosby Swivels should only be used with the recommended wire rope. Have your ALP representative contact the wire rope manufacturer for the proper wire rope to be used with Crosby Swivels. S-1 S-2 S-3 S-1 Jaw & Hook Swivel S-1 Stock Working Load Limit (tons) * Wire Rope Size Each Dimensions A F G H J K L M N O P V 3-S / S / S /2 3/ S / S S S S * Individually Proof Tested to 2 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. S-2 Jaw & Jaw Working Dimensions Swivel S-2 Stock Wire Rope Load Limit Size Each (tons) * B G H J K N O 3-S / S / S /2 3/ S / S S S S * Individually Proof Tested to 2 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. S-3 Jaw & Eye Swivel S-3 Stock Working Load Limit (tons) * Wire Rope Size Each Dimensions C G H J K N O Q R S T 3-S / S / S /2 3/ S / S S S S * Individually Proof Tested to 2 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

127 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 125 S-4 S-5 S-6 S-4 Eye & Jaw S-5 Eye & Eye Swivel S-4 Stock Working Load Limit (tons) * Wire Rope Size Each Dimensions C G H J K N O Q R S T 3-S / S / S /2 3/ S / S S S S * Individually Proof Tested to 2 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. FITTINGS & BLOCKS Swivel S-5 Stock Working Load Limit (tons) * Wire Rope Size Each Dimensions D G Q R S T 3-S / S / S /2 3/ S / S S S S * Individually Proof Tested to 2 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. S-6 Eye & Hook Swivel S-6 Stock Working Load Limit (tons) * Wire Rope Size Each Dimensions E F G L M P Q R S T V 3-S / S / S /2 3/ S / S S S S * Individually Proof Tested to 2 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. For swivels larger than 45 metric tons, or for swivels designed to meet the requirements of demanding applications such as subsea applications, please contact the Crosby Special Engineered Products Department.

128 126 Wire Rope Sockets S-421T Wedge Sockets SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Wedge sockets meet the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR-S-550E, Type C, except those provisions required of the contractor. Wedge socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 80% based on the catalog strength of XXIP wire rope. Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these sockets meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B Type Approval and certification in accordance with ABS 2007 Steel Vessel Rules , and ABS Guide for Certification of Cranes. Basket is cast steel and individually magnetic particle inspected. Pin diameter and jaw opening allows wedge and socket to be used in conjunction with closed swage and spelter sockets. Secures the tail or dead end of the wire rope to the wedge, thus eliminates loss or Punch out of the wedge. Eliminates the need for an extra piece of rope, and is easily installed. The TERMINATOR TM wedge eliminates the potential breaking off of the tail due to fatigue. The tail, which is secured by the base of the clip and wedge, is left undeformed and available for reuse. Incorporates Crosby s patented QUIC-CHECK Go and No-Go feature cast into the wedge. The proper size rope is determined when the following criteria are met: 1. The wire rope should pass thru the Go hole in the wedge. 2. ThewireropeshouldNOTpassthruthe No-Go holeinthewedge. Utilizes standard Crosby Red-U-Bolt wire rope clip. The 3/8 thru 1-1/8 standard S-421 wedge socket can be retrofitted with the new style TERMINATOR TM wedge. Available with Bolt, Nut and Cotter Pin. U.S. patent 5,553,360, Canada patent 2,217,004 and foreign equivalents. Meets the performance requirements of EN : S-421 Wedge Sockets Assembly includes Socket, Wedge, Pin and Wire Rope Clip Wire Rope Diameter S-421T Stock API 2C S-421T Stock (mm) A B C +/-09 Dimensions D G H J* K* L P R S T U V 3/ / / / / / / * Nominal NOTE: For intermediate wire rope sizes, use next larger size socket. The S-423T Super TERMINATOR TM wedge is designed to be assembled only into the Crosby S-421T TERMINATOR TM socket body. IMPORTANT: The S-423TW for sizes 5/8 through 1-1/8 (14mm through 28mm) will fit respective size standard Crosby S-421T basket. The 1-1/4 (30-32mm) S-423TW will only fit the Crosby S-421T 1-1/4 basket marked with TERMINATOR TM Wire Rope Diameter S-421T Stock API 2C S-421T Stock Each S-421TW Stock Numaber Wedge Only API 2C S-421 TW Stock Wedge Only Wedge Only Each (mm) G-4082 Stock Optional G-4082 Bolt, Nut & Cotter Each 3/ / / / / / /

129 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 127 Wedge Sockets Warnings and Application Instructions Extended Wedge Socket Assembly U.S. Patent No and Canada Patent No Align live end of rope, with center line of pin. (See Figure 1). Secure dead end section of rope. (See Figure 1). DO NOT ATTACH DEAD END TO LIVE END. (See Figure 1). Use a hammer to seat Wedge and Rope as deep into socket as possible before applying first load. S-421T / US-422T TERMINATOR TM NOTE: The design of the basket for the S-421T 1-1/4 TERMNATOR TM Wedge Socket doe not allow proper fit to the old style Crosby S-421W wedge (see Fig. 1). Do not assemble or use. The design of the basket for each US-422T TERMINATOR TM Wedge Socket does not allow proper fitto the old style UWO-422 wedge (see Fig. 1). Do not assemble or use. All S-421T and US-422T TERMINATOR TM baskets are marked with a capital T or TERMINATOR TM. Loads may slip or fall if the Wedge Socket is not properly installed. Load misapplied in direct contact with the wedge can dislodge the wedge & cause loss of load. A falling load can seriously injure or kill. Read and understand these instructions before installing the Wedge Socket. Do not side load the Wedge Socket. Do not interchange Crosby wedge socket, wedge or pin with non Crosby Wedge socket, wedge or pin. Apply first load to fully seat the Wedge and Wire Rope in the socket. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Do not interchange wedge between S-421 and US-422 or between sizes. Do not assemble an old style 1-1/4 (30-32mm) S-421W wedge into a S-421T 1-1/4 (30-32mm) TERMINATOR TM basket. Do not assemble an old style UWO-422 wedge into a US-422T TERMINATOR TM basket. FITTINGS & BLOCKS QUIC-CHECK GO and No-Go features cast into wedge. The proper size wire rope is determined when the following criteria are met: 1. The wire rope shall pass thru the Go hole in the wedge. 2. The wire rope shall NOT pass thru the No-Go hole in the wedge. Important Safety Information - Read and Follow Inspection/Maintenance Safety Always inspect socket, wedge and pin before using. Do not use part showing cracks. Do not use modified or substitute parts. Repair minor nicks or gouges to socket or pin by lightly grinding until surfaces are smooth. Do not reduce original dimension more than 10%. Do not repair by welding. Inspect permanent assemblies annually, or more often in severe operating conditions. Do not mix and match wedges or pins between models or sizes. Always select the proper wedge and socket for the wire rope size. Assembly Safety Use only with standard 6 to 8 strand wire rope of designated size. For intermediate size rope, use next larger size socket. For example: when using 9/16 diameter wire rope use a 5/8 size Wedge Socket Assembly. Welding of the tail on standard wire rope is not recommended. Seizing of the tail is preferred following the recommended practices of the wire rope manufacture. The tail length of the dead end should be a minimum of 6 rope diameters but not less than 6 (See Figure 2). To use with Rotation Resistant wire rope (special wire rope constructions with 8 or more outer strands) ensure that the dead end is welded, brazed or seized before inserting the wire rope into the wedge socket to prevent core slippage or loss of rope lay. Seizing of the tail is preferred following the recommended practices of the wire rope manufacturer. The tail length of the dead end should be a minimum of 20 rope diameters but not less than 6 (See Figure 2). Properly match socket, wedge and clip (See Table 1) to wire rope size. Operating Safety Apply first load to fully seat the Wedge and Wire Rope in the socket. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Efficiency rating of the Wedge Socket termination is based upon the catalog breaking strength of Wire Rope. The efficiency of a properly assembled Wedge Socket is 80%. During use, do not strike the dead end section with any other elements of the rigging (Called two blocking). Do not allow a direct load to contact the wedge.

130 128 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Open Spelter Sockets G-416/S-416 Forged Steel Sockets thru 1-1/2, cast alloy steel 1-5/8 thru 4. Spelter socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100%, based on the catalog strength of wire rope. Ratings are based on recommended use with 6x7, 6x19, or 6x37, IPS or XIP (EIP), XXIP (EEIP), RRL, FC, or IWRC wire rope. Strand constructed with minimal number of wires (e.g., 1 x 7) requires special consideration that socket basket length be five (5) times the strand diameter or fifty (50) times the wire diameter, whichever is the greater. Open Grooved Sockets meet the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR-S-550E, Type A, expect for those provisions required of the contractor. G-416 & S-416 Open Spelter Sockets Rope Diameter (mm) Structural Strand Diameter Ultimate Load (tons) Stock G-416 Galv. S-416 S.C. Each Dimensions Tolerance +/- A C D F G H J L M N C 1/ /16-3/ /16-1/ /16-5/ / /4 18 9/16-5/ / /16-3/ /16-7/ / / /4 to 1-3/ /16 to 1-1/ / /16 to 1-1/ *1-5/8 * /16 to 1-3/ *1-3/4 to 1-7/8 * /16 to 1-5/ *2 to 2-1/8 * /16 to 1-3/ *2-1/4 to 2-3/8 * /16 to 1-7/ *2-1/2 to 2-5/8 * /16 to 2-1/ *2-3/4 to 2-7/8 * /16 to 2-7/ *3 to 3-1/8 * /2 to 2-5/ *3-1/4 to 3-3/8 * /4 to 2-7/ *3-1/2 to 3-5/8 * to 3-1/ *3-3/4 to 4 * * Cast Alloy Steel Note: Available with bolt nut and cutter for more information. All cast steel sockets 1-5/8 and larger are magnetic particle inspected and ultrasonic inspected. Proof testing available on special order. Drawing illustrates one groove used on sockets 1/4 through 3/4. Sizes 7/8 through 1-1/2 use 2 grooves. Sizes 1-5/8 and larger use 3 grooves.

131 Closed Spelter Socket SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 129 Forged Steel Sockets thru 1-1/2, cast alloy steel 1-5/8 thru 4. Spelter socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100%, based on the catalog strength of wire rope. Ratings are based on the recommended use with 6x7, 6x19 or 6x37, IPS (EIP), XXIP (EEIP), RRL, FC or IWRC wire rope. Strand constructed with minimal number of wires (e.g., 1 x 7) requires special consideration that socket basket length be five (5) times the strand diameter or fifty (50) times the wire diameter, whichever is the greater. G-417/S-417 G-417 & S-417 Closed Spelter Sockets Closed grooved Sockets meet the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR- S-550E, Type B, except for those provisions required of the contractor. Rope Diameter Stock Structural Ultimate Dimensions Strand Load Each (mm) Diameter (t) G-417 S-417 A B C D* F G H J K L Galv. S.C. 1/ /16-3/ /16-1/ /16-5/ / /4 18 9/16-5/ / /16-3/ /16-7/ / / /4 to 1-3/ /16 to 1-1/ / /16 to 1-1/ /8 * /16 to 1-3/ *1-3/4 to 1-7/8 * /16 to 1-5/ *2 to 2-1/8 * /16 to 1-3/ *2-1/4 to 2-3/8 * /16 to 1-7/ *2-1/2 to 2-5/8 * /16 to 2-1/ *2-3/4 to 2-7/8 * /16 to 2-7/ *3 to 3-1/8 * /2 to 2-5/ *3-1/4 to 3-3/8 * /4 to 2-7/ *3-1/2 to 3-5/8 * to 3-1/ *3-3/4 to 4 * * Cast Alloy Steel Diameter of pin must not exceed pin used on companion 416 socket. Reference column D dimension. FITTINGS & BLOCKS All cast steel sockets 1-5/8 and larger are magnetic particle inspected and ultrasonic inspected. Proof testing available on special order. Drawing illustrates one groove used on sockets 1/4 through 3/4. Sizes 7/8 through 1-1/2 use 2 grooves. Sizes 1-5/8 and larger use 3 grooves.

132 130 Open Swage Socket SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Forged from special bar quality carbon steel, suitable for cold forming. Hardness controlled by spheroidize annealing. Swag Socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100% based on the catalog strength of wire rope. Swage Sockets incorporate a reduced machined area of the shank which is equivalent to the proper After Swage dimension. Before swaging, this provides for an obvious visual difference in the shank diameter. After swaging, a uniform shank diameter is created allowing for a QUIC-CHECK and permanent visual inspection opportunity. Stamp for identification after swaging without concern for fractures (as per directions in Wire Rope End Terminations User s Manual). Designed to quickly determine whether the socket has been through the swaging operation and assist in field inspections, it does not eliminate the need to perform standard production inspection which include gauging for the proper After Swage dimensions or proof loading. S-501 S-501 Open Swage Sockets S-501 S-501B** Rope Size Ultimate Tolerance Before Swage Dimensions Max. After Stock Stock Each Load* +/- Swage Dim. Die Description (mm) (tons) A B C D E F H L M N H / /4 Socket / /16-3/8 Socket / /16-3/8 Socket / /16-1/2 Socket / /16-1/2 Socket / /16-5/8 Socket / /16-5/8 Socket / /4 Socket / /8 Socket Socket / /8 Socket / /4 Socket / /8 Socket / /2 Socket / /4 Socket Socket * The Ultimate Loads of 3/4 through 1 1/4 sizes have been increased to meet the requirements for 8 strand 2160 Grade pendants. ** Assembly with bolt, nut and cotter pin. S-501 Swage Sockets are recommended for use with 6 x 19 or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP (EIP), XXIP (EEIP), RRL, FC or IWRC wire rope. Before using any National Swage fitting with any other type lay, construction or grade of wire rope, it is recommended that the termination be destructive tested and documented to prove the adequacy of the assembly to be manufactured. In accordance with ASME B30.9, all slings terminated with swage sockets shall be proof loaded.*

133 Closed Swage Socket SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 131 Forged from special bar quality carbon steel, suitable for cold forming. Swage Socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100% based on the catalog strength of wire rope. Hardness controlled by spheroidize annealing. Stamp for identification after swaging without concern for fractures (as per directions in the Wire Rope End Terminations User s Manual). Swage sockets incorporate a reduced machined area of the shank which is equivalent to the proper After Swage dimension. Before swaging, this provides for an obvious visual difference in the shank diameter. After swaging, a uniform shank diameter is created allowing for a QUIC-CHECK and permanent visual inspection opportunity. Designed to quickly determine whether the socket has been through the swaging operation and assist in field inspections, it does not eliminate the need to perform standard production inspections which include gauging for the proper After Swage dimensions or proof loading. S-502 Stock S-502 Closed Swage Sockets Rope Size Ultimate Before Swage Dimensions Each Load ** (mm) (t) A B C D E F H L Max. After Swage Dim. S-502 Die Description FITTINGS & BLOCKS / /4 Socket / /16-3/8 Socket / /16-3/8 Socket / /17-1/2 Socket / /16-1/2 Socket / /16-5/8 Socket / /16-5/8 Socket / /4 Socket / /8 Socket Socket / /8 Socket / /4 Socket / /8 Socket / /2 Socket / /4 Socket Socket * Maximum Proof Load shall not exceed 50% of XXIP rope catalog breaking strength. ** The Ultimate Loads of 3/4 through 1 1/4 sizes have been increased to meet the requirements for 8 strand 2160 Grade pendants. S-502 Swage Sockets are recommended for use with 6 x 19 or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP (EIP), XXIP (EEIP), RRL, FC or IWRC wire rope. Before using any National Swage fitting with any other type lay, construction or grade of wire rope, it is recommended that the termination be destructive tested and documented to prove the adequacy of the assembly to be manufactured. In accordance with ASME B30.9, all slings terminated with swage sockets shall be proof loaded.*

134 132 Crosby Turnbuckles SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Jaw & Jaw Turnbuckles End fittings are Quenched and Tempered or Normalized, bodies heat treated by normalizing. Hot Dip galvanized steel. TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY. Forged jaw ends are fitted with bolts and nuts for 1/4 through 5/8, and pins and cotters on 3/4 through 2-3/4 sizes. Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties. Body has UNC threads. Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these turnbuckles meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B Lock Nuts available for all sizes. Comprehensive end fitting data provided. Fatigue Rated. HG-228 JAW & JAW Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specifications FF- T-971b, Type 1, Form 1- CLASS 7, and ASTM F-1145, except for those provisions required of the contractor. HG-228 Jaw & Jaw Turnbuckle Thread Diameter & Take up HG-228 Stock Working Load Limit * Each A B E Closed G Dimensions J Open K Closed M Open N Closed BB +1/4x /16x4-1/ /8x /2x /2x /2x /8x /8x /8x /4x /4x /4x /4x /8x /8x x x x x /4x /4x /4x /2x /2x /2x /4x /4x x /2x /4x * Proof Load is 2.5 times Working Load Limit. Ultimate load is 5 times Working Load Limit. + Mechanical Galvanized.

135 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 133 Jaw & Eye Turnbuckles HG-227 JAW & EYE Hot Dip galvanized steel. End fittings are Quenches and Tempered or normalized, bodies heat treated by normalizing. Turnbuckles eyes are forged and elongated, by design, to maximize easy attachment in system and minimize stress in the eye. For turnbuckles size 1/4 through 2-1/2, a shackle one size smaller can be reeved through eye. Forged jaw ends are fitted with bolts and nuts for 1/4 through 5/8, and pins and cotters on 3/4 through 2-3/4 sizes. Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties. Body has UNC threads. Meets or exceed all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these turnbuckles meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY. Lock Nuts available for all sizes (see page Crosby Catalog). For Comprehensive end fitting data (see Crosby Catalog). Fatigue Rated. Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specifications FF-T791b, Type 1, Form 1- CLASS 8, and ASTM F-1145, except for those pro-visions required of the contractor. FITTINGS & BLOCKS HG-227 Jaw & Eye Turnbuckle Thread HG-227 Working Dimensions Diameter & Stock Load Limit Each E J K M N X Take up * A B Closed G Open Closed Open Closed R S Closed BB #1/4x #5/16x4-1/ #3/8x /2x /2x /2x /8x /8x /8x /4x /4x /4x /4x /8x /8x x x x x /4x /4x /4x /2x /2x /2x / /4x x /2x /4x * Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. # Mechanical Galvanized.

136 134 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Eye & Eye Turnbuckles HG-226 Eye & Eye Hot dip galvanized steel. End fittings are Quenched and Tempered or Normalized, bodies heat treated by normalizing. Turnbuckle eyes are forged and elongated, by design, to maximize easy attachment in system and minimize stress in the eye. For turnbuckle sizes 1/4 through 2 1/2, a shackle one size smaller can be reeved through eye. Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties. Body has UNC threads. Meets or exceed all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these turnbuckles meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY. Lock Nuts available for all sizes (see Crosby Catalog). Comprehensive end fitting data (see Crosby Catalog). Fatigue Rated. Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specifications FF-T-791b, Type 1, Form 1- CLASS 4, and ASTM F-1145, except for those provisions required of the contractor. HG-226 Eye & Eye Turnbuckle Thread Diameter & Take up HG-226 Stock Working Load Limit * Each A J Open K Closed Dimensions M Open N Closed R S X Closed BB #1/4X #5/16X4-1/ #3/8X /2x /2x /8x /8x /4x /4x /4x /8x /8x x x x x /4x /4x /4x /2x /2x /2x /4x /4x x /2x /4x * Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. # Mechanical Galvanized.

137 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 135 Hook & Eye Turnbuckles HG-225 Hook & Eye Hot Dip galvanized steel. End fittings are Quenched and Tempered or Normalized, bodies heat treated by normalizing. Turnbuckle eyes are forged elongated, by design, to maximize easy attachment in system and minimize stress in the eye. For turnbuckle sizes 1/4 through 1, a shackle one size smaller can be reeved through the eye. Turnbuckle hooks are forged with a greater cross sectional area that results in a stronger hook with better fatigue properties. Meets or exceed all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these turnbuckles meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY. Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties. Body has UNC threads. Lock Nuts available for all sizes. Comprehensive end fitting data provided upon request. Fatigue Rated. Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specifications FF-T-79lb, Type 1, Form 1 - Class 6, and ASTM F-1145 except for those provisions required of the contractor. FITTINGS & BLOCKS HG-225 Hook & Eye Turnbuckle Thread Diameter & Take up HG-225 Stock Working Load Limit * Each A D E Closed F J Open Dimensions K Closed M Open N Closed R S X Closed BB +1/4 x /16 x 4-1/ /8 x /2 x /2 x /8 x /8 x /4 x /4 x /4 x /8 x x * Proof Load is 2.5 times Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. + Mechanical Galvanized.

138 136 Hoist Rings SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS En-Guard - Hoist Rings Forged High Strength 4140 Alloy Steel Hoist Ring Corrosion Resistant Plating - Electroless Niclel (AMS-C Class 1 Grade B) 200% Proof Load Tested (Certificate of Test available upon request) Individually Serialized Other Standard and Metric Sizes Available Customizations Available Select Sizes from ,000 lbs. WLL In Stock Swivels 360 0, Pivots Easily disassembled & reassembled for inspection Complies with ASME-B :1 Design Factor Unlike eye bolts, swivel hoist rings maintain full capacity at 0-90 degrees from the bolt axis Manufactured in Valdosta, GA, USA Material: Forged High Strength 4140 Alloy Steel. Design factor: Minimum Design Factor = 5:1 Specifications: Meets ASME B30.26 Finish: Corrosion Resistant Plating - Electroless Nickel Inch Part + Rated Load A B C D E +/-.12 F G K L M TL *(ft/lbs) EN / EN / EN / EN / EN / EN / EN / EN EN / EN / EN / Metric Part Rated E Load A B C D (kg) +/-3.0 F G K L M TL *(nm) (kg) EN M10 x EN M12 x EN M14 x EN M16 x N M20 x EN M24 x EN M30 x Supplied with stud and nut. * Recommended Torque Load. ** Plating threads may subject threads to not meet standard thread tolerances.

139 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 137 EZ-Torque TM Hoist Rings Exclusively from ADB - the world s largest manufacturer of Safety Hoist Rings ADB s EZ-Torque Hoist Ring eliminates the need of locating and using expensive hydraulic tensioners or torque multipliers. For example, a 200,000 lb. WLL Hoist Ring requires the mounting bolt to be torqued to 19,800 lbs-ft. while ADB s EZ-Torque requires only a standard torque wrench and 193 lbs-ft of torque per screw. FITTINGS & BLOCKS Inch All dimensions approximate - variations do not effect use or safety factor. Rated Part Load A B C D E +/-.12 F G H J K L M TL (ft/lb) Easy-Torque (ft/lb)* , / / , / / , / / , / / , / / , / , / / , / , , * Recommended Torque Load per each installation bolt. - Larger WLL available upon request. Metric All dimensions approximate - variations do not effect use or safety factor. Dimensions are in millimeters. E Rated TL EZ-Torque Part Load A B C D F G H J K L M (kg) +/- (kg) 3.0 (Nm) (Nm)* , M30x , M36x , M42x , M48x , M64x , M72x , M90x * Recommended Torque Load per each installation bolt. - Larger WLL available upon request.

140 138 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Heavy Duty Hoist Rings Inch Working Load Limit: Complete Range through 30,000 lbs. Material: Forged High Strength alloy. Range of movement: Pivot 180 0, Swivel Under Load. Design Factor: Minimum of 5:1. Meets Military Specification No. MIL-STD 1365(11) or MIL-STD 209C. Meets manufacturing and design requirements of ASME-B30.26 and MIL-STD 209. Magnetic Particle Inspected Per ASTM Black oxide coated. Each Individually Serial ed. Part Rated Load A B C D E +/-.12 F G K L M TL* ft/lb / / / / / / / / / / * / / * / / * / / * / / * / / * / / * / / * / / * / / * / / * / / * / / * / * * * / / / / / Supplied with stud and nut - Long Bar Models * Recommended Torque Load For load ranges of 50,000 to 250,000 lbs. refer to our Safety Engineered Hoist Rings. Heavy Duty Hoist Rings are completely Interchangeable with Safety Engineered Hoist Rings.

141 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 139 Heavy Duty Hoist Rings - METRIC Material: Forged High strength 4140 alloy steel. Range of Movement: Pivot 180 0, Swivel Under Load. Minimum Design Factor is 5:1. Meets manufacturing and design requirements of ASME-B30.26 and MIL-STD 209. Magnetic Particle Inspected Per ASTM Black oxide coated. Each Individually Serial ed. Metric Rated Part Load TL* E (kg) A B C D F G K L M (Nm) +/- 3.0 (kg) M8x M8x M10x M10x M12x * M12x FITTINGS & BLOCKS M12x * M12x M14x * M14x M14x * M14 x M16x * M16x M16x * M16x M20x * M20x M20x * M20x M20x * M20x M24x * M24x M24x * M24x M30x * M30x M30x * M30x M30x M36x M42x M48x M56x Supplied with stud and nut * Long Bar Models. Replacement screws are available.

142 140 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Safety Engineered Hoist Rings - Stainless Steel Material: 300 Series Stainless Steel Design Factor: 5:1 Range of Movement: Swivel 360 0, Pivot 80 0 Under Load NDT: Liquid Penetrant Tested Per ASTM-E 1417 Purification Process: Clean & Passivate Per ASTM-A967 Typical Applications: Use Stainless for Corrosive, Cryogenic or Elevated Temperature Environments All dimensions approximate - variations do not affect use or design factor Each individually Serial ed Inch Part Rated E TL* Load A B C D F G H J K L M +/-.12 (ft/lbs) / / oz / / oz / / oz / / oz / / lb / / lb. 5 oz. * / / lb. 12 oz / / lb. 5 oz. * / / lb / / lb. 5 oz. * / / lb. 12 oz / / lb. 7 oz / / lb. 7 oz. * / / lb. 14 oz / / lb. 7 oz. * / / lb. 14 oz / / lb. 9 oz. * / / lb / / lb. 9 oz. * / / lb / lb. 10 oz. * / lb. 4 oz / lb. 10 oz. * / lb. 10 oz / lb. 12 oz. * / lb. 12 oz lb. * lb lb. * lb lb. * lb / / lb / / lb. 12 oz / / lb / / lb. 8 oz / / lb. 8 oz / lb / / lb. + Supplied with stud and nut. * Recommended Torque Load.

143 Safety Engineered Hoist Rings -Stainless Steel Metric SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 141 Hoist Ring Material: 300 Series Stainless Steel Design Factor: 5:1 Range of Movement: Swivel 360 0, Pivot Under Load NDT: Liquid Penetrant Tested Per ASTM-E 1417 Purification Process: Clean & Passivate Per ASTM-A967 Typical Applications: Use Stainless for Corrosive, Cryogenic or Elevated Temperature Environments Each Individually Serial ed Metric Part Rated Load (kg) A B C D E+/- 3.0 F G H J K L M TL* (Nm) (kg) FITTINGS & BLOCKS M8x M10x M12x * M12x M16x * M16x M20x * M20x M20x * M20x M24x * M24x M30x * M30x M30x M30x M36x M42x M48x M64x Supplied with stud and nut. * Recommended Torque Load. - Long Bar Models. Note: Dimensions are in millimeters.

144 142 Electroline Fittings SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Open Forged Socket Open Machined Socket Rope Size Self- Colored Steel PIN # Forged Series: Clevis Socket Specifications Galvanized Steel A B C D E F 1/4 IGD-125-N GD-125-V* 9/16 1-3/8 4-1/4 1-23/32 17/32 1/2 5/16 IGD-131-N GD-131-V* 13/16 1-1/2 5-5/16 2-5/32 11/16 5/8 3/8 IGD-137-N GD-137-V* 13/16 1-1/2 5-5/16 2-5/32 11/16 5/8 7/16 GD-143-N GD-143-X 1-1/ / /32 1 7/8 1/2 GD-150-N GD-150-X 1-1/ / /32 1 7/8 9/16 GD-156-N GD-156-X 1-1/4 2-1/2 8-5/8 3-7/16 1-1/4 1 5/8 GD-162-N GD-162-X 1-1/4 2-1/2 8-5/8 3-7/16 1-1/4 1 3/4 GD-175-N GD-175-X 1-7/ / /2 1-1/8 7/8 GD-187-N GD-187-X 1-5/8 2-5/ /8 1-17/32 1-1/4 1 GD-199-N GD-199-X 1-15/16 2-7/ /16 4-7/8 1-7/8 1-1/2 1-1/8 GD-1112-N GD-1112-X 2-3/16 3-5/ /8 1-7/8 1-13/16 1-1/4 GD-1125-N GD1125-X 2-3/16 3-5/ /8 1-7/8 1-13/16 * Note: Zinc plated only - no galvanized. Rope Size Self Colored Steel PIN # Machined Series: Clevis Socket Specifications Zinc Plated Steel Stainless Steel A B C D E F G 1/16 ID-106-N ID-106-V IS /64 3/8 2-1/16 43/64 3/16 3/16 1/2 3/32 ID-109-N ID-109-V IS-109 5/16 1/2 2-7/16 13/16 1/4 1/4 5/8 1/8 ID-112-N ID-112-V IS-112 5/16 1/2 2-7/16 13/16 1/4 1/4 5/8 5/32 ID-115-N ID-115-V IS-115 3/8 5/8 2-31/32 63/64 5/16 5/16 3/4 3/16 ID-118-N ID-118-V IS-118 3/8 5/8 2-31/32 63/64 5/16 5/16 3/4 7/32 ID-121-N ID-121-V IS /32 3/4 3-23/32 1-9/64 3/8 3/8 15/16 1/4 ID-125-N ID-125-V IS /32 3/4 3-23/32 1-9/64 3/8 3/8 15/16 9/32 ID-128-N ID-128-V IS /32 7/8 4-1/4 1-19/64 3/8 7/16 1-1/16 5/16 ID-131-N ID-131-V IS /32 7/8 4-1/4 1-19/64 3/8 7/16 1-1/16 3/8 ID-137-N ID-137-V IS-137 5/ / /64 7/16 1/2 1-3/16 7/16 ID-143-N ID-143-V IS /64 1-1/4 5-5/8 1-11/16 7/16 5/8 1-3/8 1/2 ID-150-N ID-150-V IS /64 1-3/8 6-11/ /64 1/2 11/16 1-9/16 9/16 ID-156-N ID-156-V IS / / /32 2-5/32 11/16 15/16 2 5/8 ID-162-N ID-162-V IS / / /32 2-5/32 11/16 15/16 2 3/4 ID-175-N ID-175-V IS / / /32 2-7/16 3/4 1-1/8 2-5/16 7/8 ID-187-N ID-187-V IS /16 1-7/8 10-3/ /64 13/16 1-1/4 2-5/8 1 ID-199-N ID-199-V IS /4 2-1/ / /2 3 Extra-Strength Open Forged Socket Extra Strength Series: Clevis Socket with Pin and Cotter Pin Specifications Rope Size Galvanized Steel A B C D E F 7/16 PD-143X 1-1/ / / /2 PD-150-X 1-1/ / / /16 PD-156-X 1-1/4 2-21/2 8-5/8 3-11/64 1-1/4 1-13/16 5/8 PD-162-X /2 8-5/ /4 1-3/16 3/4 PD-175-X 1-7/ / /16 1-1/2 1-3/8 7/8 PD187-X 1-15/16 2-7/ /16 4-7/8 1-7/8 1-1/2 1 PD-199-X 2-3/16 3-5/ /8 1-15/ /16 Note: Extra Strength Fittings rated at 100% RBS of Extra - Improved Plow Steel Wire Rope. Larger Sizes Available - Please Contact Factory.

145 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 143 Closed Forged Socket Rope Size Self Colored Steel PIN # Forged Series: Eye Socket Specifications Galvanized Steel A B C D E F 1/4 GD-225-N GD-225-X 1-1/16 1-3/8 5-5/32 1-5/16 1/2 17/32 5/16 GD-231-N GD-231-X 1-1/16 1-3/8 5-3/8 1-5/16 9/16 21/32 3/8 GD-237-N GD-237-X 1-1/16 1-3/8 5-1/2 1-5/16 9/16 21/32 7/16 GD-243-N GD-243-X 1-5/ /16 6-7/8 1-3/4 3/4 29/32 1/2 GD-250-N GD-250-X 1-5/ /16 6-7/8 1-3/4 3/4 29/32 9/16 GD-256-N GD-256-X 1-1/2 2-9/16 9-3/16 2-1/4 7/8 1-1/32 5/8 GD-262-N GD-262-X 1-1/2 2-9/16 9-3/16 2-1/4 7/8 1-1/32 3/4 GD-275-N GD-275-X 1-11/16 2-3/8 9-1/2 2-1/4 1-1/16 1-5/32 7/8 IGD-287-N IGD-287-V* 1-7/8 2-13/ /8 2-5/8 1-5/16 1-9/32 1 IGD-299-N IGD-299-V* 2-1/4 3-1/4 13-7/ / /32 *Note: Zinc plated only. Forged Threaded Stud Forged Series: Stud Socket Specifications Rope Size Galvanized Steel A C Coarse Thread D 1/8 IGD-312-V 2-1/2 4-1/8 1/4-20 5/8 3/16 IGD-318-V 4-1/8 6-5/16 3/8-16 3/4 1/4 GD-325-X 4-3/16 7-3/8 1/ /16 GD-331-X 4-3/16 7-9/16 1/ /8 GD-337-X 4-1/2 8-1/4 5/ /8 7/16 GD-343-X 6-3/ /16 3/ /2 1/2 GD-350-X 6-3/ /16 3/ /2 9/16 GD-356-X 8-1/8 13-7/8 7/ /4 5/8 GD-362-X 8-1/8 13-7/8 7/ /4 3/4 GD-375-X 8-5/8 16-1/8 1-1/ /16 7/8 GD-387-X /16 1-1/ /8 1 GD-399-N 12-1/8 22-5/ /16 3 * Note: For all other stud dimensions, consult factory. FITTINGS & BLOCKS Machined Threaded Stud Rope Self Colored Steel Size PIN # Machined Series: Stud Specifications Zinc Plated Steel Stainless Steel A C Fine Thread D 1/16 ID-306-N ID-306-V IS /32 3-1/ /2 3/32 ID-309-N ID-309-V IS /8 3-1/2 1/4-28 9/16 1/8 ID-312-N ID-312-V IS /8 3-1/2 1/4-28 9/16 5/32 ID-315-N ID-315-V IS /16 4-3/16 3/8-24 3/4 3/16 ID-318-N ID-318-V IS /16 4-3/16 3/8-24 3/4 7/32 ID-321-N ID-321-V IS /16 7-1/16 1/2-20 7/8 1/4 ID-325-N ID-325-V IS /16 7-1/16 1/2-20 7/8 9/32 ID-328-N ID-328-V IS /16 7-1/2 5/ /16 ID-331-N ID-331-V IS /16 7-1/2 5/ /8 ID-337-N ID-337-V IS /16 8-3/16 3/ /8 7/16 ID-343-N ID-343-V IS / / /16 1/2 ID-350-N ID-350-V IS / / /16 9/16 - ID-356-V IS /8 16-3/16 1-1/ /16 5/8 - ID-362-V IS /8 16-3/16 1-1/ /16 3/4 - ID-375-V IS /4 16-3/4 1-1/ /2 7/8 - ID-387-V IS /4 19-7/8 1-1/ ID-399-V IS /4 23-7/64 1-3/ /8 - IGD-3112-V IGS /8 25-9/16 1-3/ /4 - IGD-3125-V IGS / /16 1-3/ /2 1-3/8 - IGS-3137-V IGS /8 34-7/ / /2 - IGS-3150-V IGS /8 34-7/ /2 4 * Note: For other stud dimensions, consult factory.

146 144 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS TYPICAL ASSEMBLY Sleeve Vibration Damping Zone Socket Plug Inspection Hole Electroline fittings are the first real advance in connecting practices since the development of wire rope. These fittings are remarkably compact assemblies of three basic units: 1. The SLEEVE, which slips over the end of the rope. 2. The PLUG, which is inserted to separate and hold the rope strands in the sleeve. 3. The covering SOCKET The combination of these three units literally locks the rope into a strong, solid assembly. SAFE WORKING LOADS & IMPORTANT INFORMATION Rope fittings are designed for linear applications only. Never subject Electroline rope fittings to angular loads. Follow rope manufacturers recommendations regarding the suitability of the rope on angled surfaces such as sheaves and pulleys. The strength of an assembly greatly depends on the type of rope used. When using Electroline terminations in an assembly, the rope is often the weakest component. Therefore, it is important to follow the rope manufacturers specifications regarding use, care, and suitability of the assembly. Electroline terminations should be inspected for deformation and unusual wear every time the rope is inspected. The rated assembly breaking strengths provided with Electroline wire rope part numbers in this catalog are typical for 6 x 19 IWRC (1 x 19 IWRC in smaller sizes) carbon steel ropes. Due to customer demand regarding dimensions, open body turnbuckles (XD series), fittings with hooks, and machined eyes (I-200 series) are rated to Improved Plow Steel (IPS) standards. These fittings can be modified to Extra Improved Ploy Steel (EIPS) standards if requested. All other carbon steel fittings conform to EIPS standards. Stainless steel fittings will hold 100% of the rope s RBS. However, if loaded to 85% of the rope RBS, the fitting will yield and deform. This may make determination impossible. Machined fittings are at least 1.3 times stronger than the corresponding steel rope. Forged fittings, except studs, are 2.0 times stronger. Items specified as hot-dipped galvanized include a zinc, electro-plated sleeve.

147 Terminations - Small Diameter Wire Ropes Copper & Zinc Plated Copper Oval Sleeves (For Galvanized Steel Aircraft Cable) SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 145 Cable Size Nicopress Oval Sleeves Plain Zinc Plated Copper Stock # Copper Stock # Approx. Wt. /M Tool Nicopress Application Tool Selection Hand Tools 3512 Hydraulic Tool 635 Bench Type Hydraulic Tool 5606 Battery Powered Tool # of Crimps Required 3512 Die Stock # #ofcrimps Required 635 Die Stock # # of Crimps Required Compression Die 1/ B 27-1-B B / B B B OVAL-B4 1 OVAL B4 1 6-OVAL-B4 1 # of Crimps Required 1/ C 28-1-C 3 3/ G 28-2-G 5 1/ M** 28-3-M C CGMP* 51-G CGMP* 51-M CGMP* 63V-XPM* 1 12-OVAL-C 1 OVAL C 1 6-OVAL-C OVAL-G 1 OVAL G 1 6-OVAL-G OVAL-M 1 OVAL M 1 6-OVAL-M 2 5/ P 28-4-P P CGMP* 3 12-OVAL-P 2 OVAL P 1 6-OVAL-P 2 63V-XPM* 3/ X 28-6-X X OVAL-X 2 OVAL X 1 6-OVAL-X 2 63-XPM* 7/ F F F OVAL-F2 2 OVAL F2 1 6-OVAL-F2 2 1/ F6** F F OVAL-F6 2 OVAL F6 1 6-OVAL-F6 3 3V-F6:X:M 5/ G G G OVAL-G9 3 OVAL G9 1 6-OVAL-G9 4 3/ H H H OVAL-H5 4 OVAL H5 1 6-OVAL-H5 5 7/ J J OVAL-J8 5 OVAL J / K K OVAL-K8 6 OVAL K / M M OVAL M / N N OVAL N * Model also available with Cable Cutter. Specify 64-CGMP/Cutter Tool or 63 V-XPM/Cutter Tool. (Other Tools Available) ** Nicopress is rolling out a new identification system on its Copper and Zinc-Plated Copper Sleeves. Nicopress sleeves are the only product to be imprinted with the correct wire size and tool groove. This aids customers in identifying the correct sleeve, wire rope diameter and swagging tool groove; and provides a visual quality assurance check. FITTINGS & BLOCKS Stainless Steel Oval Sleeves (For Stainless Steel Aircraft Cable) Nicopress Oval Sleeves Nicopress Application Tool Selection Approx. Hand Tools 3512 Hydraulic Tool 635 Bench Type Hydraulic Tool 5606 Battery Powered Tool Cable Stainless Steel Size Stock /M Tool # of Crimps 3512 Die Stock # of Crimps 635 Die Stock # of Crimps 5606 Die Stock # of Crimps Required Required Required Required 1/ VB B / VB B OVAL-B4 1 OVAL B B / VB B OVAL-B4 1 OVAL B B / VC C OVAL-C 1 OVAL C C-887 1/ VG G OVAL-G 1 OVAL G G M / VM OVAL-M 1 OVAL M M-850 (Overlapped) 3/ VP P OVAL-P 3 OVAL VP / VX 31 3-X OVAL-X - OVAL X / VF F OVAL-F2 2 (Overlapped) OVAL F / VF F6 - OVAL F (Other Tools Available)

148 146 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Tin Plated Copper Oval Sleeves (For Stainless Steel Aircraft Cable) Nicopress Oval Nicopress Application Tool Selection Cable Tin Plated Approx. Hand Tools 3512 Hydraulic Tool 635 Bench Type Hydraulic Tool 5606 Battery Powered Tool Size Copper /M Tool # of Crimps # of Crimps 635 Die # of Crimps Compression # of Crimps Stock # Required 3512 Die Stock # Required Stock # Required Die Required 3/ VB B OVAL-B4 1 OVAL B4 1 6-OVAL-B4 1 1/ VC 3 51-C CGMP* 1 12-OVAL-C 1 OVAL C 1 6-OVAL-C 1 3V-CGMP 3/ VG 6 51-G CGMP* 3V-CGMP 1 12-OVAL-G 1 OVAL G 1 6-OVAL-G 1 51-M / VM CGMP* 3 63V-XPM* 3 12-OVAL-M 1 OVAL M 1 6-OVAL-M 2 3V-CGMP 2 51-P / VP CGMP* 3 63V-XPM* 3 12-OVAL P 2 OVAL P 1 6-OVAL-P 2 3V-CGMP 2 51-X / VX 50 63V-XPM* 4 12-OVAL-X 2 OVAL X 1 6-OVAL-X 2 3V-F6:X:M 2 7/ VF F OVAL-F2 2 OVAL F2 1 3-F OVAL-F2 2 1/ VF F OVAL-F6 2 OVAL F6 1 6-OVAL-F6 3 5/ VG G OVAL-G9 3 OVAL G9 1 6-OVAL-G9 4 3/ VH H OVAL-H5 4 OVAL H5 1 6-OVAL-H5 5 7/ VJ OVAL-J8 5 OVAL J / VK OVAL-K8 6 OVAL K / VM OVAL M / VN OVAL N * Model also available with Cable Cutter. Specify 64-CGMP/Cutter Tool or 63 V-XPM/Cutter Tool. (Other Tools Available) Copper Stop Sleeves (For Galvanized Steel Aircraft Cable) Nicopress Stop Sleeves Nicopress Application Tool Selection ** Typical Cable Plain Approx. Hand Tools 3512 Hydraulic Tool 635 Bench Type Hydraulic Tool 5606 Battery Powered Tool Holding Size Copper Strength of Tool # of Crimps # of Crimps 635 Die # of Crimps Compression # of Crimps Stock # /M 3512 Die Stock # Stop Sleeve Required Required Stock # Required Die Required 1/ B BA / B B4B 2 (Overlapped) 51-B OVAL-B OVAL-B C C 2 1/16 64-CGMP* 1 12-OVAL-C OVAL-C Q # 2 51-Q Q / J 8 51-MJ 1 12-J J Q * 2 51-Q Q VG 64-CGMP* / J 8 51-MJ 1 12-J J VG 64-CGMP* / M MJ M OVAL-M 1 1, VM 64-CGMP* / M MJ M OVAL-M 1 1, VM 64-CGMP* / M MJ M OVAL-M 2 2, VM 64-CGMP* / F F OVAL-F STOP-F6 2 3,500 5/ F F OVAL-F STOP-F6 2 4,000 3/ F F OVAL-F STOP-F6 2 - # Electro-Galvanized Steel Sleeves * Model also available with Cable Cutter. Specify 64-CGMP/Cutter Tool or 63 V-XPM Cutter Tool. **Electro-Galvanized Steel Sleeves. (Other Tools Available)

149 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 147 Aluminum Oval Sleeves (For Steel Aircraft Control Cable & Wire Rope) Nicopress Aluminum Oval Sleeves Cable Size Aluminum Stock # Approx. /M Tool Nicopress Application Tool Selection Hand Tools 3512 Hydraulic Tool 635 Bench Type Hydraulic Tool 5606 Battery Powered Tool #of Crimps Required 3512 Die Stock # #of Crimps Required 635 Die Stock # # of Crimps Required Compression Die # of Crimps Required 3/ VB B OVAL-B VB4 1 1/ VC 1 51-C OVAL-C 1 OVAL C VC 1 64-CGMP* 3/ VG 3 51-G Overlapped VG VG VG 2 (Overlapped) 64-CGMP* 51-M-850 1/ VM VM VM VM 2 64-CGMP* 51-P-850 5/ VP VP VP VP 2 64-CGMP* 3/ VX X VX VX VX 2 1/ VF F VF F VF6 4 5/ VG G VG92 4 VG VG9 4 OVAL G9 1 3/ VH5 65 3H OVAL-H5 5 OVAL H VH5 5 7/ VK OVAL-K8 6 OVAL K / VM VM VM OVAL M1 3 * Model also available with Cable Cutter. Specify 64 CGMP/Cutter Tool or 63 V-XPM/Cutter Tool. (Other Tools Available) FITTINGS & BLOCKS Aluminum Stop Sleeves (For Steel Aircraft Control Cable & Wire Rope) Nicopress Stop Sleeves Nicopress Application Tool Selection 635 Bench Type Hydraulic Approx. Hand Tools 3512 Hydraulic Tool Cable Aluminum Tool 5606 Battery Powered Tool Size Stock # /M Tool # of Crimps 3512 Die # of Crimps Required Stock # Required 635 Die Stock # # of Crimps Required Compression Die # of Crimps Required 51-C-887 1/ VC CGMP* 1 12-OVAL-C OVAL-C 1 3/ J MJ 3-MJ 1 12-J J 1 1/ J MJ 3-MJ 1 12-J J 1 5/ M MJ 3-MJ 1 12-M OVAL-M 1 3/ M MJ 3-MJ 1 12-M OVAL-M 1 1/ VF F OVAL-F STOP-F6 2 5/ VF F OVAL-F STOP-F6 2 3/ VF F OVAL-F STOP-F6 2 * Model also available with Cable Cutter. Specify 64 CGMP/Cutter Tool or 63 V-XPM/Cutter Tool. (Other Tools Available)

150 148 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Nicopress Tools No. 51 Tool Each tool has a single sleeve-pressing groove for the size of the cable. Range accommodated is 3/64-7/32. Tool Length is 18-1/4. Shipping is 5-1/4 pounds. No. 64-CGMP Tool The 64-CGMP has 4 grooves. Used for Oval Sleeves in the range of cables sizes 1/16 thru 5/32. The C groove is also used for the No C 1/16 Copper Stop Sleeve. The 64-CGMP with optional Cable Cutter (shown here) cuts mechanical cable sizes up thru 7/32 Tool Length is 20. Shipping is 6 pounds. No Hand Compression Tool Quick change Compression dies accommodate 1/32 thru 1/2 diameter cable. Swivel Head pivots 180 o for hard-to-reach splices. 12 Ton Output. 13 pounds. Length is 23. No. 635 Hydraulic Tool Used for larger Nicopress sleeves requiring greater pressing effort. Compression dies will press oval sleeves for cables ranging 3/64 to 5/8. Optional pneumatic and electric-powered pumps available. The 2498 Cable Cutter Die cuts up to 5/8 diameter cable with no unraveled strands. Model 5606 Battery - Powered Tool One-Handed Operation. Dies allow swaging up to 3/8 (10 mm) wire. Jaws rotate 360 o for ease of use in confined spaces. Weather-resistant housing. Audible By-Pass when predetermined pressure is achieved. Crimping Jaws can be opened mid-cycle to adjust connection. Crimp cycle times is less than 6 seconds. Battery Charge time is less than 1 hour. Cutting dies are available. : 8 lbs. with battery. Dimensions 20.5 L x 4 H x 2,5 W. Efficiency: Approx. 250 crimps per charge for 1/4 No F6 Sleeve Connector.

151 Stainless Steel Fittings SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Stainless Steel Forged Anchor Shackle Item Stock Diameter Pin Diameter WLL /4 5/ lb S0116-FS10 3/8 7/ lb /2 5/ lb /8 3/ lb S0116-FS16 5/8 3/ lb Stainless Steel Forged Wire Rope Clip Item Wire Rope Diameter / lb / lb / lb / lb / lb. S / lb. S / lb. S / lb. FITTINGS & BLOCKS 304 Stainless Steel Standard Thimble Item Size Groove Width Eye Width Eye Length Mat l Thickness / lb / lb. S0123-FS10** 3/ lb / lb / lb. ** This thimble is 316 stainless steel. 304 Stainless Steel Heavy Thimble Item Size Groove Width Eye Width Eye Length Mat l Thickness / lb / lb / lb / lb / lb.

152 150 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Stainless Steel Jaw & Jaw Turnbuckle Forged Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Eye & Eye Turnbuckle Forged Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Jaw & Eye Turnbuckle Forged Stainless Steel Dimensions Item Size Adjust C D E WLL S0108-JJ07 1/ lb lb. S0108-JJ08 5/ lb lb. S0108-JJ10 3/ lb lb. S0108-JJ13 1/ lb lb. S0108-JJ16 5/ lb lb. S0108-JJ20 3/ lb lb. S0108-JJ lb lb. S0108-JJ lb lb. S0108-JJ / lb lb. Note: Meets WLL and Dimensions of ASTM Specification F Type 1, Class G. Dimensions Item Size Adjust C D WLL S0107-EE07 1/ lb lb. S0107-EE08 5/ lb lb. S0107-EE10 3/ lb lb. S0107-EE13 1/ lb lb. S0107-EE16 5/ lb lb. S0107-EE20 3/ lb lb. S0107-EE lb lb. S0107-EE lb lb. S0107-EE / lb lb. Note: Meets WLL and Dimensions of ASTM Specification F Type 1, Class D. Dimensions Item Size Adjust C D E WLL S0109-JE07 1/ lb lb. S0109-JE08 5/ lb lb. S0109-JE10 3/ lb lb. S0109-JE13 1/ lb 1.55 lb. S0109-JE16 5/ lb lb. S0109-JE20 3/ lb lb. S0109-JE lb lb. S0109-JE lb lb. S0109-JE / ,500 lb lb. Note: Meets WLL and Dimensions of ASTM Specification F Type 1, Class H. Stainless Steel Forged Shoulder Eye Bolt Forged Stainless Steel Item Size Thread Length Length Under Shoulder Eye Diameter D Thread WLL S / / lb. S / / lb. S / / lb. S / / lb. S / / lb. S / / lb. S / / lb. S / / lb. S / / lb. S / / lb.

153 McKissick Snatch Blocks Champion Blocks - Single SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 151 Forged alloy heat treated hooks. Forged steel swivel tees, yokes and shackles. Hook and shackle assemblies on 4-1/2 through 14 sizes can be interchanged. Can be furnished with bronze bushings or roller bearings. Opening feature permits insertion of rope while block is suspended from gin-pole. 3 thru and 419 blocks have exclusive bolt retaining spring to assure no lost bolts. Can be furnished with S-4320 hook latch. Pressure lube fittings feature dual rated wireline sheaves. Fatigue Rated. 4-1/2 and larger are RFID Equipped. Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these blocks meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B with Hook 419 with Shackle 404 Tailboard Sheave Diameter Bearing Code 418 with Hook Stock 419 with Shackle 404 Tail Board Wire Rope Size ++ Working Load Limit (tons)* 418 with Hook Each 419 with Shackle 404 Tailboard Replacement Sheave Stock Replacement Latch Stock **3 BB /16-3/ **3 BB /16-3/ **4-1/2 BB /8-1/ BB /8-3/ RB /8-3/ BB /8-3/ RB /8-3/ BB /8-3/ RB /8-3/ BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / BB RB * Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. ** Available in Bronze Bushed only. 3 and 4-1/2 have self lubricating Bronze Bushing. +Fitted with 1-1/4 ID Swivel Eye. ++ May be furnished in other rope sizes. Note: When ordering, please specify: size, block number, hook or shackle, bronze bushed or roller bearing and wire rope size. Note: Tail Board does not contain the spool that is required with the hook (418) and shackle (419) snatch blocks. FITTINGS & BLOCKS

154 152 Champion Blocks - Double SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Light champion snatch block as a double sheave block. Drop forged swivel hook or swivel shackle. Can be furnished with bronze bushings or roller bearings. Opening feature permits easy insertion of wire rope in both sheaves with removal of one bolt. Can be furnished with S-4320 hook latch. Pressure lube fittings. Fatigue rated. 4-1/2 to 10 models furnished with dual rated wireline sheaves. All sizes are RFID Equipped. Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these blocks meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B Double with Hook 408/409 Snatch Blocks Sheave Diameter Bearing Code Stock 408 with Hook 409 with Shackle Wire Rope Size ++ Working Load Limit (tons)* Each 408 with Hook 409 with Shackle Replacement Sheave Stock Replacement Latch Stock 409 Double with Shackle +4-1/2 BB /8-1/ BB /8-3/ RB /8-3/ BB /8-3/ RB /8-3/ BB /8-3/ RB /8-3/ BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / * Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. + Available in Bronze Bushed only. ++ May be furnished in other Wire Rope sizes. Note: When ordering, please specify: size, block number, hook or shackle, bronze bushed or roller bearing and wire rope size.

155 Western Wire Rope Blocks SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 153 Diamond & Oval Patterns Laser cut painted side plates (can be furnished in galvanized upon request). Grade 5 bolts secured with lock washers and staked nuts. All sizes feature bronze bushed steel sheaves with larger bearing diameter for extended block life. New style hanger for fitting attachment. Available with hanger only (no fitting). For reeving information, see page 158. Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these blocks meet other critical performance requirements include fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability, not addressed by ASME B T-641-B Block Size Fitting Diamond Pattern w/ Bronze Bushed Steel Sheaves 641-B Single 642-B Double Oval Pattern w/ Bronze Bushed Steel Sheaves 661-B Single 662-B Double FITTINGS & BLOCKS 4 T T T T S S S S J J J E E E S-642-B * Fitting Type: T - Hook with Latch; S - Round Pin Shackle; J - Oblong Eye; E - Swivel Shackle Eye. Block Size Sheave Size Outside Diameter Rim Thickness Wire Rope Size Working Load Limit (tons)* Single Double Each Single Double 4 4 3/4 3/ / /4 5/ /4 5/ * Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.

156 154 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS Western Manila Rope Blocks Wood Blocks - Manila Rope HS-21-B Laser cut side plates. Grade 5 bolts secured with lock washers and staked nuts. Bronze bushed sheaves with larger bearing diameter for extended block life. Beckets furnished on all blocks. For reeving information, see page 158. Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, these blocks meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties and material traceability addressed by ASME B Block Size Fitting Single Sheave 21 B Stock Double Sheave 22 B Stock Triple Sheave 23 B Stock 4 HS HS HS HS N N N N S S S S Block Size Outside Diameter Sheave Diameter Rim Thickness Center Pin Diameter Manila Rope Size Working Load Limit * Each 21 Single 22 Double 23 Triple 21 Single 22 Double 23 Triple / / / / * Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. Loose Side Hooks with Latch - Manila Rope Laser cut side plates. Grade 5 bolts secured with lock washers and staked nuts. Bronze bushed sheaves with larger bearing diameter for extended block life. HS-262 Double Block Size Fitting Manila Rope Size Outside Diameter Sheave Size Rim Thickness 261 B Stock 262 B Stock 263 B Stock Working Load Limit * 261 Single 262 Double 263 Triple 261 Single Each 262 Double 263 Triple 4 HS 1/ HS 5/ HS 3/ HS 7/ * Ultimate Load is 3 time the Working Load Limit. Fitting Type: HS - Latch Hook.

157 McKissick Easy Reeve Crane Blocks #380 Series Easy Reeve Hook Blocks SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 155 See Application and Warning Information on Pages of the 2014 The Crosby Group Catalog. Wide range of product available. - Capacity: 5 to 80 tons - Larger Models Available. - Sheave Sizes: 10 to Wire Line Sizes:7/16 to 1-1/4. Manufactured by an ISO 9001 and API QI certified facility. All single point shank hooks are genuine Crosby, forged alloy steel, Quenched and Tempered, and have the patented QUIC- CHECK markings (Duplex hooks are available on most sizes). The patented McKissick Split-Nut is the standard retention system for standard crane blocks up to 100 tons. Center Dead End to promote better travel under various reeving configurations. All Easy Reeve Blocks are furnished standard with Roller Bearings. Reeving Guides Standard -All Models. Blocks thru 25 tons use 319N hooks with S-4320 latches. Heavy Duty Positive Locking (PL) Latch-Models: 30 tons and larger. Sheave lubrication through center pin - Separate lube channel to each bearing. FITTINGS & BLOCKS Sheaves fully protected by side plates. Dual action hook (Swings and Rotates). Repair parts available through world wide distribution network. Design Factor of 4:1 (unless otherwise noted). All Easy Reeve blocks, 16 and larger, are furnished with McKissick Roll-Forged TM sheaves with flame hardened grooves. Look for the Orange Hook... the mark of genuine McKissick quality. Sheave Guards that open to allow block reeving without removing the rope end fitting. Flat Bottom side plate for self standing during reeving process. OPTIONS AVAILABLE: Duplex Hooks Swivel Tee and Shackle Assemblies Sheave Shrouds Anti Rotation-Locking Device Plate Steel Cheek s Third party testing with Certification available upon request. Forged Crosby alloy steel hooks with patented QUIC-CHECK markings and Heavy Duty positive locking hook latch.

158 156 SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS McKissick Overhaul Balls UB500 Series Top Swiveling Overhaul Balls S320 or S320N Eye Hook McKissick UB500 Model Overhaul Ball Assembly UB500 E Eye Hook Stock S1316A SHUR-LOC Eye Hook UB500 S SHUR-LOC Stock Working Load Limit (tons) Each Wire Rope Size Optional US-422T Wedge Sockets Model Wedge Socket Assy Stock Each Wedge Only Stock Each MB4T * MB4T * /8 US4T MB4T * /16 US4T /2 US4T MB4T * /2 US5T MB7T * /16 US5T /8 US5T MB7T * /8 US6T MB7T * /4 US6T MB7T * MB10T * MB10T * MB10T * MB10T * /8 US6T /4 US6T MB10T * /8 US8T MB12T * US8T /8 US10T MB12T * /4 US10T MB12T * MB12T * MB12T * MB15T * MB15T * MB15T * MB15T * MB20T * MB20T * MB20T * MB20T * MB25T MB25T MB25T MB30T MB30T Both styles available with optional McKissick Wedge Socket Assembly or S-421 TERMINATOR TM Wedge Socket UWO 422T TERMINATOR TM Wedge Only Sizes 4 tons through 10 tons available with Crosby s S1316A Positive Locking SHUR-LOC hook which may be used for lifting personnel. Meets the intent of OSHA Rule (g)(1)(i)(A) and (g)(4)(iv)(B). Design Factor 4:1. The top swivel design on the UB500 assures the ball remains stationary if the wire line spins. The swivel incorporates a sealed roller thrust bearing together with a grease fitting for easy lubrication. Each ball can be equipped with the new McKissick US-422T Wedge Socket which can be easily adjusted to fit various sizes of wire rope by changing the wedge (Ensure that correct wedge is used for selected wire rope size). All hooks used on UB500 Overhaul Balls (S320, S320N & S1316A) are forged from alloy steel. The S320 and S320N hooks come complete with latches. The S320 hook (PL Latch) and the S320N hook (S4320 latch), with the proper latch attached, may be used for personnel lifting when secured with proper device (Bolt, nut and pin for the PL latch; Cotter pin for the S4320 latch). Meets the intent of OSHA Rule (g)(1)(i)(A) and (g)(4)(iv)(B). 5/8 US8AT /4 US8AT /8 US8T US8T /8 US10T /4 US10T * Utilizes Crosby N style hooks with integrated latch. Replacement latch kit is S PL latch and S-4055 latch will not fit. Standard Crosby S-5 Thrust style swivels can not be used with UB500 Overhaul Balls. For replacement swivels, contact Crosby Customer Service.

159 UB500 Series Non Swiveling Overhaul Balls SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS 157 S320 or S320N Eye Hook S1316A SHUR-LOC Eye hook Sizes 4 tons through 10 tons available with Crosby s S1316A Positive Locking SHUR-LOC hook which may be used for lifting personnel. Meets OSHA Rule 1926,1431(g)(1)(i)(a) y 1926,1501(g)(4)(iv)(B). Design Factor 4:1. Each ball can be equipped with the new McKissick US-422T Wedge Socket which can be easily adjusted to fit various sizes of wire rope by changing the wedge (Ensure that correct wedge is used for selected wire rope size). All hooks used on UB500 Overhaul Balls (S320, S320N & S1316A) are forged from alloy steel. The S320 and S320N hooks come complete with latches. The S320 hook (PL latch) and the S320N hook (S4320 latch), with the proper latch attached, may be used for personnel lifting when secured with proper device (Bolt, nut and pin for the PL latch; Cotter pin for the S4320 latch). Meets the intent of OSHA Rule 1926,1431(g)(1)(i)(a) 0y 1926,1501(g)(4)(iv)(B). McKissick UB500 Model Overhaul Ball Assembly UB500 E Eye Hook Stock Both styles available with optional McKissick Wedge Socket Assembly UB500 S SHUR-LOC Stock Working Load Limit (tons) Each MB4NS * MB4NS * MB4NS * MB4NS * MS7NS * MS7NS * MS7NS * MS7NS * MB10NS * UWO 422T TERMINATOR TM Wedge Only Wire Rope Model Size Optional US-422T Wedge Sockets Wedge Socket Assy. Stock Each Wedge Only Stock 3/8 US4T /16 US4T /2 US4T /2 US5T /16 US5T /8 US5T /8 US6T /4 US6T MB10NS * MB10NS * MB10NS * /8 US6T /4 US6T MB10NS * /8 US8T MB12NS * US8T /8 US10T MB12NS * /4 US10T MB12NS * MB12NS * MB12NS * MB15NS * /8 US8AT MB15NS * /8 US8T /4 US8AT MB15NS * US8T MB15NS * /8 US10T /4 US10T * Utilizes Crosby N style hooks with integrated latch. Replacement latch kit is S PL latch and S-4055 latch will not fit. Each FITTINGS & BLOCKS Split Overhaul Ball Attaches easily to wire rope. Catalog Stock Wire Rope Size Each Ball Diameter A SHB /4-5/ SHB / SHB /2-5/ SHB /8-3/4-7/

160 158 Tackle Block Reeving SECTION 5-FITTINGS &BLOCKS THE REEVING OF TACKLE BLOCKS In reeving tackle blocks, there are many methods. The method discussed below is referred to as Right Angle reeving. Please consult your rigging manual for other methods of reeving. RIGHT ANGLE REEVING In reeving of tackle blocks, there are many methods. The method discussed below is referred to as Right Angle reeving. Please consult your rigging manual for other methods of reeving. RIGHT ANGLE REEVING In reeving a pair of tackle blocks, one of which has more than two sheaves, the hoisting rope should lead from one of the center sheaves of the upper block to prevent toppling and avoid injury to the rope. The two blocks should be placed so that the sheaves in the upper block are at right angles to those in the lower one, as shown in the following illustrations. Start reeving with the becket or dead end of the rope. Use a shackle block as the upper one of a pair and a hook block as the lower one as seen below. Sheaves in a set of blocks revolve at different rates of speed. Those nearest the lead line revolve at the highest rate of speed and wear out more rapidly. All sheaves should be kept well lubricated when in operation to reduce friction and wear. HOW TO FIGURE LINE PARTS Sheaves in a system of blocks rotate at different rates of speed, and have different loads. When raising and lowering, the line tension is not equal throughout the system. To help figure the number of parts of line to be used for a given load, or the line pull required for a given load, (for example, use Reeving Diagram. Only numbered lines shall be used in the calculation). The following ratio table is provided with examples of how to use it. The ratios are applicable for blocks as shown and also independent sheave systems that line is reeved through. Ratio A Bronze Bushed Sheaves Ratio B Anti-Friction Bearing Sheaves of Parts of Line Ratio A or B = Total Load to be Lifted Single Line Pull (lbs.) After calculating Ratio A or B, consult table to determine number of parts of line. Examples: To find the number of parts of line needed when weight load and single line pull are known and using Bronze Bushed Sheaves. 72,180 lbs. (load to be lifted) = 9.02 (Ratio A) 8,000 lbs. (single line pull) In table above refer to ratio 9.02 or next highest number, then check column under heading of Line Parts = 12 parts of line to be used for this load. Exercise care when block is standing in vertical position, as the potential for tipping exists. Potential causes of tipping are unstable work area, boom movement and the reeving process. If work area is unstable, lay block flat on side plate. To find the single line pull needed when weight of load and number of parts of lines are known and using Anti-Friction Bearing Sheaves. 68,000 lbs. (load to be lifted) = 9,290 lbs (ratio B of 8 part line) (Single Line Pull) 9,290 lbs. single line pull required to lift this load on 8 parts of a line.

161 Electric Chain Hoists SECTION 6-HOISTS &WINCHES HOISTS & WINCHES 159 EC Hook & Lug Suspension Models COFFING EC Models - High performance hoists engineered for heavy duty industrial service. Designed for safety, the EC incorporates mechanical load brake, motor brake, and overload clutch as standard. CAPACITIES & LIFTS - Rated loads from 1/4 to 5 Tons, with 10,15, and 20 - foot standard lifts. Other lifts available. Standard push button drop is 4 feet less than lift. VOLTAGE & MOTOR OPTIONS - 115/230, single phase; 230/460, 208, 220/380, 575- three phase. 60 hertz standard, 50 hertz available. Two-speed motors available (3 to 1 speed ratio). SUSPENSION OPTIONS - Rigid or swivel top hook, lug, plain, geared, and motorized trolly available. STANDARD FEATURES - Mechanical Load Brake, Multiple Disc Motor Brake, Ergonomic Designed Push Button Station, Five-Pocket Load Sheave, Limit switches, Solid State Starting Switch, Panel Plate, Chain End Stop assembly, Overload Clutch, Helical Gearing and Oil-Bathed Transmission. SMALL FRAME DESIGN - Features housings of cast aluminum alloy construction for minimum weight. Engineered and designed for use with motors up to 1 HP. LARGE FRAME DESIGN - Features load bearing housings of ductile iron construction for maximum strength. Non-load bearing housings of cast aluminum alloy for minimum weight. Engineered and designed for use with higher torque 2 and 3 HP three phase motors. DURABLE CONSTRUCTION - Built in compliance with ASME/ANSIB30.16 and CSA standards. ACCESSORIES & OPTIONS - Full line available to meet a variety of applications. LIFETIME WARRANTY HOISTS & WINCHES Capacity Model Frame of Motor Lift Speed (FPM) Headroom Housing Dimensions Net (tons) Size* Chains HP Single Two H W L ** 500 1/4 EC-0516 S 1 1/ / /8 23 3/ /4 EC-0532 S 1 1/ / /8 23 3/ /4 EC-0564 S / /8 23 3/ /2 EC-1009 S 1 1/ / /8 2 3/ /2 EC-1016 S 1 1/ / /8 23 3/ /2 EC-1032 S / /8 23 3/ EC-2004 S 2 1/ / /8 23 3/ EC-2008 S 2 1/ / /8 23 3/ EC-2012 S / /8 23 3/ EC-2016 S / /8 23 3/ EC-2032 L / / / EC-2048 L / / / EC-4006 S / /8 23 3/ EC-4008 S / /8 23 3/ EC-4016 L / / / EC-4024 L / / / EC-6005 S / / EC-6010 L /8 10 7/ / / EC-6016 L /8 10 7/ / / EC-8008 L /8 10 7/ / / EC-8012 L /8 10 7/ / / ,000 5 EC L /8 10 7/ / / ,000 5 EC L /8 10 7/ / / * S = Small frame hoist, parallel mounted, single or three phase. L=Large frame hoist, cross mounted, three phase only. ** For 10 ft. lift, top hook suspension and lug suspension units. Note: For complete dimensional data, refer to Coffing Dimensional Data book.

162 160 SECTION 6-HOISTS &WINCHES JLC Top Hook and Lug Suspension COFFING JLC Models - Designed for industrial duty performance. Compact in size, the JLC features a multiple disc motor brake, overload clutch and chain end stop for safety. CAPACITIES AND LIFTS - Rated loads from 1/8 to 2 Tons, with 10, 15 and 20 foot standard lifts. Other lifts available. Standard push button drop is 4 feet less than lift. CSA approved. VOLTAGES - 115/230 - single phase; 230/460, 208, 380, 415, 575, three - phase, 60 hertz standard, 50 hertz available. TWO-SPEED HOIST MODELS - Optional with 3 to 1 speed ratio, threephase, single voltage only. STANDARD FEATURES - Panel plate for easy access to controls and motor leads, Five-pocket load sheave provides smoother operation and less chain wear, Mechanical overload protection device protects operator, hoist and support structures from damaging overloads, chain jamming, and reverse phasing, and chain end stop assembly for added safety. LIMIT SWITCHES - Adjustable to regulate upper and lower load travel. Brass nuts standard for improved repeatability and chain positioning. OIL BATH TRANSMISSION - Precision machined alloy steel gears run oil bath for longer, quieter operation. NEMA 3R PUSH BUTTON STATION - Ergonomic design fits operator s hand for thumb or two-handed operation. 24 Volt Control for operator s safety. 115 Volt Control available upon request. FRAME - Compact aluminum housing for portability and ease of installation. ACCESSORIES - Full line of accessories available. CHAIN CONTAINER - Standard on lifts up to 20 ft. single chain / 10 ft. double chain. Chain containers available for longer lifts. LIFETIME WARRANTY JLC Hoist Specifications Capacity Lift Speed (FPM) Housing Dimensions Model Motor of Headroom HP Chains (In.)* (Kg) + (tons) Single Two H W L Net ** /8 JLC / /8 8-11/ / / /4 JLC / /8 8-11/ / / /4 JLC / /8 8-11/ / / /2 JLC / /8 8-11/ / / /2 JLC /8 8-11/ / / JLC /8 8-11/ / / JLC / / / / Metric rated option available. * For hook and lug models only. ** and dimensions for 10 ft. lift, single phase, top hook and lug suspension units. Note: For complete dimensional data, refer to Coffing Dimensional Databook.

163 SECTION 6-HOISTS &WINCHES 161 Model SLC Hoist Easy to Use Small, compact design-commercial & industrial applications. Lightweight and portable. Easy installation and maintenance. H4 duty cycle (300 motor starts /hour). Special Mode Features Friction-type overload device prevents lifting excessive overloads. 10 pocket oblique lay liftwheel provides longer chain life and extended service. NEMA 4 industrial-rated pendant control. Lifetime, grease-lubricated gear train - less maintenance. Alloy load chain (zinc plated optional). Thermally protected motor prevents damage from possible overheating. D.C. braking system for positive load control. Durability - Epoxy powder-coat finish on rugged cast aluminum alloy frame. Model Capacity of Chains Lifting Speed (FPM) Voltage Headroom Housing Dimensions Ship Standard Optional H W L SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 28 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 28 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 28 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 28 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 28 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 28 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 34 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 28 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 28 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 34 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 28 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 34 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 34 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 34 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 32 SLC / /16 4-1/ / /2 32 Note: Standard lifts 10 ft. Other lifts available. Standard push button drop is 4 ft. less than lift. HOISTS & WINCHES EMC and EMW Models 300 & 500 Lb. 500 lb. COFFING EMC & EMW Models - Compact chain and wire rope hoists designed for a variety of light duty applications. These models feature thermally protected motors. CAPACITIES & LIFT - Rated loads 300 and 500 pounds. 10 foot lift with 6 foot push button cord standard. VOLTAGES - 115V, single phase motors only. SUSPENSION - Swivel top and bottom hooks with safety latches standard. POWER CORD - Provided with grounded 3 prong plug for easy installation in any portability. Weighs less than 25 lb. LIMIT SWITCHES - Upper and lower limit switches on chain models and upper paddle limit switch on wire rope model regulates load travel. ELECTROMAGNETIC BRAKE - Quick acting for positive load control. THERMAL MOTOR PROTECTION - Standard to prevent overheating. LIGHT DUTY OPERATION - Rated for intermittent duty applications (10 minute run time per hour maximum). ACCESSORIES - LLC-05 chain container (shown) available for EMC models. UL LISTED LIFETIME WARRANTY Capacity Model of Chains Standard Lift (ft.) Motor HP Lift Speed (FPM) Headroom Housing Dimensions H W L Net 300 EMC-300B / /2 4 3/8 6 3/8 14 1/ EMC-500B / /8 6 3/8 14 1/ EMW-500B 2- part wire rope 10 1/ /4 4 3/8 6 3/8 14 1/4 19 Note: For complete dimensional data, refer to Coffing Dimensional Databook.

164 162 Manual Chain Hoists SECTION 6-HOISTS &WINCHES LHH Hand Chain Hoist Coffing LHH Models - Stamped steel hand chain hoists are an excellent low cost option in the Coffing line. The compact, lightweight design is ideal for construction and contractor applications where portability and easy rigging are critical. Capacities & Lift - Rated loads from 1/2 to 20 Tons in stock with standard lifts of 10, 15 and 20 feet. Standard hand chain drop is 2 feet less than lift. Other lifts and hand chain drops, and Ton models are available - consult the factory. Compact and Lightweight - Designed for portability and easy installation. Compact gear housing provides low headroom. Easy To Operate - Lubricated bearings and bushings, bearing-mounted pinions, and heat-treated spur gearing ensure smooth and efficient operation with minimal effort. Safety & Load Control - Mechanical load brake engages instantly for precise load holding and positioning. 360 o swivel hooks with safety latches for positive load engagement. Durable - Through hardened load chain provides added strength and wear resistance for greater chain life. Stamped steel housing withstands rugged conditions. Easy To Maintain - Designed for easy inspection and maintenance. Hoist can be dismantled easily with simple hand tools. Lifetime Warranty LHH Chain Hoist Specifications Capacity PIN # PIN # PIN # Strands of Min. Headroom Hand Chain Avg. Pull to Lift Net Model Lbs. Tons 10 Ft. Lift ** 15 Ft. Lift ** 20 Ft. Lift ** Load Chain Overhaul /1 Ft. Lift Rated Load /2 LHH-1/2 LHH / LHH-1 LHH LHH LHH / /2 LHH-1-1/2 LHH LHH LHH / LHH-2 LHH LHH LHH LHH-3 LHH LHH / LHH / LHH / LHH / LHH / LHH / LHH / x2 99x * LHH / x2 97x * LHH x2 104x * LHH / x2 101x * LHH /8 1000x2 104x * 25, 30,40 and 50 Ton Models available by Special Order. ** Standard lifts shown - Other lifts available LHH-20 through LHH-50 models have two hand chains.

165 SECTION 6-HOISTS &WINCHES 163 LSB-B Ratchet Lever Hoist Coffing LSB-B Model - Stamped steel ratchet lever hoists are lightweight and durable. The LSB-B s low handle effort and 360 o rotating handle make it easy to operate, and the onehanded free chaining mechanism provides easy rigging. The LSB-B is ideal for construction and commercial applications. Capacities & Lift - Rated loads of 3/4, 1-1/2, 3, and 6 Tons, with 5, 10, 15 and 20 foot standard lifts. Other lifts available. Optional Load Limiter - Load Limiter alerts operator of a possible overload by allowing the handle to rotate without lifting the higher-than capacity load. The load limiter can be field-installed. Rugged and Lightweight - Impact resistant, stamped steel housing withstands rigorous use. Compact design is portable and easy to rig. Low Handle Effort - Double reduction gearing and short, cushioned-grip handle provide easy operation with minimal handle effort. 360 o Rotating Handle - Provides versatile rigging options when used in confined spaces. Easy Free Chaining - State-of-the-art free wheeling mechanism allows quick and easy one-handed take-up and positioning of slack chain. Positive Load Control - Enclosed screw-and-disc brake type load brake stays clean and dry for positive load positioning. Latches on hooks provide positive load engagement. Options - Shipyard hook available for 1-1/2 Ton and 3 Ton Models. Lifetime Warranty Capacity Model Lift (ft.) * Strands of Min. Distance Handle Length Average Handle Net * Load Chain between Hooks Lbs Tons (in) Effort (in) /4 LSB-1500B /8 9-1/ /4 LSB-1500B /8 9-1/ /4 LSB-1500B /8 9-1/ /4 LSB-1500B /8 9-1/ /2 LSB-3000B / /2 LSB-300B / /2 LSB-3000B / /2 LSB-3000B / LSB-6000B / / LSB-6000B / / LSB-6000B / / LSB-6000B / / LSB-12000B /4 14-9/ LSB-12000B /4 14-9/ LSB-12000B /4 14-9/ LSB-12000B /4 14-9/ * Standard Lifts shown. Other lifts available. HOISTS & WINCHES TB-602 Mini-Hoist 550 lbs. Capacity 5 Ft. Standard Lift Plated Load Chain Weston-type Load Brake Rubber Hand Grip for better comfort and security Lightweight Design (only 6 lbs.) for ease of Portability Use in confined conditions with one-hand operation Forged Upper and Lower Hooks with Latches Impact Resistant, all-steel frame, gear case and cover Hardened link-type steel load chain for strength and long wear Free Wheeling feature serves to quickly attach the load Metric Rated

166 164 SECTION 6-HOISTS &WINCHES Wire Rope Lever Tool COFFING GT MODELS - Designed for heavyduty pulling, rigging, dragging, stretching and lifting applications. GT Its versatility and ability makes it perfect for use in the construction and transportation industries, as well as hundreds of other industrial applications. Coffing GT Models are lightweight, compact and built tough for long life and trouble-free service. CAPACITIES - Rated loads from 1 to 3 tons. 32 ft. of wire rope on 1 and 3 Ton models / 65 ft. of wire rope on 2 ton models. GT SMOOTH OPERATION - Large surface area of dual clamping jaws provide an evenly distributed grip for smooth operation and low wear. LIFETIME WARRANTY GT GT Wire Rope Lever Tool Specifications Model Rated Capacity (tons) Product Code Standard Wire Rope Length (ft.) Wire Rope Diameter Lever Length Extended Lever Length Retracted Rope Advance + Overall Dimensions Net * Net ** GT / x 9.1 x GT / x 13.0 x GT / x 12.8 x Per full stroke at rated load. * Wire Rope included. ** Less Wire Rope.

167 AMH Hand Chain Hoist SECTION 6-HOISTS &WINCHES AMH Lever Chain Hoist 165 AMH Hand Chain Hoists offer the ideal lifting solution from 1/4 to 30 metric ton capacity for construction and maintenance applications where portability and easy rigging are critical. Increased efficiency on MA series by sealed ball bearings on the chain wheel, additional pinion shaft bearing and close tolerances. Bolted Hook blocks allowing complete hook inspection per ASME B30 safety codes (Except MM003 is riveted). Lightweight and Durable all steel construction with powder coated finish and plated external components to resist corrosion. alloy Operation from any angle below due to radius hand chain cover. Double pawl disc type mechanical load brake is Self adjusting and insures positive load control (MM003 has single pawl). Double roller chain guide insures tracking and is open for inspection and cleaning of debris. Optional Overload Protection (V) is by one directional clutch that will only slip in the lift direction insuring that any load lifted can be lowered. (Not available on MM003). Meets: ASME/ANSI B30.16, OSHA, NASA-STD , EU Directives: 98/37/EC and ATEX rated II 3 GD c IIB 50 C X for limited use in Hazardous Environments. AMH Hand Chain Hoists offer 1/4 to 10 Ton capacities of rugged construction having 360 handle operation and free chaining for easy rigging and in tight places. Ideally suited for lifting or pulling during construction and maintenance operations where access is limited. More Capacity for more work and better value. Bolted Hook blocks allowing complete hook inspection per ASME B30 safety code (ML003 and ML005 are riveted). Lightweight and Durable all steel construction with powder coated finish and plated external components to resist corrosion. p Horseshoe shape chain guide allows operation in any orientation. Double pawl disc type mechanical load brake is Self adjusting and insures positive load control (ML003 and ML005 are single pawl). Optional Overload Protection (V) is by one directional clutch that will slip in the lift direction insuring that any load lifted can be lowered. (Not available on ML003 and ML005). Meets: ASME/ANSI B30.21, OSHA, NASA- STD EU Directives: 98/37/EC and ATEX rated Ex II 3 GD c IIB 50 o CXfor limited use in Hazardous Environments. HOISTS & WINCHES Capacity Lbs. Tons Model/Pin # Falls Headroom Min. (In.) WLL Avg. Net Extra Lift/Ft 8/10Ft Lift 8 Ft. Lift 550 1/4t MM Ft. Lift /2t MA t MA t MA t MA t MA t MA t MA t MA t MA *Notes: Additional lift and hand chain lengths can be specified. The standard hand chain drop is 2 Ft. less than lift. 15 Ft. & 20 Ft. Lifts also standards. WLL Capacity Model/Pin # Net Handle Headroom Length WLL Falls Min. Max US Lg. Avg. Lbs Tons Metric Extra Min. Tons Lbs (1) 5 Ft. Lift 10 Ft. Lift 10 Ft Lift/ Lift Ft 550 1/4* ML ML /2* ML ML /4* LA LA * LA LA / LA LA / LA020-05Lever LA Chain 1 Hoists / LA LA / LA LA LA LA LA LA *Notes: 1. Minimum capacity is the load required to set the automatic brake. 2. Additional lifts are available ft & 20 ft lifts are also considered standard.

168 166 Beam Clamps SECTION 6-HOISTS &WINCHES Permanently Fixed Adjustable Girder Clamps Designed for light industrial applications. Ideal for permanent overhead anchor point above machinery or equipment. Positive Grip on flange. Lightweight one piece adjustable design. For use at 0 degrees from vertical. Model 0 o Vertical Jaw Grip Adjustment inch min.-max Jaw Aperture inch Inside Shackle Crown to Spacer Average PFC /2 7/8 1-1/2 4.6 PFC /2 7/8 1-1/2 5.5 PFC /2 7/8 1-1/2 8.5 Swivel Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps One piece adjustable design. Used for lifting, pulling an anchor point. Added benefit of horizontal jaw adjustment. Full length/width of swivel jaw anchors on flange Integrated lifting shackle. Positive Grip left/right threaded adjusting bar. For use at up to 15 degrees from vertical. Approved for Personnel tie-off use o Vertical Jaw Grip adjustment inch Jaw Aperture Inside Shackle Crown to Average Model Lbs Kg min.-max Spacer Inch S / /4 22 S5A / /2 31 S / /2 31 S6A / /2 34 S / /2 47 Fixed Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps One piece adjustable design. Used for lifting, pulling or as an anchor point. No tools required for mounting/removal. Integrated lifting shackle. Positive Grip left/right threaded adjusting bar. Designed with maximum safe jaw grip adjustment. For use at up to 15 degrees from, vertical. Approved for Personnel tie-off use. Model 0-15 o Vertical Lbs Kg Jaw Grip Adjustment inch min.-max Jaw Aperture Inside Shackle Crown to Spacer Inch Average S /2 7/8 3-3/4 9 S /2 7/8 3-3/4 11 S2A /2 7/8 3-3/4 18 S /8 3-7/8 24 S3X /2 7/8 4-1/8 22 S3A /8 4-1/8 33 S4S /8 4-1/8 41 S4A /8 4-1/2 62 S /8 109 S /2 5-7/8 129 Model Fixed Jaw Adjustable Girder Dog One piece adjustable design. Used for lifting, pulling as an anchor point. Enhanced by balanced distribution of side points. Maximum grip & hold and safety. No tools required. Positive Grip left/right threaded adjusting bar. For use at up to 15 degrees from vertical. Approved for Personnel tie-off use o Vertical Lbs Kg Jaw Grip Adjustment inch min.-max Jaw Aperture Inside Shackle Crown to Spacer inch Inside Shackle Width Average S /8 4-9/ S /2 8-1/8 4-9/ S /8 5-1/8 166 S /2 8-1/8 5-1/8 198 S /2 8-1/8 5-1/8 203 S /8 5-1/8 236

169 SECTION 6-HOISTS &WINCHES 167 Adjustable Universal Rail Lifting Clamp Designed to grip on all standard AREA Rail & Crane Rail. Positive Grip through left/right threaded adjusting bar. Lightweight & versatile adjustability. No tools required. Integrated lifting shackle. Ideal for construction, erection and maintenance. Model 0 o Vertical Inside Shackle Average Jaw Grip Crown to Adjustment Lbs Kg Spacer inch R STD AREA 3-3/8 13 R Rail & Crane Rail 4-1/4 21 Adjustable Runway Beam Trolley with Anti-Drop Plates One piece adjustable design. Hand push, easy to use, ball bearing wheels. Adapts to beam width by turning left/right hand threaded adjusting screw. Includes locking collar and wheel guard anti-drop plates for maximum safety. Integrated lifting shackle. No tools required. Ideal for temporary and permanent installations requiring speedy installation and use. Approval for personnel tie-off use* Model 0 o Vertical Width Adjustment Inch Min-Max To Accommodate Beam Flange Thickness (max) Inside Shackle Width Average Lbs Kg B /8 4-3/4 50 B /4 3-7/8 113 B /2 1-1/2 5 1/ HOISTS & WINCHES Adjustable Runway Beam Trolleys with Anti-Drop Plates Lightweight hand push, easy to use ball bearing wheels. Developed for lighter industrial applications. Adapts to beam width by turning left and right hand adjusting bar. Fitted with width adjustment locking mechanism. Wheel guarding anti-drop plates. No additional width adjusting tools required. Positive Grip Clamps. Approval for personnel tie-off use* Model 0 o Vertical Lbs Kg Width Adjustment inch min.-max To Accommodate Beam Flangle Thickness (max) Inside Shackle Crown to Spacer inch Average BA / BA BA Geared Runway Beam Trolley with Anti-Drop Plates One piece adjustable design. Hand geared for easy movement of heavy loads. Ball bearing wheel movement. Integrated lifting shackle. Adapts to beam width by turning left/right hand threaded adjusting screw. Includes locking collar and wheel guard anti-drop plates for maximum safety. Ideal for temporary and permanent installations requiring speedy installation and use. Approval for personnel tie-off use* 0 o Vertical Width Adj. Inch Min-Max To Accommodate Beam Flange Thickness (max) inch Inside Shackle Width Average Model Lbs Kg GBT / GBT / GBT /2 5 1/8 183 GBT GBT /4 440

170 168 CTA Plain & Geared Trolleys SECTION 6-HOISTS &WINCHES Trolleys & Other Accessories COFFING CT Model - Featuring enhanced design, and available in plain and geared models which can be modified to fit a wide range of beam sizes and styles. The CTA is designed to provide easy operation and superior performance in industrial lifting applications. CAPACITIES - Rated loads from 1/4 to 5 Tons in plain and geared models. Geared trolleys have standard 6 foot hand chain drop. Other hand chain drops available. RUGGED - Designed to provide superior performance and long, efficient service. EASY OPERATION - Lowest rolling effort of Coffing trolley lines. UNIVERSAL MOUNTING - Clevis accepts all Coffing hook-mounted hoists, or lugmounted hoists attach directly to load pins. ADJUSTABLE - Trolley easily adjusts to fit any beam flange within range of adjustment. WRAP-AROUND SIDE PLATES - Act as safety lugs to increase operator safety act as bumpers to protect wheels. DUAL TREAD WHEELS - Fully machined wheels fit any taper or flat flanged beams within the range of adjustment. Wheels include permanently lubricated, shielded ball bearings for long life and low maintenance. OPTIONS - Spark resistant and corrosion resistant wheels available. Track clamps available on 1/4 to 4 Ton models. LIFETIME WARRANTY Capacity Standard I-Beam Minimum Net Model Beam Width Radius Lbs Tons Height Curves Plain (P) Geared (G) 500 1/4 CT-05P(G) /2 CT-10P(G) CT-20P(G) CT-40P(G) CT-60P(G) CT-80P(G) ** CT-100P(G) ** * When ordering, specify P for plain trolley or G for geared trolley. ** Standard model for straight track only. Articulating model for 4 foot minimum radius curve available - consult factory. CBT Plain & Geared Trolleys COFFING CBT Models - Available in plain and geared models, the CBT is the economical choice for most applications. The trolley features steel wrap around side plates, dual tread wheels and lifetime lubricated shielded ball bearings. All CBT s features combine to ensure you a trolley that is smooth rolling, versatile and reliable. CAPACITIES - Rated loads from 1/4 to 5 Tons (Metric Rated). In plain and geared models. ECONOMICAL - Excellent low cost choice for most manual and light-duty powered applications. RUGGED - Designed to provide superior performance and long, efficient service. LOW ROLLING EFFORT - Geared models have standard 6 foot hand chain drop. Other hand chain drops available. UNIVERSAL HANGING CLEVIS - Accepts most hook-mounted hoists. ADJUSTABLE - Trolley easily adjusts to fit any beam flange within range of adjustment, up to an 8.7 flange width. WRAP-AROUND SIDE PLATES - Lugs provide additional security to increase operator safety and act as bumpers to protect wheels. DUAL TREAD WHEELS - Will fit any tapered or flat beam flange within range of adjustment. Wheels include permanently lubricated, shielded ball bearings for long life and low maintenance. LIFETIME WARRANTY Lbs Capacity* Tons Model ** Beam Height I-Beam Width Minimum Radius Curves Wheel Tread Net Diameter 500 1/4 CBTP /2 CBTP CBTP(G) /2 CBTP(G) CBTP(G) CBTP(G) ,000 5 CBTP(G) * Metric Rated. ** When ordering, specify P for plain trolley or G for geared trolley.

171 SECTION 6-HOISTS &WINCHES 169 Hand Winches Spur Gear Hand Winches Industrial strength winches feature machine cut spur gears for accurate operation and long lasting service. Automatic brake models provide positive load control for lifting and lowering operations. Zinc and iridescent dichromate plated finish protects against corrosion. Bronze and ball bearings deliver smooth operations. Wire rope sold separately. Model Load Rating 1st Layer Spur Gear Hand Winch Specifications Load Rating Full Drum Wire Rope Diameter Full Drum Capacity Gear Ratio Force to Lift 1000 lb Approx. Ship M401 * 500 lb 300 lb 3/16 in 60 ft lb M4022PB 1000 lb 500 lb 3/16 in 57 ft 2.85:1 41 lb 17 lb M4032PB 1000 lb 500 lb 3/16 in 110 ft 2.85:1 41 lb 18 lb M4312PB 2000 lb 1200 lb 1/4 in 59 ft 14.7:1 17 lb (Dbl Gear) 28 lb M4412PB 2000 lb 1200 lb 1/4 in 120 ft 14.7:1 17 lb (Dbl Gear) 30 lb * Does not have automatic brake - Not suitable for lifting Worm Gear Hand Winches Machine cut worm gears provide accurate operation and long lasting service. An enclosed oil bath provides continuous lubrication to minimize wear (except to Model 465). Automatic brake models provide positive load control for lifting and lowering operations. A durable paint finish is combined with zinc and iridescent dichromate plating to protect against corrosion. Bronze and ball bearings deliver smooth operation. Winches can be field or factory converted for vertical or wall mounting. Wire rope sold separately. Worm Gear Hand Winch Specifications HOISTS & WINCHES Base Model Brake Model Load Rating 1st Layer Load Rating Full Drum Wire Rope Diameter Full Drum Capacity Gear Ratio Force to Lift 1000 lb Approx. Ship lb 400 lb 3/16 in. 59 ft 20:1 21 lb 12 lb PB 1000 lb 500 lb 3/16 in 61 ft 15:1 34 lb 15 lb B 4000 lb 2500 lb 3/8 in 140 ft 26:1 31 lb 100 lb Actual drum capacities may be 25-30% less, due to nonuniform winding. Tension in the wire rope will also affect drum capacity. shown is for base model, add 6 lb for brake on 4622PB, add 13 lb. for brake on 482B. Series 4WM Worm Gear Hand Winches Machine cut worm gearing delivers accurate operation and long lasting service. Hex drive and socket handle included. Winch can also be driven with a maximum 400 rpm drill motor. Cast Aluminum gearbox and drum provide lightweight strength and durability. An enclosed oil bath provides continuous lubrication. An internal mechanical brake provides positive load control for lifting and lowering operations. Bronze bearings deliver smooth operation. Wire rope sold separately. Series 4WM Worm Gear Hand Winch Specifications Model Load Rating 1st Layer Load Rating Full Drum Wire Full Drum Rope Capacity Diameter Gear Ratio Force to Lift 1000 lb Approx. Ship 4WM lb 1200 lb 1/4 in 77 ft 32:1 14 lb 41lb ED120BD Electric drill-motor 400 rm drive kit-120vac with 1-1/8 hex socket 12 lb. Actual drum capacities may be 25-30% less, due to nonuniform winding. Tension in the wire rope will also affect drum capacity.

172 170 Special Purpose Winches The ATLAS Construction Winch SECTION 6-HOISTS &WINCHES Machine cut worm gears provide accurate operation and long lasting service. Enclosed oil bath provides continuous lubrication of gears to minimize wear. Oil seals keep oil in and dirt out. Internal mechanical brake provides positive load control for lifting and lowering operations. Ball bearings and self-aligning bronze bearings provide smooth, efficient operation. Pressure plate applies pressure to drum and wire rope to help maintain uniform winding. Not available on clutch models. Dual function cable anchor for quick disconnect of wire rope with swaged ball fitting, or recessed cable anchor with set screw for wire rope with unfinished end. Clutch model allows operator to manually disengage the drum to rapidly unwind the wire rope. Clutch models do not include pressure plates. Mounting options include floor, wall or ceiling. Cast aluminum construction for lightweight strength. Corrosion resistant durable paint finish protects against corrosion in harsh environments. Large diameter drums minimize wear to the wire rope and help extend its life. 2 Year Limited Warranty Model Description Load Rating 1st Layer Load Wire Rope Rating Full Diameter Drum 1st Layer Line Speed Full Drum Capacity Approx. Ship 4WP2T8 115/1/60 VAC 16 ft Pendant 2000 lb 800 lb 1/4 in 8 fpm 280 ft 101 lb 4WP2T8-PN Pneumatic - with Controls 2000 lb 800 lb 1/4 in 8 fpm 280 ft 95 lb 4WP2D8 115/230//460 volt / 3 phase 800/1500 lb 330/600 lb 1/4 in 26/40 fpm 280/190 ft 100 lb Actual drum capacities may be 25-30% less, due to nonuniform winding. Tension in the wire rope will also affect drum capacity. Portable Davit Cranes Crane rotates 360 o Adjustable Boom with 2 different positions for operation. Series 5110 and 5124 have booms that telescope to 4 different lengths and adjust in height while under load with ratchet style screw-jack. Crane breaks down for storage and transport. The models shown are Spur Gear Hand Winch Operated. Series 5110 and 5124 have worm gear hand winch or electric winch driven options. Quick Disconnect Anchor for quickly attaching or removing wire rope equipped with a swaged ball fitting. Independent bases are sold separately. Bases are available in Pedestal, Socket or Wall mount styles as well as Wheel bases. Base installation is the purchaser s responsibility. Thern recommends consulting a civil engineer or other qualified professional. Wire rope assemblies are sold separately and are available in galvanized or stainless steel with the swaged ball fitting attached. Model Description Spur Gear Hand Winch Driven Portable Davit Crane Specifications Load Rating Max. Load Rating Extended Wire Rope Diameter Hook Reach Approx. Ship Lift below floor level (min - max) 5122M1 Hand winch operated 500 lb 500 lb 3/16 in in 68 lb 9-35 ft 5110M1 Hand winch operated 1000 lb 500 lb 1/4 in in 160 lb 1-45 ft 5124M1 Hand winch operated 2000 lb 1000 lb 1/4 or 5/16 in in 253 lb 0-44 ft Hook Reach and Lift Below Floor Level vary depending on boom position and base configuration.

173 SECTION 6-HOISTS &WINCHES 171 Power Winches Series 4HS Helical/Spur Gear Power Winches The 4HS Series combine helical/spur gearing for heavy duty pulling or lifting applications involving large loads and long distances. Winches are driven by 230/460 volt three phase, 60 cycle, flange mounted, TEFC severe duty, reversible, class F insulated, continuous duty brake motors. Controls are sold separately. Other models and custom modifications are available. Helical/Spur Gear Power Winch Specification Model Motor Hp Load Rating (1st Layer) Load Wire Rope Rating Diameter (Full Drum) Full Drum Capacity Full Drum Line Speed Approx. Ship 4HS6M lb 4000 lb 1/2 in 500 ft 64 fpm 645 lb 4HS11M 10 11,000 lb 5800 lb 5/8 in 760 ft 51 fpm 1160 lb 4HS16M 10 16,100 lb 8300 lb 3/4 in 880 ft 38 fpm 1633 lb 4HS26M 20 26,000 lb 15,000 lb 1 in 830 ft 45 fpm 3343 lb 4HS40M 40 40,000 lb 22,900 lb 1-1/4 in 1030 ft 59 fpm 5799 lb 4HS56M 50 56,200 lb 35,500 lb 1-1/2 in 1140 ft 47 fpm 9479 lb Actual drum capacities may be 25-30% less, due to nonuniform winding. Tension in the wire rope will also affect drum capacity. Series 477 Helical/Worm Gear Power Winches Helical/worm gearing delivers dependable operation. Cast aluminum construction provides lightweight strength and durability. An enclosed oil bath provides continuous lubrication. An internal mechanical brake provides positive load control for lifting and lowering operations. Ball bearings deliver smooth operation. Wire rope sold separately. HOISTS & WINCHES Series 477 Helical/Worm Gear Power Winch Specifications Model Description Load Rating 1st Layer Load Rating Full Drum Wire Rope Diameter 1st Layer line Speed Full Drum Capacity Approx. Ship /1/60 VAC, with controls 2000 lb 1200 lb 5/16 in 13 fpm 90 ft 88 lb 4771DC 12 VDC, with controls 2000 lb 1200 lb 5/16 in 13 fpm 90 ft 105 lb 4771PN Pneumatic 80 cfm at 100psi 2000 lb 1200 lb 5/16 in 13 fpm 90 ft 70 lb 4771HY Hydraulic 4 gpm at 1000psi 2000 lb 1200 lb 5/16 in 13 fpm 90 ft 72 lb Actual drum capacities may be 25-30% less, due to nonuniform winding. Tension in the wire rope will also affect drum capacity. For all models except 4771, drum speed is based on rated load, actual speed will vary with load weight and power supply. For Model 4771PN, ratings are at 100 psi. For Model 4771HY, ratings are at 1000 psi. Controls and hoses for models 4771PN and 4771HY sold separately.

174 172 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS Lifting Beams Model 16 Adjustable Spreader/Lifting Beam PRODUCT FEATURES: Adjustable Lifting Points Handles both wide and unbalanced loads Low Headroom capability Shackles included Add chain top rigging for additional stability Optional swivel hooks available Optional chain top rigging available Complies with ASME Standards PRODUCT OPTIONS: Option S - Pair of swivel hooks Option C - Chain top rigging Cross beams (one or two) specify spread(s), contact Caldwell Applications Model Rated Capacity (tons) Spread Bail Adjustment HR Headroom Bolt Type Anchor Shackle (tons) Max. Min. Top Bottom 16-1/4-4 1/ /2-4 1/ /2-6 1/ /2-8 1/ /2-10 1/ Operation Standard 2 Point Lift Custom 3 Point Lift Custom 4 Point Lift

175 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS 173 Model 20 - Low Headroom Multiple Spread Lifting Beam PRODUCT FEATURES: Beams over 4 have 3 spreads (3 & 4 beams have 2 spreads) Swivel hooks with hook latches standard Wide range of sizes and capacities available STANDARD FEATURES: Three spreads to adjust to the load Outside spread Middle spread (outside less 1 ) Inside spread (outside less 2 ) Capacity (tons) 1/ / Catalog # Outside Spread in Feet Head Room Other Wei ght Dimensions CAT. 20-1/ / / / / / / / / / / /2-30 A= 7/8 T= 3/4 H.R. 12-3/ /4 12-3/4 12-3/4 13-3/4 13-3/4 14-3/4 15-3/4 16-3/4 16-3/4 20-1/4 22-1/4 B = 3 O=7/8 WGT C =5 CAT A=7/8 T = 3/4 HR. 12-3/4 12-3/4 13-3/4 13-3/4 14-3/4 15-3/4 16-3/4 18-1/2 20-1/4 20-1/4 22-1/ 4 B =3 O=7/8 WGT C = 5 CAT A=7/8 T=3/4 H.R. 13-3/4 13-3/4 14-3/4 16-1/2 17-1/2 18-1/4 20-1/4 20-1/4 24-3/4 24-3/4 27-3/ 4 B = 3 O=7/8 WGT C =5 CAT A=1-1/2 T=1 H.R. 15-1/4 15-1/4 16-1/4 17-1/4 18-1/4 22-1/2 24-1/2 24-1/2 27-1/2 27-1/2 27-1/ 2 B = 3 O = 1 WGT C = 5 CAT A=2 T= 1-1/4 H.R. 19-1/2 20-1/2 21-1/2 25-1/2 25-1/2 27-1/2 27-1/2 30-1/4 30-1/4 30-1/4 33-1/ 4 B = 4 O=1-15/16 WGT C = 7 CAT / / / / / / / / /2-18 A=2 T=1-1/4 H.R. 20-1/2 23-1/2 25-1/4 27-1/4 27-1/4 30-1/4 30-1/4 30-1/4 33 B= 4 0=1-1/2 WGT C = 7 CAT A=2 T=1-1/4 H.R. 23-1/2 25-1/4 27-1/4 27-1/4 30-1/4 30-1/4 30-1/ B=4 O=1-9/16 WGT C = 7 CAT A=2-1/2 T= 1-1/2 H.R. 28-1/2 30-1/2 30-1/2 33-1/2 33-1/2 40-1/4 40-1/4 B= 5 O=2-1/16 WGT C = 9 CAT A=2-1/2 T= 1-1/2 H.R. 38-3/4 38-3/4 38-3/4 38-3/4 41-1/2 41-1/2 B=5 O = 2-1/4 WGT C = 9 CAT Use Model 20H A=3 T = 1-3/4 for larger sizes H.R. 41-3/8 41-3/8 44-3/8 44-3/8 44-3/8 B = 6 0=2-1/4 WGT C =12 CAT A = 3-1/2 T = 2 H.R. 45-1/2 45-1/2 48-1/4 B = 7 O=2-1/4 WGT C=16 CAT A= 3-1/2 T= 2-1/2 H.R. 44-3/4 49-3/4 B = 7 O =3 WGT C=16 BELOW THE HOOK

176 174 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS Model 20H - Low Headroom Multiple Spread Lifting Beam Shown with optional Built-In Stand and different hole placement PRODUCT FEATURES: I Beam construction Threes spreads to adjust to the load - Outside Spread - Middle Spread (outside less 1 ) - Inside Spread (outside less 2 ) Swivel Hooks with hook latches standard Wide range of sizes and capacities available Complies with ASME Standards Capacity (tons) Model Outside Spread (feet) Headroom Other Dimensions 1 Model HR Headroom A=7/8 T=3/4 B=3 O=7/8 C=5 2 Model HR Headroom A=1-1/2 T=1 B=3 O=7/8 C=5 3 Model HR Headroom Use Model 16 or Model 20 for these capacities and sizes A=1-1/2 T=1 B=3 O=1 C=5 5 Model HR Headroom A=2 T=1-1/4 B=4 O=1-3/8 C=7 7-1/ Model 20H-7 1/ H-7 1/2-24 A=2 T=1-1/4 HR Headroom B=4 O=1-5/8 C= Model 20H H A=2 T=1-1/4 HR Headroom B=4 O=1-9/16 C= Model 20H H H H A=2-1/2 T=1-1/2 HR Headroom B=5 O=2-1/16 C= Model 20H H H H H A=2-3/4 T=1-1/2 HR Headroom B=5 O=2-1/4 C= Model 20H H H H H A=3 T=1-3/4 HR Headroom B=6 O=2-1/4 C= Model 20H H H H H H H A=3-1/2 T=2 HR Headroom B=7 O=2-1/4 C= Model 20H H H H H H H H A=3-1/2 T=2-1/2 HR Headroom B=7 O=3 C= Other sizes available, Consult the factory.

177 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS 175 Capacity (tons) Model Outside Spread (feet) Headroom Other Dimensions 1 Model 20H H H H-1-42 HR Headroom A=7/8 T=3/4 B=3 O=7/8 C=5 2 Model 20H H H H-2-42 HR Headroom A=1-1/2 T=1 B=3 O=7/8 C= /2 10 Model 20H H H H-3-42 HR Headroom Model 20H H H H-5-42 HR Headroom A=1-1/2 T=1 B=3 O=1 C=5 A=2 T=1-1/4 B=4 O=1-3/8 C=7 Model 20H-7 1/ H H-/ H A=2 T=1-1/4 HR Headroom B=4 O=1-5/8 C= Model 20H H H H A=2 T=1-1/4 HR Headroom B=4 O=1-9/16 C= OPTION A Extra Holes or Different Placement of Holes Allows multiple hook positioning beyond standard 3 spreads. Specify number and spread(s) required. OPTION B Extra Shackles and Swivel Hooks Allows for multiple pick points or eliminates the need to move hardware for different size loads. BELOW THE HOOK 15 Model 20H H H H A=2-1/2 T=1-1/2 HR Headroom B=5 O=2-1/16 C= Model 20H H H H A=2-3/4 T=1-1/2 HR Headroom B=5 O=2-1/4 C= Model 20H H H H A=3 T=1-3/4 HR Headroom B=6 O=2-1/4 C= Model 20H H H H A=3-1/2 T=2 HR Headroom B=7 O=2-1/4 C= Model 20H H H H A=3-1/2 T=2-1/2 HR Headroom B=7 O=3 C= OPTION C Built-In Stand Keeps beam upright for easy crane hook attachment (pictured above). Other sizes available, Consult the factory.

178 176 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS Spreader Bars Model BEF - Spreader Bar End Fittings PRODUCT FEATURES: Build your own spreader beam. Designed to work with a range of shackle sizes, both top and bottom. Complies with ASME standards when assembled to specifications using designated pipe and rigging. Specifications Model Max. Capacity (tons)* Schedule 80 Pipe Size Per Pair BEF-2-1/ /2 16 BEF BEF NOTE: System capacity is determined by span, rigging and hardware, consult factory for complete details. Model HC-BEF - High Capacity Beam End Fitting PRODUCT FEATURES: Build your own spreader beam. Pivoting lower lugs allow for 75 degrees to 90 degrees lower rigging angle. Complies with ASME standards when assembled to specifications using designated pipe and rigging. Specifications Model Max. Capacity (tons)* Schedule 80 Pipe Size Per Pair BEF-5HC BEF-5HC BEF-8HC BEF-8HC BEF-12HC BEF-12HC BEF-12HC NOTE: System capacity is determined by span, rigging and hardware, consult factory for complete details. Model BEF-PC - Beam End Fitting - Pipe Coupler PRODUCT FEATURES: Add flexibility to your spreader beam end fitting system. Securely joins two pipe lengths to create a longer spreader beam. Innovative design reduces sag in the spread system once assembled. Includes all connecting pin or bolts. Complies with ASME standards when assembled to specifications using designated pipe and rigging. Specifications Model Use With Model Used With Pipe * BEF-PC-2-5 BEF-2-1/2 2-1/2 SCH BEF-PC-5 BEF-5 5-SCH BEF-PC-5HC BEF-5HC 5 SCH BEF-PC-8 BEF-8 8 SCH * See end fitting assembly instruction for complete pipe specifications. BEF-PC-8HC BEF-8HC 8 SCH BEF-PC-12HC BEF-12HC 12 SCH

179 Model 30 - Fixed Spreader Beams SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS PRODUCT FEATURES: Ideal where headroom is not limited. Adds stability to lift. Available with standard chain or wire rope rigging. Available with Adjust-A-Leg rigging for off center load adjustment (minimum lifting capacity will be approximately 10-15% of beam rating). Wide range of additional sizes and capacities available. Complies with ASME Standards. Shown w/standard Chain - Other Top Rigging options not available on QuickShip Program CAT H.R WGT CAT H.R WGT CAT H.R WGT CAT H.R WGT CAT H.R WGT CAT H.R WGT CAT H.R WGT Note: =Beam and hooks only - (no top rigging). A=1/2 B=2-1/2 C-5 F=4-1/4 O=31/32 A=1 F=6 B = 3-1/2 O = 1-1/6 C=7 A = 1-1/4 F = 8-1/8 B=4-3/8 O=1-1/2 C = 8-3/4 A = 1-1/2 F = 9-1/4 B = 5-1/4 O = 1-3/4 C = 10-1/2 A = 1-3/4 F = 9-1/4 B=6 O=2 C=12 A = 1-3/4 F = 9-3/4 B=6 O=2 C=12 A=2 F=13 B = 7 O = 2-3/4 C=14 BELOW THE HOOK Pallet Lifters Model 90 Pallet Lifter Catalog Capacity (tons) Dimensions Forks W E Bail J HR L M H A B C / / / / / / / / / / / / / /2 536 PRODUCT FEATURES: Converts overhead crane to lift truck. Counter balanced to hang level. Maintenance free. Allow for ease of loading/unloading in not easily accessible areas. Complies with ASME Standards / /2 2-1/ /2 6-1/ / /2 2-1/ /2 6-1/ / /2 2-1/ /2 6-1/ / /2 6-1/ / /2 6-1/ / /2 6-1/ / /2 2-1/ /2 6-1/ /2 1403

180 178 Coil Lifters Model 82 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS PRODUCT FEATURES: Designed for heavy duty applications. High tensile alloy steel plate reduces physical size and weight. Counter balanced to hang level. Inside radius on hooks avoid coil edge contact. Curved coil saddle is standard. Guide handles for ease of coil positioning. Handles a wide range of coil widths. Available with optional padding for additional coil protection. Complies with ASME Standards. Dimensions Catalog Capacity (tons) Lifting Arm Bail Dimensions Coil Width Throat Headroom Opening Length Depth Width H Max. Min. L D W A B C Thickness T / /8 1-1/ / / / / / /2 1-1/ / / / /2 1-1/ / / / / /4 1-1/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /8 2-1/ /16 2-1/ /4 2-1/ / / /2 2-1/ / / / /8 3-3/ E dimension = 1/2 of the maximum coil width. Other Sizes Available. Model 82-NC PRODUCT FEATURES: Handles narrow coils with less coil edge damage. More durable than web slings. Light weight for easier handling. Built in guide handle for ease of coil positioning. Available with optional curved coil saddle. Inside radius on hooks avoid coil edge contact. Complies with ASME Standards. Dimensions Catalog Capacity Coil Lifting Arm Plate Bail Dimensions (tons) Headroom Width Throat Thickness H Thickness Opening Max. Length L Depth D T A B C 82NC-1/2-8 1/ / /4 1/2 18-1/2 13/ / NC-1/ / /8 1/2 18-1/2 13/ / NC / /2 21-1/2 13/ / NC / /8 3/4 24-9/ /16 4-1/ NC-3 1/ / / / /8 1-3/16 3-5/8 5-5/ NC / /2 1-1/ /16 1-1/ /16 94 Other Sizes Available.

181 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS 179 Specialty Lifters C-Hook Pipe Lifter PRODUCT FEATURES: Stand-up leveling ball adjusts for varying pipe length Adjustable bail stop makes repetitive lifts easy to handle Pipe stop helps drive the pipe into position Built-in laser target holder allows operator to set & laser position at the same time Position handle Complies with ASME Standards Dimension Model Min Pipe ID Throat Arm D Arm Length L Headroom HR Bail Dimensions A B C T Capacity CPL , CPL , CPL , CPL , CPL ,000 1,100 CPL ,000 1,550 Note: For Bell & Spigot pipe only, other pipe designs consult the factory. BELOW THE HOOK OPERATION

182 180 Manhole Sleeve Lifter SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS PRODUCT FEATURES: Quick and efficient way to place cast manhole sleeves Easily attaches to and releases from the load 2 and 3 leg models available Complies with ASME Standards Model Specifications Description Capacity MCL-1/2 2-Leg Version 1, MCL-3/ Legs, 1-30 Leg with Shortener 1, MCL-C Clamps Only Concrete Housing Lifter PRODUCT FEATURES: Handle concrete pipe efficiently without damage to concrete seat Legs can be quickly positioned to safely balance the load Handles 4-6 concrete wall thickness Requires constant tension to maintain positive load contact Complies with ASME Standards Model Description Capacity MHL-5-4/6 2-Leg Model - Two 42 Legs 10, MHL-7 1/2-4/6 3-Leg Model - Two 42 Legs - One 72 Leg 15, MHL-C - 4/6 Clamp Only 5, Note: Reverse cam action eliminates slippage tendency.

183 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS 181 Concrete Pipe Pick TM The patented new concrete Pipe Pick TM is a quicker, safer and cleaner way of handling precast concrete pipe. Simply insert the Pipe Pick TM into the lifting hole in the pipe-tilt-to engage the beveled edge-and lift up! You can now lift and set the pipe. Once the pipe is set, lower the Pipe Pick TM, the counter weighted lift arm automatically falls straight and the Pipe Pick TM can be removed from the pipe. Simple and fast. No need to reach inside the pipe. Worker remains above the pipe at all times. BELOW THE HOOK Dimensions Model Capacity (tons) Minimum Pipe I.D. D E F G A B C T CPP / CPP CPP Patent 5,820,186.

184 182 Grabs Beam Grab PRODUCT FEATURES: SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS Heavy duty design. These grabs provide an efficient method for handling wide flange beam sections and plate girders. Clamps have a recessed base to accept studs welded to a beam s surface. Beam grabs eliminate the need for slings or chokers. Use only for vertical lifting. For longer beams or girders, use units in pairs in conjunction with a spreader/lifting beam. Complies with ASME Standards. Rated Model Capacity (tons) A B C Dimensions Flange Thickness Flange Width Min. Max. S N T M L P 4 1/4 1/4 F F F F /4 3/ / /2 3/4 8 1/ /2 1-1/ /2 1-1/ / / / / / / / Pipe Grab PRODUCT FEATURES: Heavy duty automatic clamping design. Outriggers stabilize the pipe during lift. No blocking is required, the operator only has to guide the clamp into place. Pipes are handled quickly and efficiently when properly balanced. Excellent for cast iron, steel pipe, tubing, and other cylindrical objects. Pipe grab sizes listed handle ASA cast iron pipe - standard, extra strong, and double strong (all have same O.D). Rated Capacity Cast Iron Steel Dimensions in Inches Model Pipe O.D. Model Pipe O.D. A B C 450 C S C S C S C S C S C S C S

185 CLAMPS, GRABS & TONGS F.4 Clamps, Grabs & Tongs Model BLG - Barrier Grabs PRODUCT FEATURES: New, compact & rugged design holds up to the work environment where barriers are used. Handles concrete barriers from 6-12 nominal width at the top of the barrier. Stainless steel Auto-Latch. Auto-Latch mounting insures proper alignment. Locating assembly orientates tong on barrier without operator intervention. Gripping pads pivot to conform with the load. Replaceable polyurethane pads protect barrier. Alloy steel dog-point pads bite into painted barrier surfaces (typical in coastal areas). Centering guide cut out on grab shoe helps to properly center tong over barrier for al evel lift. Extended handles on each side keep operator away from load and can be adjusted as needed. Lifting eye allows for easy hook attachment, self-centers rigging, and will accommodate af ork. Designed and manufactured to ASME B30.20, BTH-1, design category B, service class LATCHED OPEN SPECIFICATIONS 25.0 LIFTING 6" BARRIER Rated 36.8 LIFTING 12" BARRIER 5.5 Model Capacity 1.9 (lbs.) (lbs.) With Polyurethane LiftingPads BLG-4.1/ BLG-7.1/ With Steel 'DogPoint' Lifting Pads BLG-4.1/4-DP LATCHED OPEN BLG-7.1/4-DP LIFTING 6" 26.7 LIFTING 12" LOCKED OPEN NOTE: Dimensions shown in inches. Operation Placetong on barrier, lower Lift and position barrier in Lower crane, line must go sl ack cranecompletely to desired location. to engageauto-latch, lift tong disengagethe Auto-Latch. off barrier andrepeat! SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS 183 Model BLG - Barrier Grabs PRODUCT FEATURES: New, compact & rugged design holds up to the work environment where barriers are used. Handles concrete barriers from 6-12 nominal width at the top of the barrier. Stainless steel Auto-Latch. Auto-Latch mounting insures proper alignment. Locating assembly orients tong on barrier without operator intervention. Gripping pads pivot to conform with the load. Replaceable polyurethane pads protect barrier. Alloy steel dog-point pads bite into painted barrier surfaces (typical in coastal areas). Centering guide cut out on grab shoe helps to properly center ton over barrier for a level lift. Extended handles on each side keep operator away from load and can be adjusted as needed. Lifting eye allows for easy hood attachment, self-centers rigging, and will accommodate a fork. Designed and manufactured to ASME B30.20, BTH-1, design category B, service class 3. NOTE: Dimensions shown in inches. Barrier Grab w/polyurethane Lifting Pads Specifications Model Rated Capacity With Polyurethane Lifting Pads BLG-4.1/ BLG-7.1/ With Steel Dog Point Lifting Pads BLG-4.1/4-DP BLG-7.1/4-DP BELOW THE HOOK Optional Stabilizing Kit Attach two Barrier Grabs, and expand your barrier handling capabilities. Handles barriers up to 40 in length. Beams can be used for other material handling applications when Barrier Grabs are removed. Kit includes Model 20 Lifting Beam & Attaching Hardware - Barrier Grabs sold separately.

186 184 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS Model RR - Manual Rig-Release TM Hook PRODUCT FEATURES: NEW - Rope Guide allows rigging to be released when hook is either above or beside the operator. If the hook is located below the operator please request information on the Upward Pull option. Designed for rugged, outdoor use. Easy to use - simply rig, lift, set and release. LOCK & CAPTURE feature engages with very little weight (see Minimum Chart below). Rated load capacity can be lifted from either Lift Arm or the lower Strip Sling Hook. Do not exceed rated capacity of hook. Oversized bail for easy mounting on crane hook - 5, 10 & 15 ton units provided with fixed bails. Designed and manufactured to ASME Standards. Lifting at less than minimum load can result in injury or death. If minimum load weight is not met, safety mechanism will not engage into the LOCK & CAPTURE position. SPECIFICATIONS - Manual Release Model Rated Capacity Dimensions Bail Dimensions D E F G J K L O A B C T RR RR RR RR RR Larger Capacities Available. Specifications Rigging (Minimum of Springs) Model Rated Capacity (tons) Minimum Load Recommended Lifting Slings ** Maximum Allowable Rigging Basket Choker Rope Dia. (in) Basket Choker RR / RR / RR / RR / RR / **Note: If maximum allowable rigging weight is exceeded, unit will remain in the LOCK & CAPTURE position and cannot be released. If the maximum allowable rigging weight needs to be increased, additional springs can be added, refer to the Instruction Manual.

187 Model RR-R - Radio Controlled Release Unit SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS 185 SPECIFICATIONS - Radio Release Model Rated Capacity (tons) Dimensions Bail Dimensions D E F G J K L O A B C T RR-2.5R RR Specifications Rigging (Minimum of Springs) BELOW THE HOOK Rated Model Capacity (tons) Minimum Load Basket Choker Recommended Lifting Slings Rope Diameter ** Maximum Allowable Rigging Basket Choker RR-2.5R / RR-5R / Note: If maximum allowable rigging weight is exceeded, unit will remain in the LOCK & CAPTURE position and cannot be released. If the maximum allowable rigging weight needs to be increased, additional springs can be added, refer to the Instruction Manual. Lifting at less than minimum load can result in injury or death. If minimum load weight is not met, safety mechanism will not engage into the LOCK & CAPTURE position.

188 186 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS Sheet Lifters Model 60 Sheet Lifter PRODUCT FEATURES: Versatile handling of bundled, sheets, plates and other materials stacked horizontally. Low headroom design for optimum lifting capabilities. One person operation minimizes handling cost. Self-locking worm-gear for leg adjustment drive is standard. Easy adjustment for different sheet widths. Rack and pinion leg drive. Designed for ease of maintenance. Designed for greater sheet width range. Complies with ASME Standards. PRODUCT OPTIONS: Hand Wheel lockout. Motorized leg adjustment. Chain-wheel leg adjustment. Extended length hand wheel leg adjustment. End chains with plate hooks (recommended for all widths 72 and greater). Extended grabshoe lengths available. Additional bundle clearance available (longer legs). Catalog Capacity (tons) Dimensions Bundle Width Headroom Shoe Min. Bail Opening Min. Max. H D. Aisle A B C T / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /2 2030

189 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS 187 Anver Vacuum Lifter Anver Mechanical Vacuum Lifters increase productivity -- increase speed and efficiency of handling -- increase safety to men and machinery -- decrease unnecessary labor and product damage. -- Consult us for your next requirement -- Anver Lifters are profit makers! UNIQUE ADVANTAGES Simple one person operation Hoist controls entire operation No control buttons on lifter No power or set-up required No electrical cables or air lines Use it with any hoist or fork lift Not affected by power failures No marking or scratching of surface No damage to edges or corners Non-magnetizing - fast payback Lowest maintenance Handles non-magnetic metals Silent and clean operation Unique optional safety system The Anver Mechanical Vacuum Lifter is a unique product which can speed up horizontal handling of sheet and plate, fabrications and all types of nonporous materials. BELOW THE HOOK One man simply attaches the hook of a crane, hoist or boom truck to the Anver Lifter, positions the unit on the load, and alone, controls the entire handling operation. Anver Vacuum Lifters do not rely upon the power, outside controls or complex accessories - they are self-contained units that create their own vacuum grip mechanically, without power source. This gives them unmatched mobility for use in metal fabricating plants, service centers, warehouses and plate yards, on ferrous and non-ferrous metals - indoors and out - WHEREVER materials need to be loaded, unloaded, stored and stacked, handled or transferred.

190 188 Load Positioner Model AL-2 PRODUCT FEATURES: Model Rated Capacity (Tons) with 45 Degrees of Horizontal SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS Allows crane hook to be directly over center of gravity in unbalanced or non-symmetrical two point lifts. Quickly adjusts to center of gravity. Can be locked into place for constant lifts. Can be used in conjunction with spreader beams. Ideal for use in rigging applications and machinery moving. Designed and manufacturer to ASME B30.20 and B30.9. E Standard Reach F Rope Size Top Assembly Dimensions A B C D Size (tons) Alloy Steel Hooks H G Anchor Shackle /16 D 3-1/ /8 5/ /4 3/8 7-1/ /16 D 3-1/ /8 5/8 1-1/2 1-1/16 27/32 1/ /16 D 3-1/ /8 5/ /4 1-1/8 5/ /16 D 5-1/4 8-3/8 1-3/4 13/16 4-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/8 3/ /8 D 5-1/4 8-3/8 1-3/4 7/ /8 1-7/8 7/ /4 D 5-5/8 8-3/4 2-3/8 1-1/ /4 2-1/8 1-1/ /8 D 5-5/8 8-3/4 3-3/8 1-1/ /4 2-1/8 1-1/ L /8 D /2 1-1/ /4 2-1/8 1-1/ /8 D /2 1-1/2 NO HOOKS FURNISHED 1-1/ D /4 3 NO HOOKS FURNISHED 2-1/ /4 D /4 4 NO HOOKS FURNISHED Reach calculation - approx. 70% distance between pick up points. * Unit must be loaded with at least 10% of rated load capacity. Other sizes available. Model AL-4 PRODUCT FEATURES: Allows crane hook to be directly over center of gravity in unbalanced or non-symmetrical four point lifts. Quickly adjusts to center of gravity. Can be locked into place for constant lifts. Can be used in conjunction with box type spreader beams. Ideal for use in rigging applications and machinery moving. Designed and manufactured to ASME B30.20 and B30.9. Model Rated Capacity (Tons) th legs of 45 Degrees of Horizontal* Standard Reach E Rope Size F Top Assembly Dimensions A B C Size (tons) Alloy Steel Hooks (Dimensions with Safety Latches) H G Anchor Shackle /16 D 3 6 5/8 1-1/2 1-1/16 27/32 1/ /16 D 3-1/ /2 1-1/16 27/32 5/ /16 D 3-1/ /2 1-3/8 5/ /16 D 4-3/8 8-3/4 1-1/ /8 1-11/16 1-1/ /8 D 5-1/2 10-1/2 1-1/ /8 1-11/16 1-1/ /4 D / /4 2-1/8 1-1/ /2 D 9-1/ /4 NO HOOKS FURNISHED /4 D /4 NO HOOKS FURNISHED /4 D /2 NO HOOKS FURNISHED Reach Calculation- approx. 70% distance between pick up points (diagonally). * Unit must be loaded with at least 10% of rated capacity. Other sizes available.

191 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS 189 Posi-Turner Rotates and Positions Your Product Safely, Efficiently, and Damage Free. The Posi-Turner is designed for... Posi-Turner`Applications... Safety & Ergonomics Provides safer working conditions by positioning the work piece at a distance. Eliminates tipping or dropping work pieces and the shock load to the crane associated with using two cranes to roll over a heavy object. Allows you to stop or start rotations at any point. Makes it easier to position a work piece. Provides ergonomic benefits to employees performing production and assembly work. Meets or exceeds industry standards, including ASME B30.20, ASME BTH-1, AWS D1.1 and ANSI/NFPA 70. Efficiency Lifts, levels and rotates objects without re-rigging. Improves Production process efficiency, by keeping an assembly line moving. Makes rotation, positioning and precision work easier. Require only one operator for system rotation. Saves production time and labor time. Damage-Free Product Quality Eliminates product slipping and dropping. Reduces product damage. Transportation - Auto: frames, engines, dies, molds, etc. chassis, trailers, tanks, etc. Rail: undercarriages, bogeys, cars, wheels, etc. Aircraft-Aerospace: panels, tooling, etc. Shipping: container and trailer, etc. Industrial Equipment - machine bases, panels, enclosures, engine blocks, weldments and frames. Heavy Equipment - Agricultural, Construction, Mining, Military: chassis, axles, assemblies, buckets, transmissions, frames and booms, etc. Concrete - Precast Molds: vaults, pipes, basins, barriers, construction girders, panels and decks, etc. Marine - decks, hulls, panels and molds, etc. Plastics/Composites - injection molds and fiberglass products, etc. Metal Forming - tooling, dies, coils, castings and sheets, etc. Materials Production - blocks, slabs, ingots, plates, bundles, stone, steel, aluminum, stainless, ceramics, copper, graphite, refractory, paper and wood, etc. Specialty Products BELOW THE HOOK

192 190 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS Tea Cup Pipe Carrier PRODUCT FEATURES: An efficient way to handle concrete water and sewer pipes The Caldwell Tea Cup Pipe Carrier will save you time and money Three sizes available to handle from 3/4 to 1-1/2 cable and lift up to 18 tons Optional Spoon Handle allows the PC-3/4 Tea Cup to be guided into small diameter pipes Model Rated Capacity (tons) Sling Dia. Dimensions A B C D E F G PC-3/ /4 7/ PC /8 1-1/ PC-1-1/ / Use With Model Rated Capacity (tons) Sling Dia. Standard Length (ft) After Swage Dim. (in) A B PC-3/4 LS-3/ / LS-7/ / LS PC-1 LS-1-1/ / LS-1-1/ / PC-1-1/2 L-1-1/ / Corky Container Lifting Lugs PRODUCT FEATURES: Anefficient way to lift containers from bottom lifting slot Color is identified to separate left and right handed Corky lugs Handle indicator shows lug is engaged for lift Complies with ASME Standards PRODUCT OPTIONS: 8-1/2 ton shackle code-s Model Rated Capacity (tons) Corky Hook Dimensions Color A B C D E F Right Hand Left Hand LL 8-1/ / /8 12-3/4 Yellow Red 17

193 Concrete Buckets Camlever Standard Buckets SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS 191 The industry standard features high strength, light weight tubular construction. A variable-leverage gate gives the operator complete control from a trickle to one yard per second of one inch slump concrete. Model Width Width Load Overall Gate Capacity OD ID Height Height Diameter Lbs. Yd. CL /2 CL /4 CL Cl /2 CXL CXL CXL CXL Optional Air Operated Gates 185 Lbs. Camlever Low Boy Buckets Minimum height for easy loading. Two yard model is seven inches lower than an ordinary bucket of the same capacity. Gate opening and handle are parallel to the direction of the form to aid pouring in narrow forms. Low Boys have all of the advantages of the Standard Buckets but with a lower profile. Model Width Width Load Overall Gate Capacity OD ID Height Height Diameter Lbs. Yd. LB /8 LB /2 LB /4 LB LXB /2 LXB LXB LXB Optional Air Operated Gates 185 Lbs. BELOW THE HOOK Top Ring Extensions Model Bucket Added Size Capacity Lbs. Side Dump Chutes Model Bucket Length Size Lbs. TR-050 1/2 1/4 Yd. 30 SCL-375 3/ TR-075 3/4 1/4 Yd. 45 SCL-050 1/ TR /4 Yd. 70 SCL-075 3/ TR /2 1/4 Yd. 80 SCL TR /2 Yd. 90 SCL / TR /2 Yd. 155 SCL Bucket Boots TR /8 Yd. 180 SCL SCXL Model Length Disc. Diameter Lbs. Boot Extensions SCXL SCXL RU RU RU RU Models RU-1, 2 and 3 fit 18, 21 and 24 gate. Model RU-4 fits 32 gate. Model Length Diameter Lbs. RU RU

194 192 Lift Magnets - Permanent NEO Series SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS The NEO Series Material Lifting Magnets are used in Steel Supply, Machine, and Die shops where heavy steel objects are moved rapidly and safely. NEO magnets feature High Lift Capacity, Ease of Operation, and Ease of Movement due to low weight. Permanent magnets allow for No Power Consumption. Yet the NEO magnet have handles that lock in ON & OFF positions to prevent unintentional operation. These magnets meet all the requirements of ANSI/ASME B30.20 (Safety Standard) and are supplied with an operating manual, pull test certificate, a video, and safety posters. Please consult the OPERATOR S MANUAL AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS for more detailed ratings Model Length Width Height Capacity Rounds (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Capacity Plate Maximum Rated Lift Capacity * Plate Thickness Equal to or Greater Than: NEO NEO NEO , NEO , ,200 3 NEO , ,400 4 Performance Rating on AISI 1021 Steel for clean, flat, smooth low carbon steel plate. Derating is required for plates with rust or scale. Alloy Plates and plates thinner than those listed above require derating. NEO-HV Series NEO-HV Series permanent lifting magnets are designed to lift loads from the horizontal position into the vertical positions quickly and efficiently. NEO-HV material lift magnets handle loading of flat, ferrous metal work-pieces onto a machine center or lathes with horizontal spindles. They can also be used to load material into vertical racks for storage. Turn your standard NEO magnet into an HV unit by adding a lift arm. Magnet Assembly Description NEO-HV250 NEO-HV500 NEO-HV1000 Rated Lifting Capacity Length Width Height Plate Width (min-max) Plate Length (min-max) Plate Thickness (min-max) Lifting Capacities Based on flat AISI 1020 Steel.

195 Lift Magnets - Battery Powered BUX BM2 Magnets SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS 193 These magnets are compact, mobile, self-contained using a heavy duty 12 volt battery. Operating on this battery source they are free of restrictive cords and wires. They also have the added advantage of being useful in areas where electricity is not available. They have convenient push buttons on the front panel and an I/R remote that operates up to 15 feet. STANDARD FEATURES: Battery Charger has an automatic cut-off to prevent over-charging battery. Audible Warning Alarm & Flashing Light indicates low battery. Interlock prevents magnet de-energization when suspended in air. Applications include handling of plates, die blocks, machined components, smooth castings and forgings. They are extremely useful in shipping and receiving areas, storerooms, on cut-off saws, burning and welding tables, and with other machine tools such as grinders, shapers and drill presses. Model Lift Capacity (Flat Stock Only) Length Width Height to Crane Hook Net Ship BUX BM , BUX BM , BUX BM , BUX BM , Batteries Sold Separately. BUX BP-7 & BP-15 Magnets The BUX BP-7 & BP-15 Magnets have a uniquely designed plate shoe that enables the handling flat, round and shaped materials. These magnets are equipped with convenient front panel push buttons and I/R remote that operates from up to 15 feet. BELOW THE HOOK These units are ideally suited for handling pipe, bar stock, billets, I Beams, H Beams, angles, channel, Tees, Zees and pilings. Their bi-polar configuration allows these units to also handle plates, forgings and castings. Model Lift Capacity (Flat Stock) Lift Capacity (Round Stock) Length Width Height to Crane Hook Net Wt. BUX BP , , BUX BP , , Batteries Sold Separately. Ship

196 194 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS Lift Magnets - Electric CER Series A CER, Circular Electric Lift, magnet is the least costly but most powerful magnet available. Due to deep penetration of its magnetic field, it is less susceptible to adverse surface conditions than any other self-contained magnet. RECOMMENDED APPLICATION CER magnets are ideally suited for in-plant handling of steel plate, flat stock, castings, forgings or machined components in all types of industrial plants, machine shops, fabricating shops, and steel warehouses. Handling of loose parts such as nuts or bolts is also a popular application for the CER-16 and CER-20. STANDARD FEATURES: Recessed ON-OFF-RELEASE switch is protected against accidental operation. Low-carbon steel body for maximum magnetic performance. Built-in solid state rectifier permits operation from 115 volt AC outlet. IR remote 15 from magnet. Specifications NOTE: Maximum rated lift is based upon lifting clean, smooth, flat, low-carbon steel plate, 2 or thicker with the full area of the magnet s lifting surface in contact with the load. Model Power required at 115/1/60 supply (watts) Net Diameter Height to hook Rated Lift CER lbs. 5-1/8 9-3/ lbs. CER lbs. 6-3/4 11-1/ lbs. CER lbs / lbs. CER lbs / lbs. CER lbs / lbs. CER lbs ,500 lbs. Magnetic Lifting Beams The Walker Ex-Beam is an adjustable lifting beam that gives you the flexibility to maneuver long unwieldy objects with your choice of tooling apparatus. The Ex-Beam hangers are reversible for turning rectangular magnets for lifting thin plates less than 1.5 thick. The Ex-10 has 6 adjustments on 4 centers and a load rating of 2,200 lbs. The Total travel Length is 66.0 and the weight is 220 lbs. The Ex-12 has 3 adjustments on 4 center and a load rating of 8,800 lbs. The Total Travel Length is 66.0 and the weight is 310 lbs.

197 Lifting Clamps & Beam Grabs SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS 195 Model FR - Vertical Lifting, Lock Closed The Model FR is a vertical lifting tool for relatively light work. It is small and easy to handle in capacities through three tons. It incorporates a Lock Closed feature which facilitates attaching the clamp to the plate. NOTE: Plate and Fabricated - Vertical Lifting Only PIN # Rated Capacity (tons) Plate Thickness Range FR /2 0-3/4 8 1/2 1/2-1 8 FR / / FR /4-1-1/2 23 FR / /4-1-1/2 31 Available in other plate thicknesses for any of the above rated capacities. Model JPA - Turning, Lifting, Lock Open, Lock Closed The Model JPA is a vertical lifting clamp capable of turning a single plate or member from horizontal to vertical to horizontal through a 180 degree arc. Incorporates a push button auxiliary lock. Permits side loading of lifting shackle to 90 degrees by derating of clamp s rated capacity. (See Figure at the right.) BELOW THE HOOK Model JPA incorporates a pivoting shackle that permits side loading of the lifting shackle at 100 percent of rated capacity from vertical to 30 degrees, 75 percent of rated capacity between 30 and 45 degrees and 50 percent of rated capacity between 45 and 90 degrees. Rated Capacity (tons) 1/ Plate Thickness Range 0-5/8 1/ /4 1/ /4-1-1/2 40 3/16-1-1/ /4-1-3/ / /8-1-1/ /8 93 Other plate thicknesses available for above capacities. Also available in larger capacities. NOTE: Vertical Side Pull

198 196 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS Model LJ - Vertical Lifting - Lock Closed The Model LJ is a vertical lifting clamp capable of turning a plate from horizontal to vertical and back through the same ninety degree arc. It is small and easy to handle in capacities through 3 tons. The Model LJ incorporates a Lock Closed feature, which facilitates attaching the clamp to the plate even with your gloves on! NOTE: Vertical + 90 Rated Capacity (tons) Plate Thickness A B C Max. D E F G H J Max. K 1/2 0-3/4 2-5/8 6-5/8 10-1/4 2-1/ /8 1-7/8 1/ /4 3-3/16 8-1/4 13-7/16 2-5/8 5-7/8 2-7/8 2-1/16 5/8 6-7/ / /16 3-5/8 7-1/4 3-1/4 2-7/8 3/4 7-5/ /4 4-1/4 10-3/ /8 8-3/16 305/8 3 3/4 8-3/8 34 Specifications are in inches and are subject to change without notice. Model NMBL - Locking Type The NMBL mode id used to turn plates from horizontal through a 180 degree arc. It is manufactured with smooth gripping surfaces to prevent marring when gripping stainless steel, copper, aluminum and other polished metal plates. The NMBL incorporates a lock open - lock closed feature to facilitate attaching and removing the clamp from the plate. NOTE: Non-marring Rated Capacity (tons) Jaw Opening A B C D E Max. F G H J 1/2 0-5/8 3-5/ /16 2-3/8 7-5/8 4-1/4 3-7/16 1/2 15-5/ /4 3-5/ /8 2-3/8 7-9/16 4-1/4 3-7/16 1/2 17-1/ /8 10-7/8 17-9/ /32 5-1/2 5-7/16 3/ /4-1-1/2 7-11/ / / /4 8-1/2 8-9/64 1-1/4 126 Specifications are in inches and are subject to change without notice.

199 Model AST & ASTL - Non-Locking SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS 197 Both the Model AST and ASTL were developed primarily for lifting, turning and stacking lightweight beams and structural shapes while a constant tension is applied to the lifting shackle. The horizontal shackle permits a beam to be lifted with the web in a near horizontal position by placing the clamp on the load with the shackle positioned over the web, and between the flanges. With a beam lying in a horizontal position, and the clamp placed with the shackle overhanging the flange, the beam can be lifted, turned 90 degrees, and raised in a vertical position. The Model ASTL includes all of the features of the Model AST plus a linkage which permits the tool to be removed remotely by setting the load down with the sling slack, then lifting the crane hook. Model AST NOTE: Structural - Shapes Model ASTL PIN # Model Rated Capacity (tons) Plate Thickness Range AST AST 1/2 0-3/4 10 AST AST 1-1/2 0-3/4 20 AST AST /2 50 ASTL ASTL 1/2 0-3/4 10 ASTL ASTL 1-1/2 0-3/4 24 ASTL ASTL /2 61 Model DWS - Horizontal, Locked - Closed Model DWS is a horizontal lifting clamp utilizing Refroe s famous lock-closed feature. This clamp comes in four opening sizes as shown below. BELOW THE HOOK NOTE: Clamps must be used horizontally in pairs or multiple pairs. Rated Capacity (tons) Jaw Opening B C D Std. E Option E F G H J 1/4 0-1/2 2-7/8 6-5/8 3-3/16 3/ /4 3-1/2 3/8 1/2 5 1/2 0-3/ / /4 7-3/8 4 1/2 5/ / /2 8-1/4 4-1/ /4 8-1/8 5 5/8 5/ /4 4-1/2 11-3/4 5-13/16 1-1/8 3-1/2 11-3/4 6-1/ Specifications in inches and are subject to change without notice.

200 198 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS Model BC Screw Adjusting Beam Clamp The Model BC is a multipurpose beam clamp suitable for both lifting beams or providing suspension of hoists from beams or girders, thereby eliminating the need for nuts, bolts and shackles. The Model BC clamp is intended for use on the American standard or wide flange beams. NOTE: Now available with optional soft jaw inserts. Factory installed at time of order or as Retrofit Kit for customer installation. Working Load 0 o -20 o Vertical Tons Flange Width A Flange Thickness B C D E F G H 1-1/ /2 1/4-5/8 11-7/8 11-3/4 3 1/ /4 9-1/ /2 1/4-5/8 11-7/ /8 5-3/16 6-3/4 13-1/ /2-7/ /8 3-1/4 3/4 6-5/16 6-3/4 22-1/ /2-1-1/4 21-1/4 19-1/ /2 7-1/ / /2 4-1/2 1-3/4 8-3/ / Specifications are in inches and are subject to change without notice. Model TL & TLA - Turning, Lifting, Lock Open, Lock Closed The Model TLA is a vertical lifting clamp incorporating a Lock Open and a Lock Closed feature and an auxiliary lock. The clamp is capable of turning a steel plate from horizontal to vertical to horizontal through a 180 o arc. The Lock Open, lock Closed feature facilitates attaching and removing the clamp from the plate. The Model TL is identical to the Model TLA except that it does not contain the auxiliary lock. The Model TL is capable of turning a plate from horizontal to vertical and back through the same 90 o arc. Rated Capacity (tons) Plate Thickness 1/2 0-5/8 1/ /4 1/ /4-1-1/2 4 3/16-1-1/ /4-1-3/ /8 8 3/8-1-1/ /8 12 1/2-2-1/2 2-4 Other capacities and plate thicknesses available upon request Model TL Model TLA (Vertical + 90) (Vertical + 180)

201 SECTION 7-BELOW THE HOOK PRODUCTS 199 Model SCP & SCPA Locking Screw The Model SCP and Model SCPA clamps are capable of handling steel plate from the horizontal through a 180 o arc and may be used for handling plate at rolling and forming machines. These clamps feature a spring loaded pivoting cam jaw that cams in when a load is applied to the lifting shackle. Clamp is capable of handling plate horizontally when used in pairs or sets of pairs, or in a tripod arrangement. Pivoting Shackle Assembly available on SCPA models 3 tons and larger. Model SCP Model SCPA Rated Capacity (tons) Plate Thickness SCP SCPA 1/2 0-3/ / / / Capacities through 150 tons and various plate thicknesses available upon request. Model M - Locking The Model M is a multipurpose clamp used for positioning, sorting, erection and handling of prefabricated sections. The split lower jaw enables the clamp to be particularly useful in handling structural shapes. BELOW THE HOOK The Model M incorporates a Locked Closed feature which facilitates attaching the clamp to the member being lifted. These clamps must be used in pairs, sets of pairs, or in a tripod arrangement for transporting plate horizontally. Handles are available in the 8 Ton model only. Model M Rated Capacity (tons) Jaw Opening 1/ /4-1-1/ /4-1-1/ / /2 1-1/4-2-1/ /4-3-1/ Available with other jaw openings for any of the above rated capacities.

202 200 SECTION 8-FALL RESTRAINT Retractable Lifelines FALL RESTRAINT FS-FSP1407W CLASS A RETRACTABLE 7 web carabiner 3,600lbs. gate-rated snap hook tie-back AND dual leg available engraved housing meets ANSIZ Class A standards FS-FSP1211G CLASS A RETRACTABLE w/ 11 Cable 3/16 galvanized steel FS-FSP1411W CLASS A RETRACTABLE w/ 11 Web FS-FSP1230G CLASS B RETRACTABLE 30 /40 /50 Length (larger housing for longer lengths) 3/16 Galvanized Steel carabiner 3,600lbs. gate-rated indicator snap hook swivel top engraved housing meets ANSIZ Class B standards FS-FSP1240G FS-FSP1250G

203 SECTION 8-FALL RESTRAINT 201 Harnesses & Kits FS126-E COMPLIANCE KIT FS99280-E: pass-through leg harness FS88560-E: single leg lanyard FS8125: carrying bag FS980 CONFINED SPACE SYSTEM tripod 50 recovery unit carabiner pulley FS-FLEX253-FD FS185 NO-TANGLE HARNESS no tangle pad back D-ring convenient lanyard keepers fall arrest indicators pass-through chest buckles adjustable buckles grommet buck laeg straps PREMIUM CONSTRUCTION HARNESS 2nd skin shoulder pad back D-ring quick-release leg buckles front D-ring side positioning D-rings convenient lanyard keepers fall arrest indicators free-floating comfort back pad removable grommet belt cool air leg pads FALL RESTRAINT

204 202 SECTION 8-FALL RESTRAINT Other Accessories FS810 CROSS-ARM STRAP heavy duty 1-3/4 webbing 3 or 6 length FS596 ENERGY ABSORBING LANYARD dual leg 100% tie-off stretch tubular webbing 4-6 maneuverability 3,600lbs. gate-rated FS860 FS88560-E SINGLE-LEG LANYARD 1 polyester webbing 6 length shock pad double-locking snap hooks 3,600lbs. gate-rated PREMIERE BEAM ANCHOR reduced friction nylon rollers center positioning retainer prevents jamming on beam double-toothed pawl

205 Suspended Personnel Platforms SECTION 8-FALL RESTRAINT 203 MODEL S X 96 X 88 MODEL S X 36 X 88 FALL RESTRAINT MODEL S X 48 X 88 MODEL S-R7 36 O.D. X 88 Shown with optional expanded metal roof & test weight assembly.

206 204 SECTION 8-FALL RESTRAINT Super Cage TM Models Available Model Dimensions (SWL) * T.W. L W H Capacity ** Square/Rectangular Personnel Platform S / S / S / S / S / S / S / S / S / S / S / S / S Round Personnel Platform SR DIA SR DIA SR DIA SR DIA * SWL - Safe Working Load ** T.W. - Test Model Dimensions (SWL) * T.W. L W H Capacity ** Direct Fixed Attachment to Boom/Jib DFA DFA DFA DFA DFA DFA DFA DFA DFA DFA DFA DFA DFA DFA Non-Personnel Material Platform Non-Personnel Material Platform sizes and capacity Varies on customer specific needs. SNP Varies Varies Varies Varies N/A Other Styles of Personnel Cages are Available SuperCage TM products can be ordered in any size, shape, or material to meet your specific applications. We also supply non-personnel, medical evacuation, and welding equipment SuperCages TM. Ask about our SuperCage TM DFA (Direct Fixed Attached) Personnel Platforms (cages) which attach directly to the end of the boom on most cranes. DFA models do not require a bridle assembly or anti-two block device when used in this manner. ALL SUPERCAGE TM PRODUCTS WERE DESIGNED TO INCORPORATE THE FOLLOWING AS STANDARD EQUIPMENT: 1. Removable components for easy maintenance and repairs. 2. Construction - high strength steel 2 square tubing. 3. Door - inward swing, self-closing, self-latching (with outward stop plate). 4. Grab rail on entire inside perimeter. 5. Anchors for personnel safety belts or body harness. 6. Toe plate - 6 steel (entire inside perimeter). 7. Expanded metal from floor deck to top of midrail. 8. Floor - non slip material. 9. Exterior pad eyes for anchoring and tagline use. 10. Twelve (12) upper reinforcing gussets at bail area (for added strength). 11. Special warning decals and permanent metal ID plate. 12. High durability paint, safety yellow. 13. Operating manual furnished. 14. One year manufacturer warranty. 15. Fully covered by product liability insurance. OPTIONS AVAILABLE AT ADDITIONAL COST: 1. Easily-detachable test weight assembly for load test procedure or 5 part wire rope lifting attachment (bridle). 3. Protective roof - expanded or solid metal. 4. Fixed crosshead with lifting eye (for direct attach to hook). 5. Forklift attachment with safety restraint. 6. Rubber bumpers on external perimeter. 7. Tool/storage shelf (inside). 8. Video for safe operation. 9. Alternate paint colors and finishes. PLATFORMS ARE TO BE USED ONLY IN COMPLIANCE WITH FEDERAL RULES AND REGULATIONS. SUPERCAGE TM products are designed, engineered, manufactured, and certified to meet or exceed all existing Federal and State codes, Title 29CR Part (g). Crane and Derrick Suspended Personnel Platform, Inspection, load test and certification documents furnished.

207 SECTION 9-CORDAGE CORDAGE 205 Twisted Ropes Manila A good all-purpose rope, Manila is used extensively in marine, agricultural, trucking, construction and oil exploration. Features: Inexpensive Strongest of the vegetable fibers - actually stronger when wet Low stretch - ideal for applications not requiring high strength or great elasticity Absorbs water - swells up to 100% of its weight making handling more difficult Storage - if wet, dry thoroughly to prevent mildew, rot or loss of strength Very poor chemical resistance PIN # Nominal Diameter Approx. Wt/* lbs / 100 Ft Minimum Tensile 08MANR0000 1/ MANR0601 5/ Polypropylene Polypropylene produces the lowest cost synthetic rope yet finds its way into some exacting uses. Not recommended for rendering, due to high friction and low melting point. It is the lightest rope, floats, and is available in a variety of colors (Yellow is standard). Leading uses are mooring lines, stringing lines, ski tow ropes, hand lines and pot warps. Features: Tensile strengths - about twice those of Manila ropes Stretch - about double manila for the same diameter but better than most other synthetics Absorbs no water - resistant to rot - no loss of strength when wet - floats Sensitive to ultraviolet light - darker colors better than yellow Chemical resistance - best all-round resistance of the fiber ropes Abraids easily - not recommended for rendering or high surface friction applications PIN # Nominal Diameter Approx. Wt/* lbs / 100 Ft Minimum Tensile 12MANR0602 3/ ,215 16MANR0602 1/ ,385 20MANR0602 5/ ,960 24MANR0602 3/ ,860 28MANR0000 7/ ,930 32MANR ,100 40MANR / ,150 48MANR / ,650 * will vary slightly. ** Stocked in 600 Ft. Cartons (Some smaller sizes also in 1200 Ft. Cartons) *** Available in other diameters upon request 08PPR / PPR / PPR / PPR / PPR / PPR / PPR / PPR PPR / PPR / * Stocked in 600 Ft Cartons (Some smaller sizes also in 1200 Ft Cartons) ** Available in other diameters upon request CORDAGE Note: Manila and Polypropylene ropes are sold only in full cartons Please refer to the Warning notice at the end of this section concerning Working Load Limits

208 206 SECTION 9-CORDAGE Nylon CWC Blue Steel TM Nylon was the first of the synthetic fibers to be used in rope. It is still a dominant fiber and finds its greatest use in the marine field. High energy absorption and strength make nylon ropes superior for: towing, mooring, pennants and anchoring. Features: Strongest of the conventional ropes Stretch is about 12 times that of manila and double that of polyester Nylon is 10-15% weaker when wet than dry - strength returns when dry - will not rot Sunlight degrades all synthetic fibers - second only to polyester in resistance but better than polypropylene - protect from sunlight whenever possible Excellent resistance to alkalis and most solvents - resistance to acids only fair, particularly sulphuric, hydro-chloric and nitric Good to excellent abrasion resistance when dry - less when wet - avoid grit from penetrating into or between strands PIN # Nominal Diameter Approx. /* lbs / 100 Ft Minimum Tensile 08NYR / NYR / NYR / NYR / NYR / NYR34601** 3/ N/S 7/ NYR NYR / NYR / *Stocked in 600 Ft Cartons (Some smaller sizes also in 1200 Ft Cartons). ** PIN# for Black - other PIN# s refer to white. ** Available in other diameters upon request. CWC Blue Steel TM is one of the strongest copolymer ropes in the market. It offers low elongation and twice the wear life of standard polypropylene. Constructed from high strength, high tenacity polyolefin yarns, BLUE STEEL TM offers excellent resistance to abrasion, UV light, rot, mildew and most common chemicals. With a specific gravity of 0.91, this rope floats and will not absorb water. Easy to handle and splice. Features: 30-40% stronger than standard polypro rope of comparable diameter. Greater UV and abrasion resistance. Available in a variety of pull-ups, 8 braid and 12 strand. Possible Uses: Barge Lines Tow Boat Lines Floating Hawsers Containment Lines Fishing Ropes Item Tie-Up Lines Rope Trawls Cod Ends Rib Lines Diameter * Length Reel/Coil Min. Tensile Strength Approx / Reel 950 lbs. 8 lbs / Reel 1,600 lbs 14 lbs / Reel 3,100 lbs 24 lbs /8 600 Reel 3,800 lbs 15 lbs /2 600 Reel 6,600 lbs 27 lbs /8 600 Reel 11,000 lbs 46 lbs /4 600 Coil 13,900 lbs 59 lbs /8 600 Coil 20,100 lbs 88 lbs Coil 23,100 lbs 104 lbs /8 600 Coil 30,000 lbs 142 lbs /4 600 Coil 32,900 lbs 160 lbs /2 600 Coil 46,100 lbs 234 lbs /4 600 Coil 76,500 lbs 352 lbs Coil 83,500 lbs 451 lbs /4 600 Coil 107,100 lbs 609 lbs /2 600 Coil 122,300 lbs 695 lbs Coil 176,000 lbs 1,014 lbs Note: Nylon and Blue Steel TM Poly ropes sold only in full cartons Please refer to the Warning notice at the end of this section

209 Braided Ropes SECTION 9-CORDAGE 207 Nylon Double Braid is the preferred choice for applications requiring high strength with excellent shock absorbing properties. Nylon Double Braid has good resistance to abrasion, sunlight and chemicals. Due to its high elongation, nylon is almost always used in applications involving shock loading such as anchor lines and mooring lines. Nylon Double Braid comes standard with an overlay marine finish. High stretch High strength Excellent shock absorption Soft hand Torque free Meets MIL-DTL-24050E D/S Composite Double Braid D/S Composite is a double braided rope with the inner core made of Spectra and the outer sleeve of polyester. D/S Composite has very low elongation, high strength and the feel and handling of polyester double braid. D/S Composite comes standard with an overlay marine finish and is available on special order with a spliceable polyurethane finish in clear or any of six colors. High Strength Low Stretch Soft Hand Torque Free Easy Splicing Nylon Double Braid D/S Composite Double Braid Nom. Diameter Size (Circ) Approx. (mm) Lbs/ 100ft Min. Tensile Strength Kg/100m Pounds kn 5/ , / / , / / , , / / , / / , / , / / , , Tensile Strengths are determined in accordance with Cordage Institute 1500, Test Methods for Fiber Rope. With extended immersion in water, all nylon ropes will lose up to 10% of their strength. s are calculated at linear density under standard preload (200d 2 ) plus 7%. ABS and DNV type approved sizes. Available in other diameters. Nom. Diameter Size Approx. Min. Tensile Strength (mm) (Circ) Lbs/ 100ft Kg/100 M Pounds kn 1/ / , / , / / , / / , , / / , / / , / / , , Tensile Strengths are determined in accordance with Cordage Institute 1500, Test Methods for Fiber Rope. s are calculated at linear density under standard preload (200d 2 ) plus 4%. Available in other diameters. CORDAGE Please refer to the Warning notice at the end of this section concerning Working Load Limits

210 208 SECTION 9-CORDAGE Plasma 12 Strand Plasma 12 Strand is the highest strength synthetic rope available. Plasma 12 strand is manufactured from Honeywell Spectra Fiber that has been enhanced by a patented recrystallization process. This process is especially effective in medium to large diameter ropes where strengths are over 50% higher and creep is significantly less than that of standard Spectra 12 strand. Plasma 12 Strand comes standard with a polyurethane finish and is easily spliced using a simple lockstitch type splice, or Tuck splice. Its soft, torque free braided construction provides easy handling. Features: Highest Strength Lowest Stretch Low Creep Soft Hand Torque Free Easy Splicing Floats ABS & DNV Type Approved Sizes Nom. Diameter * Size Approx. Min. Tensile Strength ** (mm) (Circ) Lbs/100ft Kg/100 M Pounds kn 1/ / , / , / / , / / , , / / , / / , / / , , , ,520, * Available in other diameters. ** Tensile Strengths are determined in accordance with Cordage Institute 1500, Test Methods for Fiber Rope. s are calculated at linear density under standard preload (200d 2 ) plus 4%. Rope Fiber Selection Guide: Fiber Properties - Typical Values Manila Sisal Cotton Nylon Polyester Polypropylene Polyethylene Aramid1 UHMWPE2 STRENGTH: Breaking Tenacity-Dry (grams/denier) Wet Strength vs. Dry Strength Shock-load Absorption Ability WEIGHT: Specific Gravity Floats ELONGATION: Percent at Break Creep (extension under sustained load) EFFECTS OF MOISTURE: Water Absorption of Individual Fibers Dielectric Properties DEGRADATION: Resistance to UV in Sunlight Resistance to Rot and Mildew Storage Requirements ROPE ABRASION RESISTANCE: Surface Internal THERMAL PROPERTIES: Melts at (degrees) RESISTANCE3: Resistance to Acids Resistance to Alkalis Resistance to Oils and Gas Up to 120% Poor 1.38 No 10-12% Very Low Up to 100% Very Poor Good Poor Dry only Good Fair Does not melt Chars at 350 o F Poor Poor Poor Up to 120% Poor 1.38 No 10-12% Very Low Up to 100% Very Poor Good Poor Dry only Fair Fair Does not melt Chars at 350 o F Poor Poor Fair Up to 120% Very Poor 1.54 No 5-12% Very Low Up to 100% Very Poor Good Poor Dry only Poor Fair Does not melt Chars at 300 o F Poor Fair Poor % Excellent 1.14 No 18-25% Moderate 2-8% Poor Good Excellent Dry only Very Good Excellent % Good 1.38 No 12-15% Low <1% Good Excellent Excellent Dry only Excellent Excellent % Very Good 0.91 Yes 15-25% High None Excellent Poor (Black is best) Excellent WetorDry Good Good % Fair 0.95 Yes 15-25% High None Excellent Poor (Black is best) Excellent WetorDry Good Good % Poor 1.44 Yes 1.5%-3.6% Very Low 3.5-7% Poor Fair Excellent WetorDry Fair Fair 420 o -480 o F 490 o -500 o F 330 o F 275 o F 800 o F-Begins to decompose Fair Very Good Very Good Good Fair Very Good Excellent Excellent Very Good 1. Based on Dupont Kevlar Data. 2. Based on Allied/Signal Spectra Data-Type 900. Ultra High Molecular Polyethylene. 3. Resistance is relative to the length of exposure, percent of concentration and temperature. Excellent Excellent Very Good Fair Fair Very Good % Fair 0.97 Yes 3.5% Moderate None Excellent Fair Excellent WetorDry Very Good Excellent 297 o F Excellent Excellent Very Good - WORKING LOADS Because of the wide range of rope use, rope condition, exposure to the factors affecting rope behavior, and the degree of risk of life and property involved, it is not realistic to make standard recommendations as to design factors or working loads. However, to provide guidelines, a range of design factors and working loads are provided for rope in good condition with appropriate splices, in non-critical applications and under normal service condition. Normal service is generally considered to be used under static or very modest dynamic load conditions. Design factors range from 5:1 to 12:1 for normal service and modest dynamic loading, and should be higher for critical applications. Finally, minimum breaking strengths vary greatly among manufacturers. Check the manufacturer s minimum break strength for the specific rope being considered.

211 SECTION 10 - CARGO CONTROL CARGO CONTROL PRODUCTS 209 Logistic & Utility Strap Assemblies Stock Strap Assemblies 1 Ratchet Strap with Vinyl S-Hook Rated 1,200 lb Working Load Limit 400 lb Part No. 20W (12 ft)* 2 Utility Ratchet with Spring Fitting Rated 3,500 lb Working Load Limit 1,170 lb Part No. 17E (12 ft)* 1 Ratchet Strap with Wire Hook Rated 3,000 lb Working Load Limit 1,000 lb Part No. 20W (15 ft)* 2 Cam Buckle with Spring Fitting Rated 3,000 lb Working Load Limit 1,000 lb Part No. 14E (12 ft)* 1 Endless Strap with Cam Buckle Rated 1,500 lb Working Load Limit 500 lb Part No (8 ft)* 2 Rope Tie-Off (shown w/spring Fitting) Rated 3,500 lb Working Load Limit 1,165 lb Part No. 07E26 (6 in) with Spring Fitting* Part No. 07E16 (6 in) with 3 pc. Fitting* 1 3/4 Series E Strap Overcenter Buckle with Spring Fitting Rated 3,500 lb Working Load Limit 1,170 lb Part No. 23E (12 ft)* 2 Long Wide Handle Ratchet with Wire Hooks Rated 10,000 lb Working Load Limit 3,300 lb Part No. 18W (27 ft)* CARGO CONTROL 1 Ratchet Strap with Wire Hook Rated 1,200 lb Working Load Limit 400 lb Part No. 19W (10 ft)* *Other lengths available upon request.

212 210 SECTION 10 - CARGO CONTROL Flat Hook Assembly Width Part No (27 ft) Part No (30 ft) Rating WLL 2 25H H ,000 lbs 3,300 lbs 3 35H H ,000 lbs 5,000 lbs 4 45H H ,000 lbs 5,000 lbs Chain Extension Assembly Width Part No (27 ft) Part No (30 ft) Rating WLL 2 25C C ,000 lbs 3,300 lbs 3 35C C ,000 lbs 5,000 lbs 4 45C C ,200 lbs 5,400 lbs Grab Hook Assembly Width Part No (27 ft) Part No (30 ft) Rating WLL 2 25C C ,000 lbs 3,300 lbs 3 35C C ,000 lbs 5,000 lbs 4 45C C ,200 lbs 5,400 lbs Delta Ring Assembly Width Part No (27 ft) Part No (30 ft) Rating WLL 2 25D D ,000 lbs 3,300 lbs 3 35D D ,000 lbs 5,000 lbs 4 45D D ,000 lbs 6,666 lbs 2 Standard Short Handle Ratchet with Flat Hooks Width Part No (27 ft) Part No (30 ft) Rating WLL 2 16H H ,000 lbs 3,300 lbs 2 Long Wide Handle Ratchet with Flat Hooks Width Part No (27 ft) Part No (30 ft) Rating WLL 2 18H H ,000 lbs 3,300 lbs 3 & 4 Long Handle Ratchet with Flat Hooks Width Part No (27 ft) Part No (30 ft) Rating WLL 3 22H H ,000 lbs 5,000 lbs 4 24H H ,000 lbs 5,000 lbs 3 & 4 Long Handle Ratchet with Chain Extensions Width Part No (27 ft) Part No (30 ft) Rating WLL 3 22C C ,000 lbs 5,000 lbs 4 24C C ,000 lbs 5,000 lbs 3 & 4 Long Handle Ratchet with Grab Hooks Width Part No (27 ft) Part No (30 ft) Rating WLL 3 22C C ,000 lbs 5,000 lbs 4 24C C ,000 lbs 5,000 lbs

213 SECTION 10 - CARGO CONTROL 211 Safety Considerations Working Load Limit Information The Commercial Vehicle Safety Alliance (CVSA), an Association of State and Provincial Officials, is responsible for the administration and enforcement of Motor Carrier Safety Laws in the United States, Canada and Mexico. ALP Web Products Division has followed the recommendations of the CVSA - Cargo Securement Tie-Down Guidelines. These guidelines recommend that straps for securing loads on commercial vehicles are labeled to indicate a Working Load Limit of 1/3 of the minimum breaking strength of the strap assembly. We have published the Working Load Limit of all assemblies, each meeting or exceeding the requirements of the CVSA. Do not use cargo assemblies for lifting applications (Consult section on Synthetic Slings). Do not use Cargo Assemblies beyond their Working Load Limit. Inspection and Care of Synthetic Tie-Downs and Components A good tie-down inspection program is based upon: Consistent inspections prior to product use Respect for the capabilities and limitations Good judgement Efficient record keeping Strap assemblies should be discarded if any of the following are present: Exposure to temperature above 194 F(90 o C) or below -40 o F (-40 o C) Melting and charring of any part of the synthetic fabric Snags, punctures, tears or cuts Broken or worn stitches Distortion of component hardware Knot (which greatly reduce the strength of the strap assembly) To maintain the quality and life of tie-downs and components: Avoid overloading strap assemblies and components Keep strap assemblies from coming in contact with sharp edges CARGO CONTROL

214 212 Part Identification SECTION 10 - CARGO CONTROL TO AVOID ERRORS IN THE INTERPRETATION OF PRODUCT REQUIREMENT,WE URGE YOU TO USE THE PRODUCT CODES WHENEVER POSSIBLE. NOTE: If an end fitting is purchased by itself, the complete part number is used (i.e., 65-H2) as listed in the Hardware section. If the end fitting is used as part of the strap assembly, only the part number following the dash is used (i.e., H2). Part No. 18-H2-324 The first two numbers of any ratchet assembly represent the main part of the strap assembly (webbing, ratchet or buckle). See the codes below. The next two characters identify the end fitting (See the Hardware Section). The last group of digits indicate the overall length in inches. Therefore, the above part number represents a 2x27 ft. overall length Ratchet Strap Assembly with a Long Wide Handle Ratchet and Flat Hooks each end. Webbing Fabric Part No. Color Nylon Treated 2,500 lbs Blue Nylon Treated 4,500 lbs Blue Polyester Treated 6,500 lbs Gray Polyester Treated 6,500 lbs Yellow Polyester Treated 6,500 lbs Blue Polyester Treated 10,000 lbs Yellow Polyester Treated 12,000 lbs Yellow Polyester Treated 15,000 lbs Yellow Polyester Treated 18,000 lbs Yellow Polyester Treated 20,000 lbs Yellow Polyester Treated 24,000 lbs Yellow Buckle & Ratchet Identification Code Web Size Description inch 1 inch 2 inches 2 inches 2 inches 2 inches 2 inches 1 inch 1 inch 3 inches 2 inches 4 inches 22-B2 Cam Buckle Assembly 22-B4 Cam Buckle Assembly 22-B5 Cam Buckle Assembly 2000 Short Wide Handle Ratchet 11,000 lbs Standard Short Handle Ratchet 11,000 lbs Utility Ratchet 4,000 lbs Long Wide Handle Ratchet 11,000 lbs Mini Ratchet (Light Duty) 1,200 lbs Mini Ratchet (Heavy Duty) 3,000 lbs Heavy Duty Long Handle Ratchet 22,000 lbs Overcenter Buckle (Series E/F Strap) 2015 Heavy Duty Long Handle Ratchet 24,000 lbs.

215 SECTION 10 - CARGO CONTROL 213 Winches & Bars Winches Part A B C D Standard Weld-In-Place Part No /2 7-7/8 4-7/ /8 7-7/8 4-7/ /2 7-7/8 4-7/ /8 7-7/8 4-7/ /2 7-7/8 4-7/ /8 7-7/8 4-7/ Low Profile Weld-In-Place Part No Standard Portable (2 Set Screws) Part No Steel Slider Track - Length 6 ft (For use with 5515 & 5516) Part No Low Profile Portable Part No Winch Bar Painted & Knurled Handle Part No Standard Sliding Part No Winch Bar Chrome Combination Part No CARGO CONTROL Deep Storable Sliding Part No Chrome Winch Bar Part No. 5544

216 214 SECTION 10 - CARGO CONTROL Buckle & Ratchet Specifications Cam Buckles & Ratchets - 1 Webbing Cam Buckles & Ratchets - 2 Webbing 3,000 lb Rated Part No. 22-B5 1,500 lb Rated Part No. 22-B4 Overcenter Buckle 1,500 lb Rated Part No ,200 lb Rated Part No Short Wide Handle 11,000 lb Rated Part No ,000 lb Rated Part No Standard Handle 11,000 lb Rated Part No Continued Next Page

217 SECTION 10 - CARGO CONTROL 215 Buckle & Ratchet Specifications Cam Buckles & Ratchets - 2 Webbing (continued) Long Wide Handle 11,000 lb Rated Part No Cam Buckles & Ratchets - 3 Webbing 3 Heavy Duty Long Handle 22,000 lb Rated Part No Utility Ratchet 4,000 lb Rated Part No Cam Buckles & Ratchets - 4 Webbing 4 Heavy Duty Long Handle 24,000 lb Rated Part No Hook End Standard Handle 5,000 lb Rated Part No CARGO CONTROL

218 216 SECTION 10 - CARGO CONTROL End Fitting Hardware Delta Ring 2 10,000 lb Rated Delta Ring 4 20,000 lb Rated D Ring 1 3,000 lb Rated D Ring 2 10,000 lb Rated Part No. 62-D3 Part No. 62-D4 Part No. 62-D1 Part No. 62-D6 Round Ring 5,000 lb Rated Wire Hook1 3,000 lb Rated Wire Hook1 4,000 lb Rated Wire Hook2 5,000 lb Rated Part No. 62-D9 Part No. 63-W1 Part No. 63-W12 Part No. 63-W2 Wire Hook2 10,000 lb Rated Wire Hook3 22,000 lb Rated Open Hook1 1,200 lb Rated BeamSocket Use w/2x4 or 2x6 Lumber Part No. 63-W11 Part No. 63-W14 Part No. 63-W3 (Plated) Part No. 63-W4 (Vinyl Coated) Part No SeriesE&A Track Fitting 2 3,500 lb Rated SeriesE&A Track Fitting 2 3,500 lb Rated Spring Activated SeriesF Track Fitting 2 1,500 lb Rated SeriesF Track Hook 2 1,000 lb Rated Part No. 66-E1 Part No. 66-E2 Part No. 66-E3 Part No. 66-E6

219 SECTION 10 - CARGO CONTROL 217 Flat Hook2 10,000 lb Rated Flat Hook3 &4 15,000 lb Rated Flat Hook2 6,000 lb Rated SnapHook1 3,000 lb Rated Part No. 65-H2 Part No. 65-H4 Part No. 65-H3 Part No. 64-S3 SnapHook2 5,000 lb Rated SnapHook 2 w/spacer 5,000 lb Rated Twisted SnapHook2 10,000 lb Rated Forged SnapHook2 10,000 lb Rated Part No. 64-S1 Part No. 64-S8 Part No. 64-S2 Part No. 64-S4 Snap Hook w/spacers 2 11,000 lb Rated Bolt on Hook2 11,000 lb Rated Bolt on Swivel JHook2 11,000 lb Rated Bolt on Flat Stock 2 5,000 lb Rated Part No. 64-S9 Part No. 64-JH Part No. 64-SJH Part No. 64-FS Grab Hook Assembly 16,200 lb Rated Chain Anchor Assembly 16,200 lb Rated Chain Ratchet Adapter 2 11,000 lb Rated Cluster Hook(RTJ) RHook-GeneralMotors&Chrysler 16,000 lb Rated CARGO CONTROL THook-Ford 25,000 lb Rated JHook-Import 12,000 lb Rated Part No. 70-C1 Part No. 70-C2 Part No. 70-C3 Part No. 70-C5

220 218 SECTION 10 - CARGO CONTROL Specialty Straps Vehicle Recovery Straps Vehicle Recovery Straps are not designed or approved for use in lifting applications. 2 Ply Heavy Duty Nylon Construction 2 in, 3 in, and 4 in Widths 20 ft & 30 ft Lengths Custom Lengths Available Waste/Rolloff Container Hooks Waste and Rolloff Container Hooks secure the container from moving and shifting during transit. Used with 4 wide straps, they have a specially designed hook to fit your container. Style 2 allows webbing to be changed in the field. Waste/Rolloff Container - Style 1 Part No. 5525DH0000 Waste/Rolloff Container - Style 2 (Webbing may be changed in the field) Part No. 87A

221 SECTION 10 - CARGO CONTROL 219 Chains & Load Binders Ratchet Chain Binder Stock Chain Grade Usage Min.-Max Chain Size Working Load Limit Proof Load Each Handle Length Barrel Length Take Up Blue Gr 43 & 70 5/16-3/ Lever Chain Binder Stock Std. Pkg. Min.-Max Chain Size Working Load Limit Proof Load Each Handle Length Take Up Blue 4 5/16-3/ Binder Chains Size Working Load Limit * Stock Yellow Dichromate 5/16x20ft w/ Grab Hooks 3/8x20ft w/ Grab Hooks 22 lbs per each lbs per each CARGO CONTROL

222 220 SECTION 10 - CARGO CONTROL Other Cargo Control Products Interior Bars Series E & A Shoring/Decking Beam Sturdy and durable, the E Bar is made from 6061-T6 heat-treated aluminum. Shoring and decking position will support 2,000 lb uniformly distributed. Shoring/Decking Beam 1 Adjusts from 84.5 to 95.4 / 20.5 lb ea. Part No Shoring/Decking Beam 2 Adjusts from 90.8 to /21 lb ea. Part No GRIP-TITE Bar The GRIP-TITE Bar, with a rubber foot pad on each end, expands to fit tightly against the sides of the trailer. GRIP-TITE Bar Steel, Adjusts from 89 to 105 / 9.4 lb ea. Part No. 5814S Ratcheting GRIP-TITE Bar Steel Ratcheting, Adjusts from 89 to 105 / 9.4 lb ea. Part No. 5814SR

223 SECTION 10 - CARGO CONTROL 221 E Track The E Track is Designed for use with Shoring/Decking Beams and Series E Fittings. E Track Finish: Green Material: 12 Gauge, High-Strength Steel Length: Standard 10 ft : 17 lb Part No Corner Protector Corner Protector Part No. 70-C4 For webbing widths up to 4, durable super-strength Corner Protectors are designed for loads requiring extra protection for the strap or cargo. Rubber Tension Ties These durable Rubber Tension Ties hold items securely in place and provide constant tension with reinforced ends for added life. Part Strap Length Overall Length CARGO CONTROL

224 222 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS Cable Cutters Hammer-Type Cable Cutters The Finest Quality. The original portable impact cutters, invented by Morse-Starrett, and designed for one purpose: to cut wire rope. Actuated by striking with a hammer, they are simple to operate, and do a superior cutting job with only a few blows. These cutters are precision engineered to deliver a cut without affecting the original roundness of the wire rope. The blades and dies are made of the best tool steel available, heat treated and ground to close tolerances. No other similar product matches M-S quality of material and workmanship. TOOLS & OTHER ITEMS Parts for Morse Starrett Impact Cutters Model No. 1 (Light Duty) Description Part Packed Cutter Complete 101 8lbs Casting Base 102 4lbs. Plunger 103 3lbs. Die (Set) 104 4oz. Blade (With Pin) 105 2oz. Blade Pin Only 106 1oz. Plunger Guide Pin 107 1oz Guard oz. Warning Decals 109 Model No. 1A (Heavy Duty) Model 1 For Cutting Wire Rope: Up to 3/4 - Use Model 1 Up to 1-1/16 - Use Model 1A Up to 1-1/2 - Use Model 2 Model 1A & Model 2 Wear safety goggles, use cable bands, and read instruction sheet before using this tool. Specifications Model Capacity Height Base 1 3/ /2 7 lbs. Description Part Packed Cutter Complete lbs. Casting Base lbs. Plunger lbs. Die (Set) oz. Blade (With Pin) oz. Blade Pin Only oz. Plunger Guide Pin oz. Guard oz. Warning Decals 129 Model No. 2 (Extra Heavy Duty) Description Part Packed Cutter Complete lbs. Cashing Base lbs Plunger lbs. Die (Set) oz. Blade (With Pin) oz. Blade Pin Only oz. Plunger Guide Pin oz. Guard oz. Warning Decals 139 1A 1-1/ /4 15 lbs / /4 28 lbs. Firm base required for operation. Morse Starrett guarantees to replace, free of charge, any tools or parts that do not meet its specifications in material or workmanship. Performance guaranteed.

225 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS 223 Hydraulic Cable Cutters Manually Operated Hydraulic Wire Rope Cutter The self-contained hydraulic cable cutter is a precision - engineered tool designed to give a clean cut with minimum effort. Just pump the handle... no outside power is required. This self-contained portable tool can easily be carried and is used by contractors, rigging lofts, and elevator repairmen. The Pell Hydrashear is recommended by wire rope manufacturers and used by industries throughout the world. The blades and die sets are made of the finest tool steel available, heat treated and ground to close tolerances. This means a long life for the blades as well as superior performance. All three models will operate underwater. Models W-075, P-1125, & C-1750 The hydraulic cutters are available in three sizes and capacities: Model W-075 has a 3/4 capacity Model P-1125 has a11/8 capacity Model C-1750 has a 1 3/4 capacity Power Operated Hydraulic Wire Rope Cutter The power operated cutters require an external hydraulic power source for operation. These models can be activated by any electric, gasoline, hand, battery or air operated hydraulic pump capable of developing 10,000 PSI and having free flow return through the pressure line. Models POC-1750 & POC-1125 The pumps are hose-connected to the Hydrashear body. The power operated cutters are available in three sizes and cutting capacities: Model POC-1125 has a 1-1/8 capacity Model POC-1750 has a 1-3/4 capacity Model POC-2500 has a 2-1/2 capacity TOOLS & OYHER PRODUCTS Model POC-2500

226 224 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS Manual Cable Cutters Required under Category III Safety Regulations of the Offshore Racing Rules, Swiss-made Felco cutters are recognized around the world for their precision manufacture and cutting capabilities. Felco blades are designed with unique triangular jaws for quick, easy cable cutting without leaving a frayed edge. Lightweight enough for overhead cutting, yet strong enough for underwater work, these cutters have plastic coated handles for a firm, comfortable grip. They are an invaluable tool for any boat owner. All cutters are tested before leaving the factory. Replacement parts are available from stock. TYPE C7 - The lightest Felco Cable Cutters available. Capacity: 3/ 16 diameter and smaller. Length: 7.5 : 9.5 oz. TYPE CP - Indispensable for cutting steel strapping and banding. They are also especially good for cutting string, twine, rope, tin and many other materials with ease. The red plastic handle is fitted to the hand for comfort. A thumb catch locks the cutter when not in use. Length: 8 : 10 oz. TYPE C Simple construction, all parts protected against rust and salt water. Designed as an indispensable part of boat equipment. Especially suited for quick easy cutting of shrouds, stays, halyards, and other rigging of hi-tensile wire rope or cable up to 5/16 diameter. Inexpensive insurance for that rare time when a mast breaks. The C-108 will cut virtually any material including steel rods up to 5/16 diameter and tempered steel spring wires up to 1/4 diameter. Length: 22 : 4.5 lbs. TYPE C12 Capacity: 3/8 diameter and smaller. Length: 19 3 lbs. TYPE C16 Capacity: 5/8 diameter and smaller. Length: 23 : 5 lbs.

227 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS 225 Corrosion Protective Coating Fluid Film is classified as non-toxic and non-hazardous and contains less than one percent VOC content, helping to eliminate the use of ozone-depleting chemicals in the atmosphere. Fluid Film contains no solvents, phenols, heavy metals, arsenic, pcb s, pc s, tcdd s or other dioxin related substances. It is manufactured using an all natural lanolin base. Once applied Fluid Film s flash point is a high 405 F, compared to typical 125 F for solvent-based products. While most products of its kind contain between seventy (70%) and ninety percent (90%) solvent, Fluid Film contains none, except for the propellant in its aerosol cans. This means that only ten (10%) to thirty percent (30%) of competing products are usable corrosion control material. The rest evaporates, contaminating the atmosphere and is useless to the user. Fluid Film is composed of petroleum oils and wool wax to combat corrosion, metal wetting, and water displacement. Surface preparation is minimal. Applied in single coat and requiring no curing time. The high flash point minimizes fire hazard. Available in liquid, aerosol, and gel formats and in spray cans, one gallon, five gallon, and full drum containers. Marine Anchor Chains Rigging Boat davits Ballast Tanks Hatch dogs Chain lockers Shaft Alleys Pumps, etc. Industrial Hand tools Parts in storage Machinery Inaccessible areas Pipes Tanks, etc. Logging Standing rigging Running lines Tools Machinery, etc. TOOLS & OYHER PRODUCTS

228 226 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS Klein Hand Tools Bull-Pin and Bolt Bags Part 5416T Bolt bag with bull-pin loop on each side. Made of No. 4 Canvas with double bottom and belt loops or tunnel loop. Canvas 5 x 9 x 10 deep (13 x 23 x 25 cm). Loops fit belts up to 3 wide (76 mm). With tunnel loop. Also available in Leather. Wide-Opening Straight-Wall Buckets 6 Canvas. Black molded polypropylene bottom and rope handle. 12 Diameter 15 High Catalog Special Features P 8 x 8 Inside Pocket S No Swivel Snap PS 8 x 8 Inside Pocket & No Swivel Snap 2.40 Standard Side Cutters for Rebar Work Specially designed and sharpened for cutting soft annealed tie wire used on reinforcing rods. Special, heavy, knurled jaws. Hook bends in one handle for non-slip grip. Coil spring holds jaws open. Erection Wrench Holder Wrench holders have tool-slots for two erection wrenches. 5459T has tunnel loop to fit belts up to 3-1/2 wide (89mm) or to slide over D-rings, buckles and other accessories. Nominal Size 6 x9-1/2 (15x24 cm). Made of Leather. Snap Loop Loop with snap hook for carrying an adjustable wrench, welder s igniter or other tool with hang hole. Slides on belts up to 4 wide (102mm). Nominal Size 1-1/4 x9 (3x23 cm). Made of Leather.

229 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS 227 Erection Wrenches Catalog Nut Type Bolt Size Nominal Opening Length 3212 U.S. Heavy 3/4 1-1/4 16-5/ U.S. Heavy 7/8 1-7/ / U.S. Heavy 1 1-5/8 18 Drop-forged from select alloy steel to withstand high-leverage and heavy loads. Extra-heavy-duty head area gives maximum strength and durability. Wrench handle features an extra-deep offset to provide an additional hand-clearance without sacrificing tightening power. Continuous taper of handle make lining-up bolt holes easy, allows use on a range of bolt-hole sizes without binding. Extralarge hub area allows use on larger diameter holes than possible with most other wrenches. Available in heavy, regular and utility nut sizes. Catalog number, bolt size and nominal opening size are stamped on every wrench for easy identification. American Bridge Design. Catalog Top Diameter /4 (31.8 MM.) /16 (27.0 MM.) Point Diameter 5/16 (7.9 MM.) 1/4 (6.4 MM.) All dimensions are nominal. Length 13-3/4 (349 MM.) 10 (254mm) Broad-Head Bull Pins A drop-forged, heat-treated bull pin which increases efficiency by providing a larger striking surface. Design of the head also reduces chance of pin slipping from the hand when aligning holes. Angled head and smooth blending of radii increase strength and reduce the danger of chipping. Below the head, squared-off shoulders have been forged to provide a surface for applying wrench to loosen wedged bull pins. Long, even taper reduces binding and hang-up. Klein broad-head bull pins offer added resistance to mushrooming, permitting much longer use than is possible with conventional designs. Black finish. Note: OSHAspecifically states that, impact tools such as drift pins, wedges, and chisels, shall be kept free of mushroomed heads. Adjustable Wrench - Extra Capacity Design Jaws open 3/16 (4mm) wider than standard wrenches, length for length. Extra capacity allows use of a smaller size wrench to handle bigger jobs. Ideal for use in confined spaces. Same rugged construction as standard design. Chrome plated. Max Opening 1-1/2 (38mm). Adjustable-Head Construction Wrench Versatile wrench fits all nuts and bolts to 1-1/2 (38.1 MM.). Eliminates the need for carrying several fixed-size wrenches. Drop-forged from select alloy steel with continuous-taper handle. Industrial black finish. Max Opening 1-1/2 (38.1 mm). Hexagonal Bars Cat. No. Hex. Diameter Length /4 (19.1 mm) 30 (762 mm) /8 (22 mm.) 36 (914 mm) TOOLS & OYHER PRODUCTS

230 228 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS Wire Rope Grips Wire Mesh Grips Flexible Tube Grips Double weave mesh construction High strength galvanized steel Easy installation and removal Reusable Heavy Duty Grips with Flexible Eye Double weave variable mesh for greater strength and gripping power High strength galvanized steel eye attaches easily to swivel Longer-wearing reinforced tubular metal shoulder protects cable ends Functional and dependable pulling tool Pulls one or several cables Reusable Follows line of pull without bending Catalog s Cable Diameter Range Approx. Breaking Strength Mesh Length FTD FTD FTD FTD FTD FTD FTD FTD FTD FTD FTD FTD FTD FTD FTD FTD FTD Catalog Cable Diameter Range Approx. Breaking Strength E M PH PH PHO PH PH PH PH PH PH

231 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS 229 Haven Grips Designed for use when light, compact grip is desired and where conductor damage is not a factor. Gripping pressure of the knurled jaw is applied to 1/4 (6.35mm) cable area L and 1625 series have a swing latch to help hold cable in the jaw. Catalog Minimum Cable Maximum Cable Size Maximum Safe Approx. Size (mm) (mm) Load - (kg) Each - (kg) B&S.06 (1.52) 2 B&S.25 (6.35) 2500 (1136) 2.08 (0.9) B&S.125 (3.18) Steel Strand.50 (12.70) 5000 (2272) 2.08 (0.9) Catalog Minimum Cable Maximum Cable Size Maximum Safe Approx. Size (mm) (mm) Load - (kg) Each - (kg) L 8 B&S.125 (3.18) Steel Strand.50 (12.70) 5000 (2272) 2.08 (0.9) Catalog Minimum Cable Size (mm) Maximum Cable Size- (mm) Maximum Safe Load - (kg) Approx. Each - (kg) B&S.28 (7.11) Wire Rope.75 (19.05) 8000 (3629) 4 (1.8) /8.38 (9.65) Wire Rope.88 (22.35) 8000 (3629) 4 (1.8) (12.70) Wire Rope 1.00 (25.40) 8000 (3629) 4 (1.8) Proper maintenance and field inspection of all grips is necessary before each use. Check to be sure there is no accumulation of foreign material in the jaws which might cause slippage. Use Cat. No Wire Brush Set. Check mechanical condition of entire grip. Check grip to be sure it is the correct size and type for the application. Clean and lubricate. DO NOT lubricate gripping surfaces of jaws. Check all parts for distortion or misalignment. Do not exceed rated capacity. Before each use, clean jaw area and inspect grip for proper operation to avoid slippage. Always match proper size and type grip to application. When used on or near energized lines, ground, insulate or isolate grip before pulling. TOOLS & OYHER PRODUCTS

232 230 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS Marine Products Stud Link Chain A Chain Size Dimensions Test Requirements (mm) Link Length A Link Width B Length per 15 over Fm shot 5-Links (Appx.) Proof Load Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Oil Rig Quality Break Load Proof Load Break Load Proof Load Break Load Proof Load Break Load No. of Links per 15 Fm Shot 5/ /4 2-1/4 13-3/ / /2 2-5/8 16-1/ /8 2-7/8 17-7/ / /4 3-1/8 19-1/ /8 3-5/ / / / /8 3-3/4 23-3/ / / / / /8 4-1/4 26-1/ / /2 4-1/2 27-1/ / /8 4-3/4 28-7/ / /4 4-15/ / / /8 5-3/ / / / / /8 5-5/8 34-3/ / /4 5-7/8 35-3/ / /8 6-1/ / / /2 6-5/ / / /8 6-1/2 39-7/ / /4 6-3/4 41-1/ / / / / / /8 7-7/ / / /4 7-5/8 46-3/ / /8 7-7/8 48-1/ / /2 8-1/8 49-1/ / /8 8-5/ / / /4 8-9/ / / /8 8-3/4 53-5/ / / /8 9-1/4 56-3/ / /4 9-7/ / / /8 9-11/ / / /2 9-7/8 60-1/ / /8 10-1/8 61-7/ / /4 10-3/8 63-1/ / /8 10-9/ / / Larger sizes are available.

233 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS 231 Detachable Anchor Connecting Link Chain Size Dimensions Proof Test in No. (mm) A B C D E F G H J K Pounds Break Test in Pounds 2 3/4-15/ /8 5-1/16 1-1/ /4 2-1/ /8 21/32 1-3/ / /8 6-3/ /16 1-3/16 1-1/2 2-19/ /4 3/4 1-3/ /4-1-9/ /4 8-1/8 2-1/16 1-9/16 1-7/8 3-1/4 1-9/16 x 1-3/4 2-7/32 1-1/ / / /8 10-1/ /2 3-15/ /16 x 2-3/8 2-29/32 1-1/4 2-1/ /16-2-3/ /8 12-5/16 3-5/8 2-3/ /4 2-7/16 x 2-7/8 3-15/ / / /16-3-1/ / /16 4-5/8 3-1/8 3-3/4 5-7/8 3-3/8 x 3-1/8 4-3/8 1-29/ /16-3-5/ /4 16-1/2 5-1/4 3-5/8 4-7/8 5-7/8 4-3/8 x 4 5-1/8 x 5-1/4 2-1/8 3-1/ /16-3-3/ /4 17-1/8 5-3/4 3-7/8 5-1/8 6-1/4 4-7/8 x 5-3/8 5-9/16 2-1/4 3-1/ / /2 7-1/2 4-3/4 6-1/2 7-1/2 4-7/8 x 5-13/16 7-1/8 2-7/8 4-1/ /16-4-3/ / /4 x 6-1/8 7-5/ / /16-4-1/ /2 8-1/2 5-1/4 7-1/4 8-1/2 6-1/2 x 6-7/ /8 4-1/ Oval Pin Joining Shackles Chain Size (mm) A B C D E F G H 1/2-5/ /16 3-1/ /8 1-5/8 1-1/ / / / / /8 1-1/8 5 13/16-7/ /4 4-1/2 2-5/8 1-1/8 3-5/8 2-1/4 1-9/16 1-1/ /8 4-7/ /4 3-7/8 2-3/8 1-3/4 1-3/ /16-1-1/ /8 5-3/8 3-3/8 1-3/8 4-1/4 2-5/8 1-15/16 1-1/ /16-1-1/ /8 5-7/8 3-5/8 1-1/2 4-5/8 2-7/8 2-1/8 1-3/ /16-1-3/ /4 6-1/2 4-1/4 1-3/4 5-1/ / /16-1-1/ /2 6-7/8 4-5/8 1-7/8 5-3/8 3-1/8 2-3/4 2-1/ /16-1-5/ /4 7-3/ /4 3-3/8 2-15/16 2-3/ /16-1-3/ /8 8-1/8 5-1/4 2-1/4 6-1/8 3-5/8 3-1/8 2-1/ /16-1-7/ /8 8-3/ /2 6-3/4 3-3/4 3-1/2 2-7/ /16-2-1/ /8 9-1/2 6-5/8 2-3/4 7-1/ /8 3-1/ /16-2-3/ /8 10-3/8 7-1/ /4 4-3/8 4-1/4 3-3/ /16-2-5/ /8 11-1/ /4 8-3/4 4-5/8 4-5/8 3-3/ /16-2-7/ /2 12-3/8 8-5/8 3-5/8 9-1/8 5-1/ / /8 13-1/4 9-5/ /8 5-1/4 5-5/8 4-1/2 293 Larger Sizes Available. TOOLS & OYHER PRODUCTS

234 232 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS Detachable Chain Connecting Link Chain Size (mm) A B C D E F G Proof Test Break Test 3/ / /64 3/4 27/32 59/64 1/2 67,500 91, /16-7/ /4 3-1/2 1-7/32 7/8 63/64 1-1/16 19/32 88, , / / /8 1-7/ , , /16-1-1/ /4 4-1/2 1-9/16 1-1/8 1-17/64 1-3/8 47/64 145, , /16-1-1/ / /64 1-1/4 1-13/ /32 13/16 178, , /16-1-3/ /4 5-1/2 1-29/32 1-3/8 1-35/ /64 29/32 211, , /16-1-1/ /64 1-1/2 1-11/ /64 63/64 252, , /16-1-5/ /4 6-1/2 2-1/4 1-5/8 1-63/ /64 1-1/16 292, , /16-1-3/ /2 7-1/2 2-7/16 1-3/ /32 1-3/16 352, , /16-1-7/ /4 7-1/4 2-1/2 1-7/8 2-5/ / /64 285, , / /4 2-1/ /16 2-1/2 1-5/16 322, , /16-2-1/ /4 8-1/4 2-21/32 2-1/8 2-1/2 2-21/ /32 362, , /16-2-1/ /2 8-23/ /16 2-1/4 2-5/8 2-13/16 1-1/2 403, , /16-2-3/ /4 9-7/32 3-1/16 2-3/8 2-3/4 2-15/16 1-9/16 447, , /16-2-1/ /16 3-1/8 2-1/2 2-7/8 3-1/8 1-21/32 492, , /16-2-5/ /4 10-3/16 3-1/4 2-5/8 3-1/16 3-1/16 1-3/4 540, , /16-2-3/ / / /16 2-7/8 3-1/4 3-11/ /16 640, , /16-2-7/ /4 11-1/8 3-19/32 2-7/8 3-11/32 3-9/ /32 649, , / /8 3-3/ /32 3-3/4 1-31/32 693,000 1,045, Larger Sizes Available. Kenter Detachable Connecting Links Chain Size A B C D E F G H (mm) 3/ /2 3-1/8 3/4 7/ /2 1 7/ /4 3-11/16 1-5/16 7/ /8 9/16 1-3/ /16 1-1/ /8 1-1/ /8 1-1/ /4 4-3/4 1-11/16 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-7/16 3/4 1-1/2 1-1/ /2 5-1/4 1-7/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-9/16 13/ /16 1-3/ /4 5-3/4 2-1/8 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-3/4 15/16 1-7/8 1-1/ /16 2-1/4 1-1/2 1-11/ / / /4 6-13/16 2-1/2 1-5/8 1-13/16 2-1/16 1-3/32 2-3/16 1-3/ /2 7-5/16 2-5/8 1-3/ /4 1-3/16 2-3/8 1-7/ /4 7-7/8 2-7/8 1-7/8 2-1/8 2-3/8 1-1/4 2-1/ /8 3-1/ /4 2-9/ / /16 2-1/ /4 8-15/16 3-1/4 2-1/8 2-3/8 2-3/4 1-7/16 2-7/8 2-1/ /2 9-3/8 3-7/16 2-1/4 2-1/2 2-7/8 1-1/ / /4 9-15/16 3-5/8 2-3/8 2-11/16 3-1/ /32 3-7/32 2-1/ /2 3-13/16 2-1/2 2-13/16 3-3/ /16 3-3/8 2-5/ /4 11-1/ / /8 1-3/4 3-9/16 Larger Sizes Available.

235 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS 233 Pilot Ladders The DJM Series Pilot Ladder replaces the obsolete Jacob s and Chain Suspension Ladder. The step spacing is 13-3/4 inches. DJM-I lengths up to 60 feet (USCG Approval Series /11/0). DJM-II length up to 90 feet (USCG Approval Series /17/0). DJM-I Ladder has steps/spreaders of hardwood except for the bottom 4 steps that are the same as found on the DJM II to withstand greater impact. DJM II ladder has all synthetic step/spreaders made from Dupont high impact strength surlyn HP. All steps and spreaders are painted international orange. All steps and spreaders have non-skid grit applied to the surface using 2-part epoxy. All U. S. C. G. ladders have the A. L. Don patented clamp made from Dupont high impact strength surlyn HP that is designed for quick step replacement with no special tools. The suspension rope is one continuous length on each side comprised of 3/4 diameter 3-strand synthetic PolyPro-Dacron with a white outer jacket and an orange inner safety core. All U. S. C. G. ladders are tested to 2000 lbs. Steps are tested to 700 lbs. with no more than 3/4 deflection. Replacement steps/spreaders are white in color designed in the same manner as the original steps/spreaders to allow for quick replacement. Standard Lanyards are 10 ft. in accordance with CFR specifications. Other lengths available. SOLAS type ladders available also if U. S. C. G. approval is not required. Embarkation Ladders The ERIK Series Embarkation Ladder replaces the obsolete Chain Suspension Ladder. The step spacing is 15 inches. ERIK-I lengths up to 95 feet SOLAS (USCG Approval Series /6/0). ERIK-II lengths up to 110 feet SOLAS (USCG Approval Series /7/0). ERIK - I ladder has steps of hardwood. ERIK-II ladder has all synthetic steps made from Dupont high impact strength surlyn HP. All steps are painted international orange. All steps have non-skid rit applied to the surface of all steps using 2-part epoxy. All U.S.C.G. ladders have the A. L. Don patented clamp made from Dupont high impact strength surlyn HP that is designed for quick step replacement with no special tools. The suspension rope is one continuous length on each side comprised of 3/4 diameter 3-strand synthetic PolyPro-Dacron with a white outer jacket and an orange inner safety core. All U. S. C. G. ladders are tested to 2000 lbs. Steps are tested to 700 lbs. with no more than 3/4 deflection. Replacement steps/spreaders are white in color designed in the same manner as the original steps/spreaders to allow for quick replacement. Both ERIK-I and ERIK-II come with a two (2) foot tail complete with thimble/ring assembly. SOLAS type ladders available if U.S.C.G. approval is not required. TOOLS & OYHER PRODUCTS

236 234 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS Mooring Buoys Swivel & Eye Style Mooring Buoys Features Include: Hot dipped galvanized swivel & eyes (also available in stainless steel) Interior rod bent to prevent pull-thru in stormy conditions Hard Polyethylene shell - 2 lb. high density foam filled Standard color is white Also available in orange, specify O, and yellow, specify Y Model Diameter Premium Mark V Selection Chart Swivel & Eye Buoyancy (+/- 5 lb) Pack Shipping /2 22 lb 4 26 lb /2 46 lb 4 42 lb /2 90 lb 1 14 lb /8 209 lb 1 27 lb /8 400 lb 1 47 lb Tube Style Mooring Buoys Features Include: 2, 2-1/2 & 3 PVC Tube (other sizes available) Hard Shell - 2 lb. high-density foam filled Standard color is white Also available in orange, specify O and yellow, specify Y Premium Mark V Selection Chart - Tube Style Model Diameter Tube Size Buoyancy (+/- 5 lb) Pack Shipping 4402-T lb 1 13 lb 4402-T-2-1/ /2 86 lb 1 13 lb 4402-T lb 1 13 lb 4403-T lb 1 24 lb 4403-T-2-1/ /2 195 lb 1 24 lb 4403-T lb 1 24 lb 4404-T lb 1 47 lb 4404-T-2-1/ /2 395 lb 1 47 lb 4404-T lb 1 47 lb Drum Mooring Buoy Feature Include: Heavy Duty Construction High Density Polyethylene Maximum syability - flat top & bottom Galvanized swivel & eye (Stainless available) 3 tube will accommodate model 4000 mooring system Model Diameter Swivel & Eye Buoyancy (+/- 5 lb) Pack Shipping /8 240 lb 1 33 lb 4304-T 30 3 Tube 230 lb 1 30 lb

237 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS 235 Cleats-Chocks-Bollards Open Base Cleats Dock Cleats No No Size (Length) 3 1/ Size (Length) Finish Galv Galv Galv Galv Galv Galv Galv Galv Galv Screw No /4 5/16 1/4 3/8 3/8 5/8 Wt. Lbs. 3/16 1/4 3/8 1/2 1-1/4 2-1/4 3-1/4 6-1/4 11-1/2 Finish Galv Galv Galv Galv Galv Galv Screw No. 7/16 1/2 5/8 3/4 3/4 7/8 Wt. Lbs / Welt Down Cleats Kevel Cleats No No Size (Length) Size (Length) Finish SC SC SC SC SC SC SC SC Wt. Lbs Finish SC SC SC SC SC Wt. Lbs Chocks Bollards No No Size Opening Length Inches 8 9-1/4 10-3/ /4 14-3/ /4 24 Opening Height Inches 4 4-3/8 5-3/ /8 7-3/ /8 12 Overall Length Inches 19-3/4 22-3/8 25-1/4 27-3/4 30-3/8 33-1/ No A complete range of bollards is available including: Doubles, singles, towing style, barge style, mooring style, bollards with horns, straight or angular, four post towing, and others. Call with your requirements. TOOLS & OYHER PRODUCTS

238 236 SECTION 11 - TOOLS &OTHER ITEMS Zinc Anodes ZSS-12* Anode CORE: Galvanized steel strap bolt or weld-on attachment. ZSS-12 Type Dimensions L x W x T Approx. ZSS /4 12 lbs. ZHS-23* Anode With galvanized steel straps. Also available with brass straps. CORE: Two straps for weld-on installation. ZHS-23 Type Dimensions L x W x T Approx. ZHS /4 23 lbs. ZHS-50* Anode CORE: Galvanized steel strap for weld-on or bolting to studs welded to structure. ZHS-50 Type Dimensions L x W x T Approx. Core ZHS /2 4-1/ /4 x 1-1/2 x 1/4 48 lbs. ZHN ZHN* Anode PLATE TYPE: ZHN series without cores. Type Dimensions L x W x T Approx. ZHN /2 10 lbs. ZHN lbs. * Anodes meet MIL-A-18001H

239 SECTION 12 - USEFUL INFORMATION USEFUL INFORMATION Wire Rope Definitions Ropes Spiral Rope - An assembly of two or more layers of shaped and/or round wires laid helically over a center, usually a single round wire. There are three categories of spiral rope, i.e. spiral strand, half locked coil and fulllocked coil. Spiral Strand - An assembly of two or more layers of round wires laid helically over a center, usually a single round wire. Half-Locked Coil Rope - A spiral rope type having an outer layer of wires containing alternate half lock and round wires. Full-Locked Coil Rope - A spiral rope having an outer layer of full lock wires. Stranded Rope - An assembly of several strands laid helically in one or more layers around a core or center. There are three categories of stranded rope, i.e. single layer, multi-layer and parallel-closed. Single Layer Rope - Stranded rope consisting of one layer of strands laid helically over a core. Note: Stranded ropes consisting of three of four outer strands may, or may not, have a core. Some three and four strand single layer ropes are designed to generate torque levels equivalent to those generated by Rotation-Resistant ropes. Rotation-Resistant Rope - Stranded rope designed to generate reduced levels of torque and rotation when loaded and comprising an assembly of two or more layers of strands laid helically around the center, the direction of lay of the outer strands being opposite to that of the underlying layer. Rotation-Resistant Rope Category 1 - Stranded rope constructed in such a manner that it displays little or no tendency to rotate, or, if guided, transmits little or no torque, has at least fifteen outer strands and comprising an assembly of at least three layers of strands laid helically over a center in two or three operations, the direction of lay of the outer strands being opposite to that of the underlying layer. Rotation-Resistant Rope Category 2 - Stranded rope constructed in such a manner that it has significant resistance to rotation, has at least ten out strands and comprising an assembly of two or more layers of strands laid helically over a center in two or three operations, the direction of lay of the outer strands being opposite to that of the underlying layer. Rotation-Resistant Rope Category 3 - Stranded rope constructed in such a manner that it has limited resistance to rotation, has no more than nine outer strands and comprising an assembly of two layers of strands laid helically over a center in two operations, the direction of lay of the outer strands being opposite to that of the underlying layer. Compacted Strand Rope - Rope in which the outer strands, prior to closing of the rope, are subjected to a compacting process such as drawing, rolling or swaging. Compacted Swaged Rope - Rope which is subjected to a compacting process after closing, thus reducing its diameter. Plastic (Solid Polymer) Filled Rope - Rope in which the free internal spaces are filled with a solid polymer. The polymer extends to, or slightly beyond, the outer circumference of the rope. 237 Cushioned Rope - Stranded rope in which the inner layers, inner strands or core strands are covered with solid polymers or fibers to form a cushion between adjacent strands or layers of strands. Cushion Core Rope - Stranded rope in which the core is covered (coated) or filled and covered (coated) with a solid polymer. Solid Polymer Covered Rope - Rope which is covered (coated) with a solid polymer. Solid Polymer Covered and Filled Rope - Rope which is covered (coated) and filled with a solid polymer. Rope Grade (Rr) - A number corresponding to a wire tensile strength grade on which the minimum breaking force of a rope is calculated. Note: It does not imply that the actual tensile strength grades of the wires in a rope are necessarily the same as the rope grade. Preformed Rope - Stranded rope in which the wires in the strands and the strands in the rope have their internal stresses reduced resulting in a rope in which, after removal of any serving, the wires and the strands will not spring out of the rope formation. Note: Rotation-Resistant stranded ropes should be regarded as non-preformed rope even though the strands may have been partially (lightly) preformed during the closing process. Rope Class - A grouping of rope constructions where the number of outer strands and the number of wires and how they are laid up are within defined limits, resulting in ropes within the class having similar strength and rotational properties. USEFUL INFORMATION

240 238 SECTION 12 - USEFUL INFORMATION Rope Construction - System which denotes the arrangement of the strands and wires within a rope, e.g. 6x19S; 6x36WS; 18x7; 34x7. Cable-laid Rope - An assembly of several (usually six) single layer stranded ropes (referred to as unit ropes) laid helically over a core (usually a seventh single layer stranded rope). Braided Rope - An assembly of several round strands braided in pairs. Electro-mechanical Rope - A stranded or spiral containing electrical conductors. Strand and Rope Lays Lay Direction of Strand - The direction right (Z) or left (S) corresponding to the direction of lay of the outer layer of wires in relation to the longitudinal axis of the strand. Lay Direction of Rope - The direction right (Z) or left (S) corresponding to the direction of lay of the outer strands in relation to the longitudinal axis of a stranded rope or the direction of lay of the outer wires in relation to the longitudinal axis of a spiral rope. Regular Lay - Stranded rope in which the direction of lay of the wires in the outer strands is in the opposite direction to the lay of the outer strands in the rope. Right Regular Lay is designated zz and Left Regular Lay is designated zs. Note: This type of lay is sometimes referred to as ordinary lay. Lang Lay - Stranded rope in which the direction of lay of the wires in the outer strands is the same as that of the outer strands in the rope. Right Lang Lay is designated zz and Left Lang lay is designated ss. Alternate Lay - Stranded rope in which the lay of the outer strands is alternatively Lang s lay and regular lay. Right hand alternate lay is designated AZ and left hand alternate lay is designated AS. Contra-Lay - Rope in which at least one layer of wires in a spiral rope or one layer of strands in a stranded rope is laid in the opposite direction to the other layer(s) of wire or strands respectively. Note: Contra-lay is only possible in spiral ropes having more than one layer of wires in multi-layer stranded ropes. Rope Lay Length (Stranded Rope) - That distance parallel to the axis of the rope in which the outer strands make one complete turn (or helix) about the axis of the rope. Cores Core - Central element, usually of fiber or steel, of a single layer stranded rope, around which are laid helically the outer strands of a stranded rope or the outer unit ropes of a cable-laid rope. Fiber Core - Core made from either natural (e.g. hemp, sisal) or synthetic fibers (e.g. polypropylene) and designated by its diameter and runnage. Steel Core - Core produced either as an independent wire rope (e.g. 7x7) or wire strand (e.g. 1x7). Solid Polymer Core - Core produced as a single element of solid polymer having a round or grooved shaped. It may also contain internal elements of wire or fiber. Insert - Element of fiber or solid polymer so positioned as to separate adjacent strands or wires in the same or overlying layers and fill, or partly fill, some of the interstices in the rope. Rope Characteristics and Properties Fill Factor - The ratio between the sum of the nominal cross-sectional areas of all the load bearing wires in the rope and the circumscribed area of the rope based on its nominal diameter. Spinning Loss Factor - The ratio between the calculated minimum breaking force of the rope and the calculated minimum aggregate breaking force of the rope. Minimum Breaking Force (T min) - Specified value, in tons or kn, below which the measured breaking force is not allowed to fall in a prescribed test. Rope Torque - Value, usually expressed in ft pounds or N.m, resulting from either test or calculation, relating to the torque generated when both ends of the rope are fixed and the rope is subjected to tensile loading. Rope Turn - Value, usually expressed in degrees per foot/ meter, resulting from either test or calculation, relating to the amount of rotation when one end of the rope is free to rotate and the rope is subjected to tensile loading. Constructional Stretch (Initial Extension) - Amount of extension which is attributed to the initial bedding down of the wires within the strands and the strands within the rope due to tensile loading. Note: This is sometimes referred to as constructional stretch. Elastic Stretch (Extension) - Amount of extension which follows Hooke s Law within certain limits due to application of a tensile load. Permanent Rope Extension - Non-elastic extension.

241 SECTION 12 - USEFUL INFORMATION 239 General Industry Terms Working Load Limit - The maximum load in pounds (kilograms, etc.), in straight tension, at which the product can safely be used. Proof Test - designates the minimum tensile force which has been applied to the product under a constantly increasing force in direct tension. Minimum Break Force - (Ultimate Load) - the minimum force at which the product during manufacture has been found by testing to break, by representative sampling, when a constantly increasing force is applied in direct tension. Overhead Lifting - That process of lifting that would elevate a freely suspended load to such a position that dropping the load would present a possibility of bodily injury or property damage. Overload - Any static or dynamic load in excess of the Working Load Limit. Competent Person - A designated person, qualified by knowledge and practical experience, and with the necessary instructions to enable the required examinations to be carried out. Elongation - The amount (%) of stretch a product exhibits from the proof test to the breaking point, determined by representative sampling. Calibration - A form of proof testing that insures the same measurement over a predetermined number of links in a running length of chain. Heat Treatment - (Through Hardening) - Subjecting the product to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined period of time, and then quenching to at strength & hardness to the steel. Case Hardening - A process of heat treating in an atmosphere of carbon which adds this carbon to the surface of the steel. The result is a product with a hard surface for improved wear. Hallmarking - (Embossing) - The method of placing an identification mark on the product which identifies the grade and manufacturer. Design Factor - The ratio of the Minimum Break Force to the Working Load Limit. Initial Inspection - The inspection of a new product prior to being placed into service for the first time. Smooth Faced Drum - A drum with a plain, ungrooved surface. Grooved Drum - A drum with a grooved surface. Drum - A cylindrical flanged barrel (either of uniform or tapered diameter) on which rope is wound either for operation or storage. Its surface may be smooth or grooved. Reel -Theflanged spool on which wire rope or strand is wound for storage or shipment. Reeving - A system in which a rope or chain travels around drums, sheaves or sprockets. Throat Opening - The dimension describing the maximum hook opening to accept the load. Headroom - The distance between the bottom of the beam flange and the lower hook or the distance between the bearing surfaces of the upper and lower hooks at the high hook position. Duty Cycle - Expresses a powered device s capability, determined by load, rate and number of motor activations. Through heat generation, these factors limit the operating capability of the device. End Truck - An assembly consisting of the frame and wheels which support a crane girder and allow movement along a runway - used in pairs. Load Chain - The load bearing chain in a hoist. Hand Chain - The hoist chain grasped by a person to apply the force required for the lifting or lowering of a load; also used to apply the operating force to move geared trolleys along a beam. Hoist - A suspended machinery unit that is used for lifting and lowering a freely suspended (unguided) load; can be powered by hand, air or electricity; lifting medium either chain, wire rope or roller chain. Overhaul - In the operation of a hand chain hoist, the length of hand chain moved through the hoist to lift the load on foot (ft). Chain Container - A vessel attached to the hoist to store load chain not being used to support the load. Lever Operated Hoist - Hand-operated hoist used to pull, lift, drag or stretch loads. Features easy, one-hand operating and control. Frequent Inspection - The inspection of a product prior to each time it is being used. Periodic Inspection - OSHA requires a written report of the inspection of slings and other products at least once every 12 months. Severe working conditions may require that these periodic inspections be performed more often. USEFUL INFORMATION

242 240 SECTION 12 - USEFUL INFORMATION Metric Conversion Tables To Convert Into Multiply By Bar Kilograms per centimeter squared (kg/cm 2 ) Degrees Farenheit Degrees Celsius o C=( o F-32)x5/9 Degrees Celsius Degrees Farenheit o F=( o Cx9/5)+32 Feet (ft.) Meters (m) Gallons (U.S.) Liters (l) Inches Millimeters (mm) 25.4 Kilograms (kg) Pounds (lbs.) Kilograms/Meters (kg/m) Pounds/Feet (lbs./ft.) Kilonewtons (kn) Pounds Force (lbf) Kilonewtons (kn) U.S. Tons Force Liters (l) Gallon (gal) Megapascals (MPa) Newtons per square millimeter (N/mm2) Megapascals (MPa) Pounds per square inch (psi) Megapascals (MPa) Kilograms per square inch (ksi) Meters (m) Feet (ft.) Meters (m) Inches Millimeters (mm) Inches Metric Tons U.S. Tons Metric Tons Pounds (lb) Metric Tons Kilograms (kg) 1000 Newtons per square millimeter (N/mm2) Pounds per square inch (psi) Newtons per square millimeter (N/mm2) Megapascals (MPa) Pounds (lbs.) Kilograms (kg) Pounds/Feet (lbs./ft.) Kilograms/Meters (kg/m) Pounds per square inch (psi) Newtons per square millimeter (N/mm2) Pounds per square inch (psi) Megapascals (MPa) Pounds per square inch (psi) Kilograms per centimeter squared (kg/cm Square millimeters (mm2) Square Feet (ft.2) Square inches (in.2) Square millimeters (mm2) Square meters (m2) Square feet (ft.2) Square feet (ft.2) Square meters (m2) Square inches (in.2) Square meters (m2) U.S. Tons Metric Tons U.S. Tons Pounds (lbs.) 2000 U.S. Tons Force Kilonewtons (kn) Equivalent Fraction Equivalent Decimal Equivalent Metric (mm) 1/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Equivalent Fraction Equivalent Decimal Equivalent Metric (mm) 17/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

243 Terms & Conditions INQUIRIES & QUOTATIONS Prompt response is given to all inquiries. Our trained personnel will supply you technical information, a variety of options, as well as price and availability to meet your needs. ORDERS Contact any of our locations for all of your lifting needs. Every order, regardless of size, receives careful and personal attention to ensure your satisfaction. Minimum order $ SERVICE & QUALITY Our goal is to build long-term customer relationships by offering quality products and prompt service. We will make every effort to guarantee your satisfaction. TERMS Net 30 Days from invoice date subject to credit approval. We add a service charge monthly on past due balances (18% per annum) PRICES Unfortunately, we cannot control price changes by our suppliers. Therefore, shipments will be invoiced at the prices in effect on the date of shipment. Prices, terms and conditions are subject to change without notice. TAXES All taxes required by law will be added to invoices unless an exemption certificate is on file with us. RETURNS Products may only be returned by providing a written authorization from an ALP Manager and customers will be charged a 20% restocking fee and any freight charges. Custom cut products, custom ordered products or any fabricated products MAY NOT BE RETURNED. F.O.B. ALP warehouse or Customer Pick-Up at our dock. Return check fee $ Limitation of Liability & Absence of Warranty WARRANTY: ALP Industries, Inc. warrants that goods sold by written description, sample, model, or part number shall substantially conform to such description, sample, model or part number and that the goods have been made in conformance with the customer s design or specifications, if any, which have been supplied to ALP by the customer. This warranty shall be limited to repair or replacement of the goods sold and ALP shall not be liable for any consequential damage. THERE IS NO WARRANTY THAT THESE GOODS SHALL BE FIT FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NOR IS THERE ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THESE GOODS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS PARAGRAPH. THERE IS NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THESE GOODS.

244